Media browsing user interface with intelligently selected representative media items

ABSTRACT

The present disclosure generally relates to navigating a collection of media items. In accordance with one embodiment, a device displays a plurality of content items in a first layout, including a first content item at a first aspect ratio and a first size, a second content item, and a third content item. While displaying the plurality of content items in the first layout, the device detects a user input that includes a gesture, wherein the user input corresponds to a request to change a size of the first content item. In response to detecting the user input, and as the gesture progresses, the device changes the size of the first content item from the first size to a second size while concurrently gradually changing an aspect ratio of the first content item from the first aspect ratio to a second aspect ratio.

CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

This application claims priority to U.S. Patent Application No.62/856,052, entitled “Media Browsing User Interface with IntelligentlySelected Representative Media Items” and filed on Jun. 1, 2019 and U.S.Patent Application No. 62/843,930, entitled “Media Browsing UserInterface with Intelligently Selected Representative Media Items” andfiled on May 6, 2019, the contents of all of which are herebyincorporated by reference in their entirety.

FIELD

The present disclosure relates generally to computer user interfaces,and more specifically to techniques for navigating a collection of mediaitems.

BACKGROUND

As the storage capacity and processing power of devices continues toincrease, coupled with the rise of effortless media sharing betweeninterconnected devices, the size of users' libraries of media items(e.g., photos and videos) continues to increase.

BRIEF SUMMARY

However, as libraries of media items continue to grow, creating anarchive of the user's life and experiences, the libraries can becomecumbersome to navigate. For example, many libraries arrange media itemsby default in a substantially inflexible manner. A user browsing formedia can desire to see media that is related to a current contextacross different time periods. However, some interfaces require the userto navigate to an excessive number of different media directories orinterfaces to locate the content that they seek. This is inefficient anda waste of the user's time and device resources. Accordingly, it istherefore desirable to facilitate presentation of media items in acontextually-relevant way and thereby provide an improved interface forengaging with media content.

Further, some techniques for navigating a collection of media itemsusing electronic devices cumbersome and inefficient. For example, someexisting techniques use a complex and time-consuming user interface,which may include multiple key presses or keystrokes. Existingtechniques require more time and user inputs than necessary, therebywasting user time and device energy. This latter consideration isparticularly important in battery-operated devices.

Accordingly, the present technique provides electronic devices withfaster, more efficient methods and interfaces for navigating acollection of media items. Such methods and interfaces optionallycomplement or replace other methods for navigating a collection of mediaitems. Such methods and interfaces reduce the cognitive burden on a userand produce a more efficient human-machine interface. Forbattery-operated computing devices, such methods and interfaces conservepower and increase the time between battery charges.

In accordance with some embodiments, a method is described. The methodcomprises: at an electronic device with a display device and one or moreinput devices: receiving, via the one or more input devices, a firstinput; in response to receiving the first input, displaying, via thedisplay device, a first view of a collection of media items thatincludes multiple different media items that are associated withcorresponding dates and times, including concurrently displaying arepresentation of a first time period and a representation of a secondtime period that is different from the first time period, including: inaccordance with a determination that a current time is associated with afirst recurring temporal event: the representation of the first timeperiod includes a first region that is occupied by a firstrepresentative media item from the first time period that is selectedbased on the first recurring temporal event; and the representation ofthe second time period includes a second region that is occupied by asecond representative media item from the second time period that isselected based on the first recurring temporal event; and in accordancewith a determination that the current time is associated with a secondrecurring temporal event, wherein the second recurring temporal event isdifferent from the first recurring temporal event: the first region ofthe representation of the first time period is occupied by a thirdrepresentative media item from the first time period that is selectedbased on the second recurring temporal event and is different from thefirst representative media item from the first time period; and thesecond region of the representation of the second time period isoccupied by a fourth representative media item from the second timeperiod that is selected based on the second recurring temporal event andis different from the second representative media item from the secondtime period.

In accordance with some embodiments, a non-transitory computer-readablestorage medium is described. The non-transitory computer-readablestorage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed byone or more processors of an electronic device with a display device andone or more input devices, the one or more programs includinginstructions for: receiving, via the one or more input devices, a firstinput; in response to receiving the first input, displaying, via thedisplay device, a first view of a collection of media items thatincludes multiple different media items that are associated withcorresponding dates and times, including concurrently displaying arepresentation of a first time period and a representation of a secondtime period that is different from the first time period, including: inaccordance with a determination that a current time is associated with afirst recurring temporal event: the representation of the first timeperiod includes a first region that is occupied by a firstrepresentative media item from the first time period that is selectedbased on the first recurring temporal event; and the representation ofthe second time period includes a second region that is occupied by asecond representative media item from the second time period that isselected based on the first recurring temporal event; and in accordancewith a determination that the current time is associated with a secondrecurring temporal event, wherein the second recurring temporal event isdifferent from the first recurring temporal event: the first region ofthe representation of the first time period is occupied by a thirdrepresentative media item from the first time period that is selectedbased on the second recurring temporal event and is different from thefirst representative media item from the first time period; and thesecond region of the representation of the second time period isoccupied by a fourth representative media item from the second timeperiod that is selected based on the second recurring temporal event andis different from the second representative media item from the secondtime period.

In accordance with some embodiments, a transitory computer-readablestorage medium is described. The transitory computer-readable storagemedium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one ormore processors of an electronic device with a display device and one ormore input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for:receiving, via the one or more input devices, a first input; in responseto receiving the first input, displaying, via the display device, afirst view of a collection of media items that includes multipledifferent media items that are associated with corresponding dates andtimes, including concurrently displaying a representation of a firsttime period and a representation of a second time period that isdifferent from the first time period, including: in accordance with adetermination that a current time is associated with a first recurringtemporal event: the representation of the first time period includes afirst region that is occupied by a first representative media item fromthe first time period that is selected based on the first recurringtemporal event; and the representation of the second time periodincludes a second region that is occupied by a second representativemedia item from the second time period that is selected based on thefirst recurring temporal event; and in accordance with a determinationthat the current time is associated with a second recurring temporalevent, wherein the second recurring temporal event is different from thefirst recurring temporal event: the first region of the representationof the first time period is occupied by a third representative mediaitem from the first time period that is selected based on the secondrecurring temporal event and is different from the first representativemedia item from the first time period; and the second region of therepresentation of the second time period is occupied by a fourthrepresentative media item from the second time period that is selectedbased on the second recurring temporal event and is different from thesecond representative media item from the second time period.

In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device is described.The electronic device comprises: a display device; one or more inputdevices; one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programsconfigured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or moreprograms including instructions for: receiving, via the one or moreinput devices, a first input; in response to receiving the first input,displaying, via the display device, a first view of a collection ofmedia items that includes multiple different media items that areassociated with corresponding dates and times, including concurrentlydisplaying a representation of a first time period and a representationof a second time period that is different from the first time period,including: in accordance with a determination that a current time isassociated with a first recurring temporal event: the representation ofthe first time period includes a first region that is occupied by afirst representative media item from the first time period that isselected based on the first recurring temporal event; and therepresentation of the second time period includes a second region thatis occupied by a second representative media item from the second timeperiod that is selected based on the first recurring temporal event; andin accordance with a determination that the current time is associatedwith a second recurring temporal event, wherein the second recurringtemporal event is different from the first recurring temporal event: thefirst region of the representation of the first time period is occupiedby a third representative media item from the first time period that isselected based on the second recurring temporal event and is differentfrom the first representative media item from the first time period; andthe second region of the representation of the second time period isoccupied by a fourth representative media item from the second timeperiod that is selected based on the second recurring temporal event andis different from the second representative media item from the secondtime period.

In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device is described.The electronic device comprises: a display device; one or more inputdevices; means for receiving, via the one or more input devices, a firstinput; means for, responsive to receiving the first input, displaying,via the display device, a first view of a collection of media items thatincludes multiple different media items that are associated withcorresponding dates and times, including concurrently displaying arepresentation of a first time period and a representation of a secondtime period that is different from the first time period, including: inaccordance with a determination that a current time is associated with afirst recurring temporal event: the representation of the first timeperiod includes a first region that is occupied by a firstrepresentative media item from the first time period that is selectedbased on the first recurring temporal event; and the representation ofthe second time period includes a second region that is occupied by asecond representative media item from the second time period that isselected based on the first recurring temporal event; and in accordancewith a determination that the current time is associated with a secondrecurring temporal event, wherein the second recurring temporal event isdifferent from the first recurring temporal event: the first region ofthe representation of the first time period is occupied by a thirdrepresentative media item from the first time period that is selectedbased on the second recurring temporal event and is different from thefirst representative media item from the first time period; and thesecond region of the representation of the second time period isoccupied by a fourth representative media item from the second timeperiod that is selected based on the second recurring temporal event andis different from the second representative media item from the secondtime period.

In accordance with some embodiments, a method is described. The methodcomprises: at an electronic device with a display device and one or moreinput devices: displaying, via the display device, a first plurality ofrepresentations of media items in a first view of a collection of mediaitems, wherein a plurality of media items in the collection of mediaitems include content that can be played back over time; whiledisplaying the first plurality of representations of media items in thefirst view, receiving, via the one or more input devices, a first inputthat corresponds to a request to navigate through a portion of the firstview of the collection of media items that includes representations oftwo or more media items that include content that can be played backover time; in response to receiving the first input, navigating throughthe first view of the collection of media items and while navigatingthrough the first view of the collection of media items automaticallyplaying content from two or more of the media items in the plurality ofmedia items; after navigating through the first view of the collectionof media items, receiving, via the one or more input devices, a secondinput that corresponds to a request to switch to a second view of thecollection of media items; in response to receiving the second input,displaying a second plurality of representations of media items in thesecond view of the collection of media items; while displaying thesecond plurality of representations of media items in the second view ofthe collection of media items, receiving, via the one or more inputdevices, a third input that that corresponds to a request to navigatethrough a portion of the second view of the collection of media itemsthat includes representations of two or more media items that includecontent that can be played back over time; and in response to receivingthe third input, navigating through the second view of the collection ofmedia items without automatically playing content from media items inthe plurality of media items.

In accordance with some embodiments, a non-transitory computer-readablestorage medium is described. The non-transitory computer-readablestorage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed byone or more processors of an electronic device with a display device andone or more input devices, the one or more programs includinginstructions for: displaying, via the display device, a first pluralityof representations of media items in a first view of a collection ofmedia items, wherein a plurality of media items in the collection ofmedia items include content that can be played back over time; whiledisplaying the first plurality of representations of media items in thefirst view, receiving, via the one or more input devices, a first inputthat corresponds to a request to navigate through a portion of the firstview of the collection of media items that includes representations oftwo or more media items that include content that can be played backover time; in response to receiving the first input, navigating throughthe first view of the collection of media items and while navigatingthrough the first view of the collection of media items automaticallyplaying content from two or more of the media items in the plurality ofmedia items; after navigating through the first view of the collectionof media items, receiving, via the one or more input devices, a secondinput that corresponds to a request to switch to a second view of thecollection of media items; in response to receiving the second input,displaying a second plurality of representations of media items in thesecond view of the collection of media items; while displaying thesecond plurality of representations of media items in the second view ofthe collection of media items, receiving, via the one or more inputdevices, a third input that that corresponds to a request to navigatethrough a portion of the second view of the collection of media itemsthat includes representations of two or more media items that includecontent that can be played back over time; and in response to receivingthe third input, navigating through the second view of the collection ofmedia items without automatically playing content from media items inthe plurality of media items.

In accordance with some embodiments, a transitory computer-readablestorage medium is described. The transitory computer-readable storagemedium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one ormore processors of an electronic device with a display device and one ormore input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for:displaying, via the display device, a first plurality of representationsof media items in a first view of a collection of media items, wherein aplurality of media items in the collection of media items includecontent that can be played back over time; while displaying the firstplurality of representations of media items in the first view,receiving, via the one or more input devices, a first input thatcorresponds to a request to navigate through a portion of the first viewof the collection of media items that includes representations of two ormore media items that include content that can be played back over time;in response to receiving the first input, navigating through the firstview of the collection of media items and while navigating through thefirst view of the collection of media items automatically playingcontent from two or more of the media items in the plurality of mediaitems; after navigating through the first view of the collection ofmedia items, receiving, via the one or more input devices, a secondinput that corresponds to a request to switch to a second view of thecollection of media items; in response to receiving the second input,displaying a second plurality of representations of media items in thesecond view of the collection of media items; while displaying thesecond plurality of representations of media items in the second view ofthe collection of media items, receiving, via the one or more inputdevices, a third input that that corresponds to a request to navigatethrough a portion of the second view of the collection of media itemsthat includes representations of two or more media items that includecontent that can be played back over time; and in response to receivingthe third input, navigating through the second view of the collection ofmedia items without automatically playing content from media items inthe plurality of media items.

In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device is described.The electronic device comprises: a display device; one or more inputdevices; one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programsconfigured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or moreprograms including instructions for: displaying, via the display device,a first plurality of representations of media items in a first view of acollection of media items, wherein a plurality of media items in thecollection of media items include content that can be played back overtime; while displaying the first plurality of representations of mediaitems in the first view, receiving, via the one or more input devices, afirst input that corresponds to a request to navigate through a portionof the first view of the collection of media items that includesrepresentations of two or more media items that include content that canbe played back over time; in response to receiving the first input,navigating through the first view of the collection of media items andwhile navigating through the first view of the collection of media itemsautomatically playing content from two or more of the media items in theplurality of media items; after navigating through the first view of thecollection of media items, receiving, via the one or more input devices,a second input that corresponds to a request to switch to a second viewof the collection of media items; in response to receiving the secondinput, displaying a second plurality of representations of media itemsin the second view of the collection of media items; while displayingthe second plurality of representations of media items in the secondview of the collection of media items, receiving, via the one or moreinput devices, a third input that that corresponds to a request tonavigate through a portion of the second view of the collection of mediaitems that includes representations of two or more media items thatinclude content that can be played back over time; and in response toreceiving the third input, navigating through the second view of thecollection of media items without automatically playing content frommedia items in the plurality of media items.

In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device is described.The electronic device comprises: a display device; one or more inputdevices; means for displaying, via the display device, a first pluralityof representations of media items in a first view of a collection ofmedia items, wherein a plurality of media items in the collection ofmedia items include content that can be played back over time; meansfor, while displaying the first plurality of representations of mediaitems in the first view, receiving, via the one or more input devices, afirst input that corresponds to a request to navigate through a portionof the first view of the collection of media items that includesrepresentations of two or more media items that include content that canbe played back over time; means for, responsive to receiving the firstinput, navigating through the first view of the collection of mediaitems and while navigating through the first view of the collection ofmedia items automatically playing content from two or more of the mediaitems in the plurality of media items; means for, after navigatingthrough the first view of the collection of media items, receiving, viathe one or more input devices, a second input that corresponds to arequest to switch to a second view of the collection of media items;means for, responsive to receiving the second input, displaying a secondplurality of representations of media items in the second view of thecollection of media items; means for, while displaying the secondplurality of representations of media items in the second view of thecollection of media items, receiving, via the one or more input devices,a third input that that corresponds to a request to navigate through aportion of the second view of the collection of media items thatincludes representations of two or more media items that include contentthat can be played back over time; and means for, responsive toreceiving the third input, navigating through the second view of thecollection of media items without automatically playing content frommedia items in the plurality of media items.

Exemplary methods are disclosed herein. An example method includes, atan electronic device with a display device: displaying, via the displaydevice, a plurality of content items in a first layout that includes aplurality of rows and a plurality of columns, including displaying: afirst content item of the plurality of content items at a first aspectratio and a first size, a second content item of the plurality ofcontent items, and a third content item of the plurality of contentitems; while displaying, via the display device, the plurality ofcontent items in the first layout that includes the plurality of rowsand the plurality of columns, detecting a user input that includes agesture, wherein the user input corresponds to a request to change asize of the first content item; and in response to detecting the userinput, gradually changing, as the gesture progresses, the size of thefirst content item from the first size to a second size that isdifferent from the first size while concurrently gradually changing, asthe gesture progresses, an aspect ratio of the first content item fromthe first aspect ratio to a second aspect ratio that is different fromthe first aspect ratio.

Exemplary non-transitory computer-readable storage media are describedherein. An example non-transitory computer-readable storage mediumstores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or moreprocessors of an electronic device with a display device, the one ormore programs including instructions for: displaying, via the displaydevice, a plurality of content items in a first layout that includes aplurality of rows and a plurality of columns, including displaying: afirst content item of the plurality of content items at a first aspectratio and a first size, a second content item of the plurality ofcontent items, and a third content item of the plurality of contentitems; while displaying, via the display device, the plurality ofcontent items in the first layout that includes the plurality of rowsand the plurality of columns, detecting a user input that includes agesture, wherein the user input corresponds to a request to change asize of the first content item; and in response to detecting the userinput, gradually changing, as the gesture progresses, the size of thefirst content item from the first size to a second size that isdifferent from the first size while concurrently gradually changing, asthe gesture progresses, an aspect ratio of the first content item fromthe first aspect ratio to a second aspect ratio that is different fromthe first aspect ratio.

Exemplary transitory computer-readable storage media are describedherein. An example transitory computer-readable storage medium storesone or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processorsof an electronic device with a display device, the one or more programsincluding instructions for: displaying, via the display device, aplurality of content items in a first layout that includes a pluralityof rows and a plurality of columns, including displaying: a firstcontent item of the plurality of content items at a first aspect ratioand a first size, a second content item of the plurality of contentitems, and a third content item of the plurality of content items; whiledisplaying, via the display device, the plurality of content items inthe first layout that includes the plurality of rows and the pluralityof columns, detecting a user input that includes a gesture, wherein theuser input corresponds to a request to change a size of the firstcontent item; and in response to detecting the user input, graduallychanging, as the gesture progresses, the size of the first content itemfrom the first size to a second size that is different from the firstsize while concurrently gradually changing, as the gesture progresses,an aspect ratio of the first content item from the first aspect ratio toa second aspect ratio that is different from the first aspect ratio.

Exemplary electronic devices are described herein. An example electronicdevice includes a display device; one or more processors; and memorystoring one or more programs configured to be executed by the one ormore processors, the one or more programs including instructions for:displaying, via the display device, a plurality of content items in afirst layout that includes a plurality of rows and a plurality ofcolumns, including displaying: a first content item of the plurality ofcontent items at a first aspect ratio and a first size, a second contentitem of the plurality of content items, and a third content item of theplurality of content items; while displaying, via the display device,the plurality of content items in the first layout that includes theplurality of rows and the plurality of columns, detecting a user inputthat includes a gesture, wherein the user input corresponds to a requestto change a size of the first content item; and in response to detectingthe user input, gradually changing, as the gesture progresses, the sizeof the first content item from the first size to a second size that isdifferent from the first size while concurrently gradually changing, asthe gesture progresses, an aspect ratio of the first content item fromthe first aspect ratio to a second aspect ratio that is different fromthe first aspect ratio.

Exemplary electronic devices are described herein. An example electronicdevice includes a display device; means for displaying, via the displaydevice, a plurality of content items in a first layout that includes aplurality of rows and a plurality of columns, including displaying: afirst content item of the plurality of content items at a first aspectratio and a first size, a second content item of the plurality ofcontent items, and a third content item of the plurality of contentitems; means for while displaying, via the display device, the pluralityof content items in the first layout that includes the plurality of rowsand the plurality of columns, detecting a user input that includes agesture, wherein the user input corresponds to a request to change asize of the first content item; and means for in response to detectingthe user input, gradually changing, as the gesture progresses, the sizeof the first content item from the first size to a second size that isdifferent from the first size while concurrently gradually changing, asthe gesture progresses, an aspect ratio of the first content item fromthe first aspect ratio to a second aspect ratio that is different fromthe first aspect ratio.

Exemplary methods are disclosed herein. An example method includes, atan electronic device with a display device: displaying, via the displaydevice, a plurality of content items in a first layout, includingconcurrently displaying: a first content item of the plurality ofcontent items, and a second content item of the plurality of contentitems; while displaying, via the display device, the plurality ofcontent items in the first layout, detecting a user input thatcorresponds to a request to change a size of the first content item; andin response to detecting the user input, starting to transition fromdisplaying the first content item in the first layout to displaying thefirst content item in a second layout, wherein: the second layout isdifferent from the first layout; in the first layout the second contentitem has a first location relative to the first content item; in thesecond layout a third content item, different from the first contentitem, has the first location relative to the first content item; andtransitioning from displaying the first content item in the first layoutto displaying the first content item in the second layout includesdisplaying a combination of the second content item and the thirdcontent item at the first location relative to the first content itemduring the transition from displaying the first content item in thefirst layout to displaying the first content item in the second layout.

Exemplary non-transitory computer-readable storage media are describedherein. An example non-transitory computer-readable storage mediumstores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or moreprocessors of an electronic device with a display device, the one ormore programs including instructions for: displaying, via the displaydevice, a plurality of content items in a first layout, includingconcurrently displaying: a first content item of the plurality ofcontent items, and a second content item of the plurality of contentitems; while displaying, via the display device, the plurality ofcontent items in the first layout, detecting a user input thatcorresponds to a request to change a size of the first content item; andin response to detecting the user input, starting to transition fromdisplaying the first content item in the first layout to displaying thefirst content item in a second layout, wherein: the second layout isdifferent from the first layout; in the first layout the second contentitem has a first location relative to the first content item; in thesecond layout a third content item, different from the first contentitem, has the first location relative to the first content item; andtransitioning from displaying the first content item in the first layoutto displaying the first content item in the second layout includesdisplaying a combination of the second content item and the thirdcontent item at the first location relative to the first content itemduring the transition from displaying the first content item in thefirst layout to displaying the first content item in the second layout.

Exemplary transitory computer-readable storage media are describedherein. An example transitory computer-readable storage medium storesone or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processorsof an electronic device with a display device, the one or more programsincluding instructions for: displaying, via the display device, aplurality of content items in a first layout, including concurrentlydisplaying: a first content item of the plurality of content items, anda second content item of the plurality of content items; whiledisplaying, via the display device, the plurality of content items inthe first layout, detecting a user input that corresponds to a requestto change a size of the first content item; and in response to detectingthe user input, starting to transition from displaying the first contentitem in the first layout to displaying the first content item in asecond layout, wherein: the second layout is different from the firstlayout; in the first layout the second content item has a first locationrelative to the first content item; in the second layout a third contentitem, different from the first content item, has the first locationrelative to the first content item; and transitioning from displayingthe first content item in the first layout to displaying the firstcontent item in the second layout includes displaying a combination ofthe second content item and the third content item at the first locationrelative to the first content item during the transition from displayingthe first content item in the first layout to displaying the firstcontent item in the second layout.

Exemplary electronic devices are described herein. An example electronicdevice includes a display device; one or more processors; and memorystoring one or more programs configured to be executed by the one ormore processors, the one or more programs including instructions for:displaying, via the display device, a plurality of content items in afirst layout, including concurrently displaying: a first content item ofthe plurality of content items, and a second content item of theplurality of content items; while displaying, via the display device,the plurality of content items in the first layout, detecting a userinput that corresponds to a request to change a size of the firstcontent item; and in response to detecting the user input, starting totransition from displaying the first content item in the first layout todisplaying the first content item in a second layout, wherein: thesecond layout is different from the first layout; in the first layoutthe second content item has a first location relative to the firstcontent item; in the second layout a third content item, different fromthe first content item, has the first location relative to the firstcontent item; and transitioning from displaying the first content itemin the first layout to displaying the first content item in the secondlayout includes displaying a combination of the second content item andthe third content item at the first location relative to the firstcontent item during the transition from displaying the first contentitem in the first layout to displaying the first content item in thesecond layout.

Exemplary electronic devices are described herein. An example electronicdevice includes a display device; means for displaying, via the displaydevice, a plurality of content items in a first layout, includingconcurrently displaying: a first content item of the plurality ofcontent items, and a second content item of the plurality of contentitems; means for while displaying, via the display device, the pluralityof content items in the first layout, detecting a user input thatcorresponds to a request to change a size of the first content item; andmeans for in response to detecting the user input, starting totransition from displaying the first content item in the first layout todisplaying the first content item in a second layout, wherein: thesecond layout is different from the first layout; in the first layoutthe second content item has a first location relative to the firstcontent item; in the second layout a third content item, different fromthe first content item, has the first location relative to the firstcontent item; and transitioning from displaying the first content itemin the first layout to displaying the first content item in the secondlayout includes displaying a combination of the second content item andthe third content item at the first location relative to the firstcontent item during the transition from displaying the first contentitem in the first layout to displaying the first content item in thesecond layout.

Exemplary methods are disclosed herein. An example method includes, atan electronic device with a display device: displaying, via the displaydevice, a plurality of content items in a first layout, includingconcurrently displaying: a first content item of the plurality ofcontent items in a first location, and a second content item of theplurality of content items in a second location different from the firstlocation; while displaying, via the display device, the plurality ofcontent items in the first layout, detecting a request to display asecond layout different from the first layout; and in response todetecting the request to display the second layout, starting totransition from the first layout to the second layout, wherein thesecond layout includes a plurality of rows and a plurality of columns,including: displaying, via the display device, a third content item thatwas not displayed in the first layout, displaying, via the displaydevice, movement of the first content item from the first location to athird location in the second layout, wherein the third location isdifferent from the first location and already contains a representationof the first content item, and displaying, via the display device,movement of the second content item from the second location to a fourthlocation in the second layout, wherein the fourth location is differentfrom the second location and already contains a representation of thesecond content item.

Exemplary non-transitory computer-readable storage media are describedherein. An example non-transitory computer-readable storage mediumstores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or moreprocessors of an electronic device with a display device, the one ormore programs including instructions for: displaying, via the displaydevice, a plurality of content items in a first layout, includingconcurrently displaying: a first content item of the plurality ofcontent items in a first location, and a second content item of theplurality of content items in a second location different from the firstlocation; while displaying, via the display device, the plurality ofcontent items in the first layout, detecting a request to display asecond layout different from the first layout; and in response todetecting the request to display the second layout, starting totransition from the first layout to the second layout, wherein thesecond layout includes a plurality of rows and a plurality of columns,including: displaying, via the display device, a third content item thatwas not displayed in the first layout, displaying, via the displaydevice, movement of the first content item from the first location to athird location in the second layout, wherein the third location isdifferent from the first location and already contains a representationof the first content item, and displaying, via the display device,movement of the second content item from the second location to a fourthlocation in the second layout, wherein the fourth location is differentfrom the second location and already contains a representation of thesecond content item.

Exemplary transitory computer-readable storage media are describedherein. An example transitory computer-readable storage medium storesone or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processorsof an electronic device with a display device, the one or more programsincluding instructions for: displaying, via the display device, aplurality of content items in a first layout, including concurrentlydisplaying: a first content item of the plurality of content items in afirst location, and a second content item of the plurality of contentitems in a second location different from the first location; whiledisplaying, via the display device, the plurality of content items inthe first layout, detecting a request to display a second layoutdifferent from the first layout; and in response to detecting therequest to display the second layout, starting to transition from thefirst layout to the second layout, wherein the second layout includes aplurality of rows and a plurality of columns, including: displaying, viathe display device, a third content item that was not displayed in thefirst layout, displaying, via the display device, movement of the firstcontent item from the first location to a third location in the secondlayout, wherein the third location is different from the first locationand already contains a representation of the first content item, anddisplaying, via the display device, movement of the second content itemfrom the second location to a fourth location in the second layout,wherein the fourth location is different from the second location andalready contains a representation of the second content item.

Exemplary electronic devices are described herein. An example electronicdevice includes a display device; one or more processors; and memorystoring one or more programs configured to be executed by the one ormore processors, the one or more programs including instructions for:displaying, via the display device, a plurality of content items in afirst layout, including concurrently displaying: a first content item ofthe plurality of content items in a first location, and a second contentitem of the plurality of content items in a second location differentfrom the first location; while displaying, via the display device, theplurality of content items in the first layout, detecting a request todisplay a second layout different from the first layout; and in responseto detecting the request to display the second layout, starting totransition from the first layout to the second layout, wherein thesecond layout includes a plurality of rows and a plurality of columns,including: displaying, via the display device, a third content item thatwas not displayed in the first layout, displaying, via the displaydevice, movement of the first content item from the first location to athird location in the second layout, wherein the third location isdifferent from the first location and already contains a representationof the first content item, and displaying, via the display device,movement of the second content item from the second location to a fourthlocation in the second layout, wherein the fourth location is differentfrom the second location and already contains a representation of thesecond content item.

Exemplary electronic devices are described herein. An example electronicdevice includes a display device; means for displaying, via the displaydevice, a plurality of content items in a first layout, includingconcurrently displaying: a first content item of the plurality ofcontent items in a first location, and a second content item of theplurality of content items in a second location different from the firstlocation; means for while displaying, via the display device, theplurality of content items in the first layout, detecting a request todisplay a second layout different from the first layout; and means forin response to detecting the request to display the second layout,starting to transition from the first layout to the second layout,wherein the second layout includes a plurality of rows and a pluralityof columns, including: displaying, via the display device, a thirdcontent item that was not displayed in the first layout, displaying, viathe display device, movement of the first content item from the firstlocation to a third location in the second layout, wherein the thirdlocation is different from the first location and already contains arepresentation of the first content item, and displaying, via thedisplay device, movement of the second content item from the secondlocation to a fourth location in the second layout, wherein the fourthlocation is different from the second location and already contains arepresentation of the second content item.

Executable instructions for performing these functions are, optionally,included in a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium or othercomputer program product configured for execution by one or moreprocessors. Executable instructions for performing these functions are,optionally, included in a transitory computer-readable storage medium orother computer program product configured for execution by one or moreprocessors.

Thus, devices are provided with faster, more efficient methods andinterfaces for navigating a collection of media items, therebyincreasing the effectiveness, efficiency, and user satisfaction withsuch devices. Such methods and interfaces may complement or replaceother methods for navigating a collection of media items.

DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES

For a better understanding of the various described embodiments,reference should be made to the Description of Embodiments below, inconjunction with the following drawings in which like reference numeralsrefer to corresponding parts throughout the figures.

FIG. 1A is a block diagram illustrating a portable multifunction devicewith a touch-sensitive display in accordance with some embodiments.

FIG. 1B is a block diagram illustrating exemplary components for eventhandling in accordance with some embodiments.

FIG. 2 illustrates a portable multifunction device having a touch screenin accordance with some embodiments.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram of an exemplary multifunction device with adisplay and a touch-sensitive surface in accordance with someembodiments.

FIG. 4A illustrates an exemplary user interface for a menu ofapplications on a portable multifunction device in accordance with someembodiments.

FIG. 4B illustrates an exemplary user interface for a multifunctiondevice with a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from the displayin accordance with some embodiments.

FIG. 5A illustrates a personal electronic device in accordance with someembodiments.

FIG. 5B is a block diagram illustrating a personal electronic device inaccordance with some embodiments.

FIGS. 5C-5D illustrate exemplary components of a personal electronicdevice having a touch-sensitive display and intensity sensors inaccordance with some embodiments.

FIGS. 5E-5H illustrate exemplary components and user interfaces of apersonal electronic device in accordance with some embodiments.

FIGS. 6A-6N illustrate exemplary user interfaces for navigating acollection of media items.

FIG. 7 is a flow diagram illustrating an exemplary process fornavigating a collection of media items.

FIGS. 8A-8Q illustrate exemplary user interfaces for navigating acollection of media items.

FIG. 9 is a flow diagram illustrating an exemplary process fornavigating a collection of media items.

FIGS. 10A-10O illustrate exemplary user interfaces for navigating acollection of media items, in accordance with some embodiments.

FIG. 11 is a flow diagram illustrating an exemplary process fornavigating a collection of media items, in accordance with someembodiments.

FIGS. 12A-12O illustrate exemplary user interfaces for navigating acollection of media items, in accordance with some embodiments.

FIG. 13 is a flow diagram illustrating an exemplary process fornavigating a collection of media items, in accordance with someembodiments.

FIGS. 14A-14F illustrate exemplary user interfaces for navigating acollection of media items, in accordance with some embodiments.

FIG. 15 is a flow diagram illustrating an exemplary process fornavigating a collection of media items, in accordance with someembodiments.

DESCRIPTION OF EMBODIMENTS

The following description sets forth exemplary methods, parameters, andthe like. It should be recognized, however, that such description is notintended as a limitation on the scope of the present disclosure but isinstead provided as a description of exemplary embodiments.

There is a need for electronic devices that provide efficient methodsand interfaces for navigating a collection of media items. For example,techniques that eliminate extensive manual effort by the user navigatinginterfaces in order to retrieve media content that is related a currentcontext. Such techniques can reduce the cognitive burden on a user whoaccesses a collection of media items, thereby enhancing productivity.Further, such techniques can reduce processor and battery powerotherwise wasted on redundant user inputs.

Below, FIGS. 1A-1B, 2, 3, 4A-4B, and 5A-5H provide a description ofexemplary devices for performing the techniques for navigating acollection of media items. FIGS. 6A-6N illustrate exemplary userinterfaces for navigating a collection of media items. FIG. 7 is a flowdiagram illustrating methods of navigating a collection of media itemsin accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in FIGS. 6A-6Nare used to illustrate the processes described below, including theprocesses in FIG. 7. FIGS. 8A-8Q illustrate exemplary user interfacesfor navigating a collection of media items. FIG. 9 is a flow diagramillustrating methods of navigating a collection of media items inaccordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in FIGS. 8A-8Q areused to illustrate the processes described below, including theprocesses in FIG. 9. FIGS. 10A-10O illustrate exemplary user interfacesfor navigating a collection of media items. FIG. 11 is a flow diagramillustrating methods of navigating a collection of media items inaccordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in FIGS. 10A-10Oare used to illustrate the processes described below, including theprocesses in FIG. 11. FIGS. 12A-12O illustrate exemplary user interfacesfor navigating a collection of media items. FIG. 13 is a flow diagramillustrating methods of navigating a collection of media items inaccordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in FIGS. 12A-12Oare used to illustrate the processes described below, including theprocesses in FIG. 13. FIGS. 14A-14F illustrate exemplary user interfacesfor navigating a collection of media items. FIG. 15 is a flow diagramillustrating methods of navigating a collection of media items inaccordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in FIGS. 14A-14Fare used to illustrate the processes described below, including theprocesses in FIG. 15.

Although the following description uses terms “first,” “second,” etc. todescribe various elements, these elements should not be limited by theterms. These terms are only used to distinguish one element fromanother. For example, a first touch could be termed a second touch, and,similarly, a second touch could be termed a first touch, withoutdeparting from the scope of the various described embodiments. The firsttouch and the second touch are both touches, but they are not the sametouch.

The terminology used in the description of the various describedembodiments herein is for the purpose of describing particularembodiments only and is not intended to be limiting. As used in thedescription of the various described embodiments and the appendedclaims, the singular forms “a,” “an,” and “the” are intended to includethe plural forms as well, unless the context clearly indicatesotherwise. It will also be understood that the term “and/or” as usedherein refers to and encompasses any and all possible combinations ofone or more of the associated listed items. It will be furtherunderstood that the terms “includes,” “including,” “comprises,” and/or“comprising,” when used in this specification, specify the presence ofstated features, integers, steps, operations, elements, and/orcomponents, but do not preclude the presence or addition of one or moreother features, integers, steps, operations, elements, components,and/or groups thereof.

The term “if” is, optionally, construed to mean “when” or “upon” or “inresponse to determining” or “in response to detecting,” depending on thecontext. Similarly, the phrase “if it is determined” or “if [a statedcondition or event] is detected” is, optionally, construed to mean “upondetermining” or “in response to determining” or “upon detecting [thestated condition or event]” or “in response to detecting [the statedcondition or event],” depending on the context.

Embodiments of electronic devices, user interfaces for such devices, andassociated processes for using such devices are described. In someembodiments, the device is a portable communications device, such as amobile telephone, that also contains other functions, such as PDA and/ormusic player functions. Exemplary embodiments of portable multifunctiondevices include, without limitation, the iPhone®, iPod Touch, and iPad®devices from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif. Other portable electronicdevices, such as laptops or tablet computers with touch-sensitivesurfaces (e.g., touch screen displays and/or touchpads), are,optionally, used. It should also be understood that, in someembodiments, the device is not a portable communications device, but isa desktop computer with a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touch screendisplay and/or a touchpad).

In the discussion that follows, an electronic device that includes adisplay and a touch-sensitive surface is described. It should beunderstood, however, that the electronic device optionally includes oneor more other physical user-interface devices, such as a physicalkeyboard, a mouse, and/or a joystick.

The device typically supports a variety of applications, such as one ormore of the following: a drawing application, a presentationapplication, a word processing application, a website creationapplication, a disk authoring application, a spreadsheet application, agaming application, a telephone application, a video conferencingapplication, an e-mail application, an instant messaging application, aworkout support application, a photo management application, a digitalcamera application, a digital video camera application, a web browsingapplication, a digital music player application, and/or a digital videoplayer application.

The various applications that are executed on the device optionally useat least one common physical user-interface device, such as thetouch-sensitive surface. One or more functions of the touch-sensitivesurface as well as corresponding information displayed on the deviceare, optionally, adjusted and/or varied from one application to the nextand/or within a respective application. In this way, a common physicalarchitecture (such as the touch-sensitive surface) of the deviceoptionally supports the variety of applications with user interfacesthat are intuitive and transparent to the user.

Attention is now directed toward embodiments of portable devices withtouch-sensitive displays. FIG. 1A is a block diagram illustratingportable multifunction device 100 with touch-sensitive display system112 in accordance with some embodiments. Touch-sensitive display 112 issometimes called a “touch screen” for convenience and is sometimes knownas or called a “touch-sensitive display system.” Device 100 includesmemory 102 (which optionally includes one or more computer-readablestorage mediums), memory controller 122, one or more processing units(CPUs) 120, peripherals interface 118, RF circuitry 108, audio circuitry110, speaker 111, microphone 113, input/output (I/O) subsystem 106,other input control devices 116, and external port 124. Device 100optionally includes one or more optical sensors 164. Device 100optionally includes one or more contact intensity sensors 165 fordetecting intensity of contacts on device 100 (e.g., a touch-sensitivesurface such as touch-sensitive display system 112 of device 100).Device 100 optionally includes one or more tactile output generators 167for generating tactile outputs on device 100 (e.g., generating tactileoutputs on a touch-sensitive surface such as touch-sensitive displaysystem 112 of device 100 or touchpad 355 of device 300). Thesecomponents optionally communicate over one or more communication busesor signal lines 103.

As used in the specification and claims, the term “intensity” of acontact on a touch-sensitive surface refers to the force or pressure(force per unit area) of a contact (e.g., a finger contact) on thetouch-sensitive surface, or to a substitute (proxy) for the force orpressure of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface. The intensity of acontact has a range of values that includes at least four distinctvalues and more typically includes hundreds of distinct values (e.g., atleast 256). Intensity of a contact is, optionally, determined (ormeasured) using various approaches and various sensors or combinationsof sensors. For example, one or more force sensors underneath oradjacent to the touch-sensitive surface are, optionally, used to measureforce at various points on the touch-sensitive surface. In someimplementations, force measurements from multiple force sensors arecombined (e.g., a weighted average) to determine an estimated force of acontact. Similarly, a pressure-sensitive tip of a stylus is, optionally,used to determine a pressure of the stylus on the touch-sensitivesurface. Alternatively, the size of the contact area detected on thetouch-sensitive surface and/or changes thereto, the capacitance of thetouch-sensitive surface proximate to the contact and/or changes thereto,and/or the resistance of the touch-sensitive surface proximate to thecontact and/or changes thereto are, optionally, used as a substitute forthe force or pressure of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface. Insome implementations, the substitute measurements for contact force orpressure are used directly to determine whether an intensity thresholdhas been exceeded (e.g., the intensity threshold is described in unitscorresponding to the substitute measurements). In some implementations,the substitute measurements for contact force or pressure are convertedto an estimated force or pressure, and the estimated force or pressureis used to determine whether an intensity threshold has been exceeded(e.g., the intensity threshold is a pressure threshold measured in unitsof pressure). Using the intensity of a contact as an attribute of a userinput allows for user access to additional device functionality that mayotherwise not be accessible by the user on a reduced-size device withlimited real estate for displaying affordances (e.g., on atouch-sensitive display) and/or receiving user input (e.g., via atouch-sensitive display, a touch-sensitive surface, or aphysical/mechanical control such as a knob or a button).

As used in the specification and claims, the term “tactile output”refers to physical displacement of a device relative to a previousposition of the device, physical displacement of a component (e.g., atouch-sensitive surface) of a device relative to another component(e.g., housing) of the device, or displacement of the component relativeto a center of mass of the device that will be detected by a user withthe user's sense of touch. For example, in situations where the deviceor the component of the device is in contact with a surface of a userthat is sensitive to touch (e.g., a finger, palm, or other part of auser's hand), the tactile output generated by the physical displacementwill be interpreted by the user as a tactile sensation corresponding toa perceived change in physical characteristics of the device or thecomponent of the device. For example, movement of a touch-sensitivesurface (e.g., a touch-sensitive display or trackpad) is, optionally,interpreted by the user as a “down click” or “up click” of a physicalactuator button. In some cases, a user will feel a tactile sensationsuch as an “down click” or “up click” even when there is no movement ofa physical actuator button associated with the touch-sensitive surfacethat is physically pressed (e.g., displaced) by the user's movements. Asanother example, movement of the touch-sensitive surface is, optionally,interpreted or sensed by the user as “roughness” of the touch-sensitivesurface, even when there is no change in smoothness of thetouch-sensitive surface. While such interpretations of touch by a userwill be subject to the individualized sensory perceptions of the user,there are many sensory perceptions of touch that are common to a largemajority of users. Thus, when a tactile output is described ascorresponding to a particular sensory perception of a user (e.g., an “upclick,” a “down click,” “roughness”), unless otherwise stated, thegenerated tactile output corresponds to physical displacement of thedevice or a component thereof that will generate the described sensoryperception for a typical (or average) user.

It should be appreciated that device 100 is only one example of aportable multifunction device, and that device 100 optionally has moreor fewer components than shown, optionally combines two or morecomponents, or optionally has a different configuration or arrangementof the components. The various components shown in FIG. 1A areimplemented in hardware, software, or a combination of both hardware andsoftware, including one or more signal processing and/orapplication-specific integrated circuits.

Memory 102 optionally includes high-speed random access memory andoptionally also includes non-volatile memory, such as one or moremagnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or othernon-volatile solid-state memory devices. Memory controller 122optionally controls access to memory 102 by other components of device100.

Peripherals interface 118 can be used to couple input and outputperipherals of the device to CPU 120 and memory 102. The one or moreprocessors 120 run or execute various software programs and/or sets ofinstructions stored in memory 102 to perform various functions fordevice 100 and to process data. In some embodiments, peripheralsinterface 118, CPU 120, and memory controller 122 are, optionally,implemented on a single chip, such as chip 104. In some otherembodiments, they are, optionally, implemented on separate chips.

RF (radio frequency) circuitry 108 receives and sends RF signals, alsocalled electromagnetic signals. RF circuitry 108 converts electricalsignals to/from electromagnetic signals and communicates withcommunications networks and other communications devices via theelectromagnetic signals. RF circuitry 108 optionally includes well-knowncircuitry for performing these functions, including but not limited toan antenna system, an RF transceiver, one or more amplifiers, a tuner,one or more oscillators, a digital signal processor, a CODEC chipset, asubscriber identity module (SIM) card, memory, and so forth. RFcircuitry 108 optionally communicates with networks, such as theInternet, also referred to as the World Wide Web (WWW), an intranetand/or a wireless network, such as a cellular telephone network, awireless local area network (LAN) and/or a metropolitan area network(MAN), and other devices by wireless communication. The RF circuitry 108optionally includes well-known circuitry for detecting near fieldcommunication (NFC) fields, such as by a short-range communicationradio. The wireless communication optionally uses any of a plurality ofcommunications standards, protocols, and technologies, including but notlimited to Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM), Enhanced DataGSM Environment (EDGE), high-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA),high-speed uplink packet access (HSUPA), Evolution, Data-Only (EV-DO),HSPA, HSPA+, Dual-Cell HSPA (DC-HSPDA), long term evolution (LTE), nearfield communication (NFC), wideband code division multiple access(W-CDMA), code division multiple access (CDMA), time division multipleaccess (TDMA), Bluetooth, Bluetooth Low Energy (BTLE), Wireless Fidelity(Wi-Fi) (e.g., IEEE 802.11a, IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n,and/or IEEE 802.11ac), voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP), Wi-MAX, aprotocol for e-mail (e.g., Internet message access protocol (IMAP)and/or post office protocol (POP)), instant messaging (e.g., extensiblemessaging and presence protocol (XMPP), Session Initiation Protocol forInstant Messaging and Presence Leveraging Extensions (SIMPLE), InstantMessaging and Presence Service (IMPS)), and/or Short Message Service(SMS), or any other suitable communication protocol, includingcommunication protocols not yet developed as of the filing date of thisdocument.

Audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, and microphone 113 provide an audiointerface between a user and device 100. Audio circuitry 110 receivesaudio data from peripherals interface 118, converts the audio data to anelectrical signal, and transmits the electrical signal to speaker 111.Speaker 111 converts the electrical signal to human-audible sound waves.Audio circuitry 110 also receives electrical signals converted bymicrophone 113 from sound waves. Audio circuitry 110 converts theelectrical signal to audio data and transmits the audio data toperipherals interface 118 for processing. Audio data is, optionally,retrieved from and/or transmitted to memory 102 and/or RF circuitry 108by peripherals interface 118. In some embodiments, audio circuitry 110also includes a headset jack (e.g., 212, FIG. 2). The headset jackprovides an interface between audio circuitry 110 and removable audioinput/output peripherals, such as output-only headphones or a headsetwith both output (e.g., a headphone for one or both ears) and input(e.g., a microphone).

I/O subsystem 106 couples input/output peripherals on device 100, suchas touch screen 112 and other input control devices 116, to peripheralsinterface 118. I/O subsystem 106 optionally includes display controller156, optical sensor controller 158, depth camera controller 169,intensity sensor controller 159, haptic feedback controller 161, and oneor more input controllers 160 for other input or control devices. Theone or more input controllers 160 receive/send electrical signalsfrom/to other input control devices 116. The other input control devices116 optionally include physical buttons (e.g., push buttons, rockerbuttons, etc.), dials, slider switches, joysticks, click wheels, and soforth. In some alternate embodiments, input controller(s) 160 are,optionally, coupled to any (or none) of the following: a keyboard, aninfrared port, a USB port, and a pointer device such as a mouse. The oneor more buttons (e.g., 208, FIG. 2) optionally include an up/down buttonfor volume control of speaker 111 and/or microphone 113. The one or morebuttons optionally include a push button (e.g., 206, FIG. 2).

A quick press of the push button optionally disengages a lock of touchscreen 112 or optionally begins a process that uses gestures on thetouch screen to unlock the device, as described in U.S. patentapplication Ser. No. 11/322,549, “Unlocking a Device by PerformingGestures on an Unlock Image,” filed Dec. 23, 2005, U.S. Pat. No.7,657,849, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. Alonger press of the push button (e.g., 206) optionally turns power todevice 100 on or off. The functionality of one or more of the buttonsare, optionally, user-customizable. Touch screen 112 is used toimplement virtual or soft buttons and one or more soft keyboards.

Touch-sensitive display 112 provides an input interface and an outputinterface between the device and a user. Display controller 156 receivesand/or sends electrical signals from/to touch screen 112. Touch screen112 displays visual output to the user. The visual output optionallyincludes graphics, text, icons, video, and any combination thereof(collectively termed “graphics”). In some embodiments, some or all ofthe visual output optionally corresponds to user-interface objects.

Touch screen 112 has a touch-sensitive surface, sensor, or set ofsensors that accepts input from the user based on haptic and/or tactilecontact. Touch screen 112 and display controller 156 (along with anyassociated modules and/or sets of instructions in memory 102) detectcontact (and any movement or breaking of the contact) on touch screen112 and convert the detected contact into interaction withuser-interface objects (e.g., one or more soft keys, icons, web pages,or images) that are displayed on touch screen 112. In an exemplaryembodiment, a point of contact between touch screen 112 and the usercorresponds to a finger of the user.

Touch screen 112 optionally uses LCD (liquid crystal display)technology, LPD (light emitting polymer display) technology, or LED(light emitting diode) technology, although other display technologiesare used in other embodiments. Touch screen 112 and display controller156 optionally detect contact and any movement or breaking thereof usingany of a plurality of touch sensing technologies now known or laterdeveloped, including but not limited to capacitive, resistive, infrared,and surface acoustic wave technologies, as well as other proximitysensor arrays or other elements for determining one or more points ofcontact with touch screen 112. In an exemplary embodiment, projectedmutual capacitance sensing technology is used, such as that found in theiPhone® and iPod Touch® from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif.

A touch-sensitive display in some embodiments of touch screen 112 is,optionally, analogous to the multi-touch sensitive touchpads describedin the following U.S. Pat. No. 6,323,846 (Westerman et al.), U.S. Pat.No. 6,570,557 (Westerman et al.), and/or U.S. Pat. No. 6,677,932(Westerman), and/or U.S. Patent Publication 2002/0015024A1, each ofwhich is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. However,touch screen 112 displays visual output from device 100, whereastouch-sensitive touchpads do not provide visual output.

A touch-sensitive display in some embodiments of touch screen 112 isdescribed in the following applications: (1) U.S. patent applicationSer. No. 11/381,313, “Multipoint Touch Surface Controller,” filed May 2,2006; (2) U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/840,862, “MultipointTouchscreen,” filed May 6, 2004; (3) U.S. patent application Ser. No.10/903,964, “Gestures For Touch Sensitive Input Devices,” filed Jul. 30,2004; (4) U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/048,264, “Gestures ForTouch Sensitive Input Devices,” filed Jan. 31, 2005; (5) U.S. patentapplication Ser. No. 11/038,590, “Mode-Based Graphical User InterfacesFor Touch Sensitive Input Devices,” filed Jan. 18, 2005; (6) U.S. patentapplication Ser. No. 11/228,758, “Virtual Input Device Placement On ATouch Screen User Interface,” filed Sep. 16, 2005; (7) U.S. patentapplication Ser. No. 11/228,700, “Operation Of A Computer With A TouchScreen Interface,” filed Sep. 16, 2005; (8) U.S. patent application Ser.No. 11/228,737, “Activating Virtual Keys Of A Touch-Screen VirtualKeyboard,” filed Sep. 16, 2005; and (9) U.S. patent application Ser. No.11/367,749, “Multi-Functional Hand-Held Device,” filed Mar. 3, 2006. Allof these applications are incorporated by reference herein in theirentirety.

Touch screen 112 optionally has a video resolution in excess of 100 dpi.In some embodiments, the touch screen has a video resolution ofapproximately 160 dpi. The user optionally makes contact with touchscreen 112 using any suitable object or appendage, such as a stylus, afinger, and so forth. In some embodiments, the user interface isdesigned to work primarily with finger-based contacts and gestures,which can be less precise than stylus-based input due to the larger areaof contact of a finger on the touch screen. In some embodiments, thedevice translates the rough finger-based input into a precisepointer/cursor position or command for performing the actions desired bythe user.

In some embodiments, in addition to the touch screen, device 100optionally includes a touchpad for activating or deactivating particularfunctions. In some embodiments, the touchpad is a touch-sensitive areaof the device that, unlike the touch screen, does not display visualoutput. The touchpad is, optionally, a touch-sensitive surface that isseparate from touch screen 112 or an extension of the touch-sensitivesurface formed by the touch screen.

Device 100 also includes power system 162 for powering the variouscomponents. Power system 162 optionally includes a power managementsystem, one or more power sources (e.g., battery, alternating current(AC)), a recharging system, a power failure detection circuit, a powerconverter or inverter, a power status indicator (e.g., a light-emittingdiode (LED)) and any other components associated with the generation,management and distribution of power in portable devices.

Device 100 optionally also includes one or more optical sensors 164.FIG. 1A shows an optical sensor coupled to optical sensor controller 158in I/O subsystem 106. Optical sensor 164 optionally includescharge-coupled device (CCD) or complementary metal-oxide semiconductor(CMOS) phototransistors. Optical sensor 164 receives light from theenvironment, projected through one or more lenses, and converts thelight to data representing an image. In conjunction with imaging module143 (also called a camera module), optical sensor 164 optionallycaptures still images or video. In some embodiments, an optical sensoris located on the back of device 100, opposite touch screen display 112on the front of the device so that the touch screen display is enabledfor use as a viewfinder for still and/or video image acquisition. Insome embodiments, an optical sensor is located on the front of thedevice so that the user's image is, optionally, obtained for videoconferencing while the user views the other video conferenceparticipants on the touch screen display. In some embodiments, theposition of optical sensor 164 can be changed by the user (e.g., byrotating the lens and the sensor in the device housing) so that a singleoptical sensor 164 is used along with the touch screen display for bothvideo conferencing and still and/or video image acquisition.

Device 100 optionally also includes one or more depth camera sensors175. FIG. 1A shows a depth camera sensor coupled to depth cameracontroller 169 in I/O subsystem 106. Depth camera sensor 175 receivesdata from the environment to create a three dimensional model of anobject (e.g., a face) within a scene from a viewpoint (e.g., a depthcamera sensor). In some embodiments, in conjunction with imaging module143 (also called a camera module), depth camera sensor 175 is optionallyused to determine a depth map of different portions of an image capturedby the imaging module 143. In some embodiments, a depth camera sensor islocated on the front of device 100 so that the user's image with depthinformation is, optionally, obtained for video conferencing while theuser views the other video conference participants on the touch screendisplay and to capture selfies with depth map data. In some embodiments,the depth camera sensor 175 is located on the back of device, or on theback and the front of the device 100. In some embodiments, the positionof depth camera sensor 175 can be changed by the user (e.g., by rotatingthe lens and the sensor in the device housing) so that a depth camerasensor 175 is used along with the touch screen display for both videoconferencing and still and/or video image acquisition.

Device 100 optionally also includes one or more contact intensitysensors 165. FIG. 1A shows a contact intensity sensor coupled tointensity sensor controller 159 in I/O subsystem 106. Contact intensitysensor 165 optionally includes one or more piezoresistive strain gauges,capacitive force sensors, electric force sensors, piezoelectric forcesensors, optical force sensors, capacitive touch-sensitive surfaces, orother intensity sensors (e.g., sensors used to measure the force (orpressure) of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface). Contact intensitysensor 165 receives contact intensity information (e.g., pressureinformation or a proxy for pressure information) from the environment.In some embodiments, at least one contact intensity sensor is collocatedwith, or proximate to, a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitivedisplay system 112). In some embodiments, at least one contact intensitysensor is located on the back of device 100, opposite touch screendisplay 112, which is located on the front of device 100.

Device 100 optionally also includes one or more proximity sensors 166.FIG. 1A shows proximity sensor 166 coupled to peripherals interface 118.Alternately, proximity sensor 166 is, optionally, coupled to inputcontroller 160 in I/O subsystem 106. Proximity sensor 166 optionallyperforms as described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/241,839,“Proximity Detector In Handheld Device”; Ser. No. 11/240,788, “ProximityDetector In Handheld Device”; Ser. No. 11/620,702, “Using Ambient LightSensor To Augment Proximity Sensor Output”; Ser. No. 11/586,862,“Automated Response To And Sensing Of User Activity In PortableDevices”; and Ser. No. 11/638,251, “Methods And Systems For AutomaticConfiguration Of Peripherals,” which are hereby incorporated byreference in their entirety. In some embodiments, the proximity sensorturns off and disables touch screen 112 when the multifunction device isplaced near the user's ear (e.g., when the user is making a phone call).

Device 100 optionally also includes one or more tactile outputgenerators 167. FIG. 1A shows a tactile output generator coupled tohaptic feedback controller 161 in I/O subsystem 106. Tactile outputgenerator 167 optionally includes one or more electroacoustic devicessuch as speakers or other audio components and/or electromechanicaldevices that convert energy into linear motion such as a motor,solenoid, electroactive polymer, piezoelectric actuator, electrostaticactuator, or other tactile output generating component (e.g., acomponent that converts electrical signals into tactile outputs on thedevice). Contact intensity sensor 165 receives tactile feedbackgeneration instructions from haptic feedback module 133 and generatestactile outputs on device 100 that are capable of being sensed by a userof device 100. In some embodiments, at least one tactile outputgenerator is collocated with, or proximate to, a touch-sensitive surface(e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112) and, optionally, generates atactile output by moving the touch-sensitive surface vertically (e.g.,in/out of a surface of device 100) or laterally (e.g., back and forth inthe same plane as a surface of device 100). In some embodiments, atleast one tactile output generator sensor is located on the back ofdevice 100, opposite touch screen display 112, which is located on thefront of device 100.

Device 100 optionally also includes one or more accelerometers 168. FIG.1A shows accelerometer 168 coupled to peripherals interface 118.Alternately, accelerometer 168 is, optionally, coupled to an inputcontroller 160 in I/O subsystem 106. Accelerometer 168 optionallyperforms as described in U.S. Patent Publication No. 20050190059,“Acceleration-based Theft Detection System for Portable ElectronicDevices,” and U.S. Patent Publication No. 20060017692, “Methods AndApparatuses For Operating A Portable Device Based On An Accelerometer,”both of which are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety. Insome embodiments, information is displayed on the touch screen displayin a portrait view or a landscape view based on an analysis of datareceived from the one or more accelerometers. Device 100 optionallyincludes, in addition to accelerometer(s) 168, a magnetometer and a GPS(or GLONASS or other global navigation system) receiver for obtaininginformation concerning the location and orientation (e.g., portrait orlandscape) of device 100.

In some embodiments, the software components stored in memory 102include operating system 126, communication module (or set ofinstructions) 128, contact/motion module (or set of instructions) 130,graphics module (or set of instructions) 132, text input module (or setof instructions) 134, Global Positioning System (GPS) module (or set ofinstructions) 135, and applications (or sets of instructions) 136.Furthermore, in some embodiments, memory 102 (FIG. 1A) or 370 (FIG. 3)stores device/global internal state 157, as shown in FIGS. 1A and 3.Device/global internal state 157 includes one or more of: activeapplication state, indicating which applications, if any, are currentlyactive; display state, indicating what applications, views or otherinformation occupy various regions of touch screen display 112; sensorstate, including information obtained from the device's various sensorsand input control devices 116; and location information concerning thedevice's location and/or attitude.

Operating system 126 (e.g., Darwin, RTXC, LINUX, UNIX, OS X, iOS,WINDOWS, or an embedded operating system such as VxWorks) includesvarious software components and/or drivers for controlling and managinggeneral system tasks (e.g., memory management, storage device control,power management, etc.) and facilitates communication between varioushardware and software components.

Communication module 128 facilitates communication with other devicesover one or more external ports 124 and also includes various softwarecomponents for handling data received by RF circuitry 108 and/orexternal port 124. External port 124 (e.g., Universal Serial Bus (USB),FIREWIRE, etc.) is adapted for coupling directly to other devices orindirectly over a network (e.g., the Internet, wireless LAN, etc.). Insome embodiments, the external port is a multi-pin (e.g., 30-pin)connector that is the same as, or similar to and/or compatible with, the30-pin connector used on iPod@(trademark of Apple Inc.) devices.

Contact/motion module 130 optionally detects contact with touch screen112 (in conjunction with display controller 156) and othertouch-sensitive devices (e.g., a touchpad or physical click wheel).Contact/motion module 130 includes various software components forperforming various operations related to detection of contact, such asdetermining if contact has occurred (e.g., detecting a finger-downevent), determining an intensity of the contact (e.g., the force orpressure of the contact or a substitute for the force or pressure of thecontact), determining if there is movement of the contact and trackingthe movement across the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., detecting one ormore finger-dragging events), and determining if the contact has ceased(e.g., detecting a finger-up event or a break in contact).Contact/motion module 130 receives contact data from the touch-sensitivesurface. Determining movement of the point of contact, which isrepresented by a series of contact data, optionally includes determiningspeed (magnitude), velocity (magnitude and direction), and/or anacceleration (a change in magnitude and/or direction) of the point ofcontact. These operations are, optionally, applied to single contacts(e.g., one finger contacts) or to multiple simultaneous contacts (e.g.,“multitouch”/multiple finger contacts). In some embodiments,contact/motion module 130 and display controller 156 detect contact on atouchpad.

In some embodiments, contact/motion module 130 uses a set of one or moreintensity thresholds to determine whether an operation has beenperformed by a user (e.g., to determine whether a user has “clicked” onan icon). In some embodiments, at least a subset of the intensitythresholds are determined in accordance with software parameters (e.g.,the intensity thresholds are not determined by the activation thresholdsof particular physical actuators and can be adjusted without changingthe physical hardware of device 100). For example, a mouse “click”threshold of a trackpad or touch screen display can be set to any of alarge range of predefined threshold values without changing the trackpador touch screen display hardware. Additionally, in some implementations,a user of the device is provided with software settings for adjustingone or more of the set of intensity thresholds (e.g., by adjustingindividual intensity thresholds and/or by adjusting a plurality ofintensity thresholds at once with a system-level click “intensity”parameter).

Contact/motion module 130 optionally detects a gesture input by a user.Different gestures on the touch-sensitive surface have different contactpatterns (e.g., different motions, timings, and/or intensities ofdetected contacts). Thus, a gesture is, optionally, detected bydetecting a particular contact pattern. For example, detecting a fingertap gesture includes detecting a finger-down event followed by detectinga finger-up (liftoff) event at the same position (or substantially thesame position) as the finger-down event (e.g., at the position of anicon). As another example, detecting a finger swipe gesture on thetouch-sensitive surface includes detecting a finger-down event followedby detecting one or more finger-dragging events, and subsequentlyfollowed by detecting a finger-up (liftoff) event.

Graphics module 132 includes various known software components forrendering and displaying graphics on touch screen 112 or other display,including components for changing the visual impact (e.g., brightness,transparency, saturation, contrast, or other visual property) ofgraphics that are displayed. As used herein, the term “graphics”includes any object that can be displayed to a user, including, withoutlimitation, text, web pages, icons (such as user-interface objectsincluding soft keys), digital images, videos, animations, and the like.

In some embodiments, graphics module 132 stores data representinggraphics to be used. Each graphic is, optionally, assigned acorresponding code. Graphics module 132 receives, from applicationsetc., one or more codes specifying graphics to be displayed along with,if necessary, coordinate data and other graphic property data, and thengenerates screen image data to output to display controller 156.

Haptic feedback module 133 includes various software components forgenerating instructions used by tactile output generator(s) 167 toproduce tactile outputs at one or more locations on device 100 inresponse to user interactions with device 100.

Text input module 134, which is, optionally, a component of graphicsmodule 132, provides soft keyboards for entering text in variousapplications (e.g., contacts 137, e-mail 140, IM 141, browser 147, andany other application that needs text input).

GPS module 135 determines the location of the device and provides thisinformation for use in various applications (e.g., to telephone 138 foruse in location-based dialing; to camera 143 as picture/video metadata;and to applications that provide location-based services such as weatherwidgets, local yellow page widgets, and map/navigation widgets).

Applications 136 optionally include the following modules (or sets ofinstructions), or a subset or superset thereof:

-   -   Contacts module 137 (sometimes called an address book or contact        list);    -   Telephone module 138;    -   Video conference module 139;    -   E-mail client module 140;    -   Instant messaging (IM) module 141;    -   Workout support module 142;    -   Camera module 143 for still and/or video images;    -   Image management module 144;    -   Video player module;    -   Music player module;    -   Browser module 147;    -   Calendar module 148;    -   Widget modules 149, which optionally include one or more of:        weather widget 149-1, stocks widget 149-2, calculator widget        149-3, alarm clock widget 149-4, dictionary widget 149-5, and        other widgets obtained by the user, as well as user-created        widgets 149-6;    -   Widget creator module 150 for making user-created widgets 149-6;    -   Search module 151;    -   Video and music player module 152, which merges video player        module and music player module,    -   Notes module 153;    -   Map module 154; and/or    -   Online video module 155.

Examples of other applications 136 that are, optionally, stored inmemory 102 include other word processing applications, other imageediting applications, drawing applications, presentation applications,JAVA-enabled applications, encryption, digital rights management, voicerecognition, and voice replication.

In conjunction with touch screen 112, display controller 156,contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module134, contacts module 137 are, optionally, used to manage an address bookor contact list (e.g., stored in application internal state 192 ofcontacts module 137 in memory 102 or memory 370), including: addingname(s) to the address book; deleting name(s) from the address book;associating telephone number(s), e-mail address(es), physicaladdress(es) or other information with a name; associating an image witha name; categorizing and sorting names; providing telephone numbers ore-mail addresses to initiate and/or facilitate communications bytelephone 138, video conference module 139, e-mail 140, or IM 141; andso forth.

In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, audio circuitry 110, speaker 111,microphone 113, touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motionmodule 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, telephonemodule 138 are optionally, used to enter a sequence of characterscorresponding to a telephone number, access one or more telephonenumbers in contacts module 137, modify a telephone number that has beenentered, dial a respective telephone number, conduct a conversation, anddisconnect or hang up when the conversation is completed. As notedabove, the wireless communication optionally uses any of a plurality ofcommunications standards, protocols, and technologies.

In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, audio circuitry 110, speaker 111,microphone 113, touch screen 112, display controller 156, optical sensor164, optical sensor controller 158, contact/motion module 130, graphicsmodule 132, text input module 134, contacts module 137, and telephonemodule 138, video conference module 139 includes executable instructionsto initiate, conduct, and terminate a video conference between a userand one or more other participants in accordance with user instructions.

In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch screen 112, displaycontroller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, and textinput module 134, e-mail client module 140 includes executableinstructions to create, send, receive, and manage e-mail in response touser instructions. In conjunction with image management module 144,e-mail client module 140 makes it very easy to create and send e-mailswith still or video images taken with camera module 143.

In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch screen 112, displaycontroller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, and textinput module 134, the instant messaging module 141 includes executableinstructions to enter a sequence of characters corresponding to aninstant message, to modify previously entered characters, to transmit arespective instant message (for example, using a Short Message Service(SMS) or Multimedia Message Service (MMS) protocol for telephony-basedinstant messages or using XMPP, SIMPLE, or IMPS for Internet-basedinstant messages), to receive instant messages, and to view receivedinstant messages. In some embodiments, transmitted and/or receivedinstant messages optionally include graphics, photos, audio files, videofiles and/or other attachments as are supported in an MMS and/or anEnhanced Messaging Service (EMS). As used herein, “instant messaging”refers to both telephony-based messages (e.g., messages sent using SMSor MMS) and Internet-based messages (e.g., messages sent using XMPP,SIMPLE, or IMPS).

In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch screen 112, displaycontroller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, textinput module 134, GPS module 135, map module 154, and music playermodule, workout support module 142 includes executable instructions tocreate workouts (e.g., with time, distance, and/or calorie burninggoals); communicate with workout sensors (sports devices); receiveworkout sensor data; calibrate sensors used to monitor a workout; selectand play music for a workout; and display, store, and transmit workoutdata.

In conjunction with touch screen 112, display controller 156, opticalsensor(s) 164, optical sensor controller 158, contact/motion module 130,graphics module 132, and image management module 144, camera module 143includes executable instructions to capture still images or video(including a video stream) and store them into memory 102, modifycharacteristics of a still image or video, or delete a still image orvideo from memory 102.

In conjunction with touch screen 112, display controller 156,contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134,and camera module 143, image management module 144 includes executableinstructions to arrange, modify (e.g., edit), or otherwise manipulate,label, delete, present (e.g., in a digital slide show or album), andstore still and/or video images.

In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch screen 112, displaycontroller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, and textinput module 134, browser module 147 includes executable instructions tobrowse the Internet in accordance with user instructions, includingsearching, linking to, receiving, and displaying web pages or portionsthereof, as well as attachments and other files linked to web pages.

In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch screen 112, displaycontroller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, textinput module 134, e-mail client module 140, and browser module 147,calendar module 148 includes executable instructions to create, display,modify, and store calendars and data associated with calendars (e.g.,calendar entries, to-do lists, etc.) in accordance with userinstructions.

In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch screen 112, displaycontroller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, textinput module 134, and browser module 147, widget modules 149 aremini-applications that are, optionally, downloaded and used by a user(e.g., weather widget 149-1, stocks widget 149-2, calculator widget149-3, alarm clock widget 149-4, and dictionary widget 149-5) or createdby the user (e.g., user-created widget 149-6). In some embodiments, awidget includes an HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) file, a CSS(Cascading Style Sheets) file, and a JavaScript file. In someembodiments, a widget includes an XML (Extensible Markup Language) fileand a JavaScript file (e.g., Yahoo!Widgets).

In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch screen 112, displaycontroller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, textinput module 134, and browser module 147, the widget creator module 150are, optionally, used by a user to create widgets (e.g., turning auser-specified portion of a web page into a widget).

In conjunction with touch screen 112, display controller 156,contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module134, search module 151 includes executable instructions to search fortext, music, sound, image, video, and/or other files in memory 102 thatmatch one or more search criteria (e.g., one or more user-specifiedsearch terms) in accordance with user instructions.

In conjunction with touch screen 112, display controller 156,contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, audio circuitry 110,speaker 111, RF circuitry 108, and browser module 147, video and musicplayer module 152 includes executable instructions that allow the userto download and play back recorded music and other sound files stored inone or more file formats, such as MP3 or AAC files, and executableinstructions to display, present, or otherwise play back videos (e.g.,on touch screen 112 or on an external, connected display via externalport 124). In some embodiments, device 100 optionally includes thefunctionality of an MP3 player, such as an iPod (trademark of AppleInc.).

In conjunction with touch screen 112, display controller 156,contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module134, notes module 153 includes executable instructions to create andmanage notes, to-do lists, and the like in accordance with userinstructions.

In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch screen 112, displaycontroller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, textinput module 134, GPS module 135, and browser module 147, map module 154are, optionally, used to receive, display, modify, and store maps anddata associated with maps (e.g., driving directions, data on stores andother points of interest at or near a particular location, and otherlocation-based data) in accordance with user instructions.

In conjunction with touch screen 112, display controller 156,contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, audio circuitry 110,speaker 111, RF circuitry 108, text input module 134, e-mail clientmodule 140, and browser module 147, online video module 155 includesinstructions that allow the user to access, browse, receive (e.g., bystreaming and/or download), play back (e.g., on the touch screen or onan external, connected display via external port 124), send an e-mailwith a link to a particular online video, and otherwise manage onlinevideos in one or more file formats, such as H.264. In some embodiments,instant messaging module 141, rather than e-mail client module 140, isused to send a link to a particular online video. Additional descriptionof the online video application can be found in U.S. Provisional PatentApplication No. 60/936,562, “Portable Multifunction Device, Method, andGraphical User Interface for Playing Online Videos,” filed Jun. 20,2007, and U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/968,067, “PortableMultifunction Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for PlayingOnline Videos,” filed Dec. 31, 2007, the contents of which are herebyincorporated by reference in their entirety.

Each of the above-identified modules and applications corresponds to aset of executable instructions for performing one or more functionsdescribed above and the methods described in this application (e.g., thecomputer-implemented methods and other information processing methodsdescribed herein). These modules (e.g., sets of instructions) need notbe implemented as separate software programs, procedures, or modules,and thus various subsets of these modules are, optionally, combined orotherwise rearranged in various embodiments. For example, video playermodule is, optionally, combined with music player module into a singlemodule (e.g., video and music player module 152, FIG. 1A). In someembodiments, memory 102 optionally stores a subset of the modules anddata structures identified above. Furthermore, memory 102 optionallystores additional modules and data structures not described above.

In some embodiments, device 100 is a device where operation of apredefined set of functions on the device is performed exclusivelythrough a touch screen and/or a touchpad. By using a touch screen and/ora touchpad as the primary input control device for operation of device100, the number of physical input control devices (such as push buttons,dials, and the like) on device 100 is, optionally, reduced.

The predefined set of functions that are performed exclusively through atouch screen and/or a touchpad optionally include navigation betweenuser interfaces. In some embodiments, the touchpad, when touched by theuser, navigates device 100 to a main, home, or root menu from any userinterface that is displayed on device 100. In such embodiments, a “menubutton” is implemented using a touchpad. In some other embodiments, themenu button is a physical push button or other physical input controldevice instead of a touchpad.

FIG. 1B is a block diagram illustrating exemplary components for eventhandling in accordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments,memory 102 (FIG. 1A) or 370 (FIG. 3) includes event sorter 170 (e.g., inoperating system 126) and a respective application 136-1 (e.g., any ofthe aforementioned applications 137-151, 155, 380-390).

Event sorter 170 receives event information and determines theapplication 136-1 and application view 191 of application 136-1 to whichto deliver the event information. Event sorter 170 includes eventmonitor 171 and event dispatcher module 174. In some embodiments,application 136-1 includes application internal state 192, whichindicates the current application view(s) displayed on touch-sensitivedisplay 112 when the application is active or executing. In someembodiments, device/global internal state 157 is used by event sorter170 to determine which application(s) is (are) currently active, andapplication internal state 192 is used by event sorter 170 to determineapplication views 191 to which to deliver event information.

In some embodiments, application internal state 192 includes additionalinformation, such as one or more of: resume information to be used whenapplication 136-1 resumes execution, user interface state informationthat indicates information being displayed or that is ready for displayby application 136-1, a state queue for enabling the user to go back toa prior state or view of application 136-1, and a redo/undo queue ofprevious actions taken by the user.

Event monitor 171 receives event information from peripherals interface118. Event information includes information about a sub-event (e.g., auser touch on touch-sensitive display 112, as part of a multi-touchgesture). Peripherals interface 118 transmits information it receivesfrom I/O subsystem 106 or a sensor, such as proximity sensor 166,accelerometer(s) 168, and/or microphone 113 (through audio circuitry110). Information that peripherals interface 118 receives from I/Osubsystem 106 includes information from touch-sensitive display 112 or atouch-sensitive surface.

In some embodiments, event monitor 171 sends requests to the peripheralsinterface 118 at predetermined intervals. In response, peripheralsinterface 118 transmits event information. In other embodiments,peripherals interface 118 transmits event information only when there isa significant event (e.g., receiving an input above a predeterminednoise threshold and/or for more than a predetermined duration).

In some embodiments, event sorter 170 also includes a hit viewdetermination module 172 and/or an active event recognizer determinationmodule 173.

Hit view determination module 172 provides software procedures fordetermining where a sub-event has taken place within one or more viewswhen touch-sensitive display 112 displays more than one view. Views aremade up of controls and other elements that a user can see on thedisplay.

Another aspect of the user interface associated with an application is aset of views, sometimes herein called application views or userinterface windows, in which information is displayed and touch-basedgestures occur. The application views (of a respective application) inwhich a touch is detected optionally correspond to programmatic levelswithin a programmatic or view hierarchy of the application. For example,the lowest level view in which a touch is detected is, optionally,called the hit view, and the set of events that are recognized as properinputs are, optionally, determined based, at least in part, on the hitview of the initial touch that begins a touch-based gesture.

Hit view determination module 172 receives information related tosub-events of a touch-based gesture. When an application has multipleviews organized in a hierarchy, hit view determination module 172identifies a hit view as the lowest view in the hierarchy which shouldhandle the sub-event. In most circumstances, the hit view is the lowestlevel view in which an initiating sub-event occurs (e.g., the firstsub-event in the sequence of sub-events that form an event or potentialevent). Once the hit view is identified by the hit view determinationmodule 172, the hit view typically receives all sub-events related tothe same touch or input source for which it was identified as the hitview.

Active event recognizer determination module 173 determines which viewor views within a view hierarchy should receive a particular sequence ofsub-events. In some embodiments, active event recognizer determinationmodule 173 determines that only the hit view should receive a particularsequence of sub-events. In other embodiments, active event recognizerdetermination module 173 determines that all views that include thephysical location of a sub-event are actively involved views, andtherefore determines that all actively involved views should receive aparticular sequence of sub-events. In other embodiments, even if touchsub-events were entirely confined to the area associated with oneparticular view, views higher in the hierarchy would still remain asactively involved views.

Event dispatcher module 174 dispatches the event information to an eventrecognizer (e.g., event recognizer 180). In embodiments including activeevent recognizer determination module 173, event dispatcher module 174delivers the event information to an event recognizer determined byactive event recognizer determination module 173. In some embodiments,event dispatcher module 174 stores in an event queue the eventinformation, which is retrieved by a respective event receiver 182.

In some embodiments, operating system 126 includes event sorter 170.Alternatively, application 136-1 includes event sorter 170. In yet otherembodiments, event sorter 170 is a stand-alone module, or a part ofanother module stored in memory 102, such as contact/motion module 130.

In some embodiments, application 136-1 includes a plurality of eventhandlers 190 and one or more application views 191, each of whichincludes instructions for handling touch events that occur within arespective view of the application's user interface. Each applicationview 191 of the application 136-1 includes one or more event recognizers180. Typically, a respective application view 191 includes a pluralityof event recognizers 180. In other embodiments, one or more of eventrecognizers 180 are part of a separate module, such as a user interfacekit or a higher level object from which application 136-1 inheritsmethods and other properties. In some embodiments, a respective eventhandler 190 includes one or more of: data updater 176, object updater177, GUI updater 178, and/or event data 179 received from event sorter170. Event handler 190 optionally utilizes or calls data updater 176,object updater 177, or GUI updater 178 to update the applicationinternal state 192. Alternatively, one or more of the application views191 include one or more respective event handlers 190. Also, in someembodiments, one or more of data updater 176, object updater 177, andGUI updater 178 are included in a respective application view 191.

A respective event recognizer 180 receives event information (e.g.,event data 179) from event sorter 170 and identifies an event from theevent information. Event recognizer 180 includes event receiver 182 andevent comparator 184. In some embodiments, event recognizer 180 alsoincludes at least a subset of: metadata 183, and event deliveryinstructions 188 (which optionally include sub-event deliveryinstructions).

Event receiver 182 receives event information from event sorter 170. Theevent information includes information about a sub-event, for example, atouch or a touch movement. Depending on the sub-event, the eventinformation also includes additional information, such as location ofthe sub-event. When the sub-event concerns motion of a touch, the eventinformation optionally also includes speed and direction of thesub-event. In some embodiments, events include rotation of the devicefrom one orientation to another (e.g., from a portrait orientation to alandscape orientation, or vice versa), and the event informationincludes corresponding information about the current orientation (alsocalled device attitude) of the device.

Event comparator 184 compares the event information to predefined eventor sub-event definitions and, based on the comparison, determines anevent or sub-event, or determines or updates the state of an event orsub-event. In some embodiments, event comparator 184 includes eventdefinitions 186. Event definitions 186 contain definitions of events(e.g., predefined sequences of sub-events), for example, event 1(187-1), event 2 (187-2), and others. In some embodiments, sub-events inan event (187) include, for example, touch begin, touch end, touchmovement, touch cancellation, and multiple touching. In one example, thedefinition for event 1 (187-1) is a double tap on a displayed object.The double tap, for example, comprises a first touch (touch begin) onthe displayed object for a predetermined phase, a first liftoff (touchend) for a predetermined phase, a second touch (touch begin) on thedisplayed object for a predetermined phase, and a second liftoff (touchend) for a predetermined phase. In another example, the definition forevent 2 (187-2) is a dragging on a displayed object. The dragging, forexample, comprises a touch (or contact) on the displayed object for apredetermined phase, a movement of the touch across touch-sensitivedisplay 112, and liftoff of the touch (touch end). In some embodiments,the event also includes information for one or more associated eventhandlers 190.

In some embodiments, event definition 187 includes a definition of anevent for a respective user-interface object. In some embodiments, eventcomparator 184 performs a hit test to determine which user-interfaceobject is associated with a sub-event. For example, in an applicationview in which three user-interface objects are displayed ontouch-sensitive display 112, when a touch is detected on touch-sensitivedisplay 112, event comparator 184 performs a hit test to determine whichof the three user-interface objects is associated with the touch(sub-event). If each displayed object is associated with a respectiveevent handler 190, the event comparator uses the result of the hit testto determine which event handler 190 should be activated. For example,event comparator 184 selects an event handler associated with thesub-event and the object triggering the hit test.

In some embodiments, the definition for a respective event (187) alsoincludes delayed actions that delay delivery of the event informationuntil after it has been determined whether the sequence of sub-eventsdoes or does not correspond to the event recognizer's event type.

When a respective event recognizer 180 determines that the series ofsub-events do not match any of the events in event definitions 186, therespective event recognizer 180 enters an event impossible, eventfailed, or event ended state, after which it disregards subsequentsub-events of the touch-based gesture. In this situation, other eventrecognizers, if any, that remain active for the hit view continue totrack and process sub-events of an ongoing touch-based gesture.

In some embodiments, a respective event recognizer 180 includes metadata183 with configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate howthe event delivery system should perform sub-event delivery to activelyinvolved event recognizers. In some embodiments, metadata 183 includesconfigurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate how eventrecognizers interact, or are enabled to interact, with one another. Insome embodiments, metadata 183 includes configurable properties, flags,and/or lists that indicate whether sub-events are delivered to varyinglevels in the view or programmatic hierarchy.

In some embodiments, a respective event recognizer 180 activates eventhandler 190 associated with an event when one or more particularsub-events of an event are recognized. In some embodiments, a respectiveevent recognizer 180 delivers event information associated with theevent to event handler 190. Activating an event handler 190 is distinctfrom sending (and deferred sending) sub-events to a respective hit view.In some embodiments, event recognizer 180 throws a flag associated withthe recognized event, and event handler 190 associated with the flagcatches the flag and performs a predefined process.

In some embodiments, event delivery instructions 188 include sub-eventdelivery instructions that deliver event information about a sub-eventwithout activating an event handler. Instead, the sub-event deliveryinstructions deliver event information to event handlers associated withthe series of sub-events or to actively involved views. Event handlersassociated with the series of sub-events or with actively involved viewsreceive the event information and perform a predetermined process.

In some embodiments, data updater 176 creates and updates data used inapplication 136-1. For example, data updater 176 updates the telephonenumber used in contacts module 137, or stores a video file used in videoplayer module. In some embodiments, object updater 177 creates andupdates objects used in application 136-1. For example, object updater177 creates a new user-interface object or updates the position of auser-interface object. GUI updater 178 updates the GUI. For example, GUIupdater 178 prepares display information and sends it to graphics module132 for display on a touch-sensitive display.

In some embodiments, event handler(s) 190 includes or has access to dataupdater 176, object updater 177, and GUI updater 178. In someembodiments, data updater 176, object updater 177, and GUI updater 178are included in a single module of a respective application 136-1 orapplication view 191. In other embodiments, they are included in two ormore software modules.

It shall be understood that the foregoing discussion regarding eventhandling of user touches on touch-sensitive displays also applies toother forms of user inputs to operate multifunction devices 100 withinput devices, not all of which are initiated on touch screens. Forexample, mouse movement and mouse button presses, optionally coordinatedwith single or multiple keyboard presses or holds; contact movementssuch as taps, drags, scrolls, etc. on touchpads; pen stylus inputs;movement of the device; oral instructions; detected eye movements;biometric inputs; and/or any combination thereof are optionally utilizedas inputs corresponding to sub-events which define an event to berecognized.

FIG. 2 illustrates a portable multifunction device 100 having a touchscreen 112 in accordance with some embodiments. The touch screenoptionally displays one or more graphics within user interface (UI) 200.In this embodiment, as well as others described below, a user is enabledto select one or more of the graphics by making a gesture on thegraphics, for example, with one or more fingers 202 (not drawn to scalein the figure) or one or more styluses 203 (not drawn to scale in thefigure). In some embodiments, selection of one or more graphics occurswhen the user breaks contact with the one or more graphics. In someembodiments, the gesture optionally includes one or more taps, one ormore swipes (from left to right, right to left, upward and/or downward),and/or a rolling of a finger (from right to left, left to right, upwardand/or downward) that has made contact with device 100. In someimplementations or circumstances, inadvertent contact with a graphicdoes not select the graphic. For example, a swipe gesture that sweepsover an application icon optionally does not select the correspondingapplication when the gesture corresponding to selection is a tap.

Device 100 optionally also include one or more physical buttons, such as“home” or menu button 204. As described previously, menu button 204 is,optionally, used to navigate to any application 136 in a set ofapplications that are, optionally, executed on device 100.Alternatively, in some embodiments, the menu button is implemented as asoft key in a GUI displayed on touch screen 112.

In some embodiments, device 100 includes touch screen 112, menu button204, push button 206 for powering the device on/off and locking thedevice, volume adjustment button(s) 208, subscriber identity module(SIM) card slot 210, headset jack 212, and docking/charging externalport 124. Push button 206 is, optionally, used to turn the poweron/offon the device by depressing the button and holding the button inthe depressed state for a predefined time interval; to lock the deviceby depressing the button and releasing the button before the predefinedtime interval has elapsed; and/or to unlock the device or initiate anunlock process. In an alternative embodiment, device 100 also acceptsverbal input for activation or deactivation of some functions throughmicrophone 113. Device 100 also, optionally, includes one or morecontact intensity sensors 165 for detecting intensity of contacts ontouch screen 112 and/or one or more tactile output generators 167 forgenerating tactile outputs for a user of device 100.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram of an exemplary multifunction device with adisplay and a touch-sensitive surface in accordance with someembodiments. Device 300 need not be portable. In some embodiments,device 300 is a laptop computer, a desktop computer, a tablet computer,a multimedia player device, a navigation device, an educational device(such as a child's learning toy), a gaming system, or a control device(e.g., a home or industrial controller). Device 300 typically includesone or more processing units (CPUs) 310, one or more network or othercommunications interfaces 360, memory 370, and one or more communicationbuses 320 for interconnecting these components. Communication buses 320optionally include circuitry (sometimes called a chipset) thatinterconnects and controls communications between system components.Device 300 includes input/output (I/O) interface 330 comprising display340, which is typically a touch screen display. I/O interface 330 alsooptionally includes a keyboard and/or mouse (or other pointing device)350 and touchpad 355, tactile output generator 357 for generatingtactile outputs on device 300 (e.g., similar to tactile outputgenerator(s) 167 described above with reference to FIG. 1A), sensors 359(e.g., optical, acceleration, proximity, touch-sensitive, and/or contactintensity sensors similar to contact intensity sensor(s) 165 describedabove with reference to FIG. 1A). Memory 370 includes high-speed randomaccess memory, such as DRAM, SRAM, DDR RAM, or other random access solidstate memory devices; and optionally includes non-volatile memory, suchas one or more magnetic disk storage devices, optical disk storagedevices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid state storagedevices. Memory 370 optionally includes one or more storage devicesremotely located from CPU(s) 310. In some embodiments, memory 370 storesprograms, modules, and data structures analogous to the programs,modules, and data structures stored in memory 102 of portablemultifunction device 100 (FIG. 1A), or a subset thereof. Furthermore,memory 370 optionally stores additional programs, modules, and datastructures not present in memory 102 of portable multifunction device100. For example, memory 370 of device 300 optionally stores drawingmodule 380, presentation module 382, word processing module 384, websitecreation module 386, disk authoring module 388, and/or spreadsheetmodule 390, while memory 102 of portable multifunction device 100 (FIG.1A) optionally does not store these modules.

Each of the above-identified elements in FIG. 3 is, optionally, storedin one or more of the previously mentioned memory devices. Each of theabove-identified modules corresponds to a set of instructions forperforming a function described above. The above-identified modules orprograms (e.g., sets of instructions) need not be implemented asseparate software programs, procedures, or modules, and thus varioussubsets of these modules are, optionally, combined or otherwiserearranged in various embodiments. In some embodiments, memory 370optionally stores a subset of the modules and data structures identifiedabove. Furthermore, memory 370 optionally stores additional modules anddata structures not described above.

Attention is now directed towards embodiments of user interfaces thatare, optionally, implemented on, for example, portable multifunctiondevice 100.

FIG. 4A illustrates an exemplary user interface for a menu ofapplications on portable multifunction device 100 in accordance withsome embodiments. Similar user interfaces are, optionally, implementedon device 300. In some embodiments, user interface 400 includes thefollowing elements, or a subset or superset thereof:

-   -   Signal strength indicator(s) 402 for wireless communication(s),        such as cellular and Wi-Fi signals;    -   Time 404;    -   Bluetooth indicator 405;    -   Battery status indicator 406;    -   Tray 408 with icons for frequently used applications, such as:        -   Icon 416 for telephone module 138, labeled “Phone,” which            optionally includes an indicator 414 of the number of missed            calls or voicemail messages;        -   Icon 418 for e-mail client module 140, labeled “Mail,” which            optionally includes an indicator 410 of the number of unread            e-mails;        -   Icon 420 for browser module 147, labeled “Browser;” and        -   Icon 422 for video and music player module 152, also            referred to as iPod (trademark of Apple Inc.) module 152,            labeled “iPod;” and    -   Icons for other applications, such as:        -   Icon 424 for IM module 141, labeled “Messages;”        -   Icon 426 for calendar module 148, labeled “Calendar;”        -   Icon 428 for image management module 144, labeled “Photos;”        -   Icon 430 for camera module 143, labeled “Camera;”        -   Icon 432 for online video module 155, labeled “Online            Video;”        -   Icon 434 for stocks widget 149-2, labeled “Stocks;”        -   Icon 436 for map module 154, labeled “Maps;”        -   Icon 438 for weather widget 149-1, labeled “Weather;”        -   Icon 440 for alarm clock widget 149-4, labeled “Clock;”        -   Icon 442 for workout support module 142, labeled “Workout            Support;”        -   Icon 444 for notes module 153, labeled “Notes;” and        -   Icon 446 for a settings application or module, labeled            “Settings,” which provides access to settings for device 100            and its various applications 136.

It should be noted that the icon labels illustrated in FIG. 4A aremerely exemplary. For example, icon 422 for video and music playermodule 152 is labeled “Music” or “Music Player.” Other labels are,optionally, used for various application icons. In some embodiments, alabel for a respective application icon includes a name of anapplication corresponding to the respective application icon. In someembodiments, a label for a particular application icon is distinct froma name of an application corresponding to the particular applicationicon.

FIG. 4B illustrates an exemplary user interface on a device (e.g.,device 300, FIG. 3) with a touch-sensitive surface 451 (e.g., a tabletor touchpad 355, FIG. 3) that is separate from the display 450 (e.g.,touch screen display 112). Device 300 also, optionally, includes one ormore contact intensity sensors (e.g., one or more of sensors 359) fordetecting intensity of contacts on touch-sensitive surface 451 and/orone or more tactile output generators 357 for generating tactile outputsfor a user of device 300.

Although some of the examples that follow will be given with referenceto inputs on touch screen display 112 (where the touch-sensitive surfaceand the display are combined), in some embodiments, the device detectsinputs on a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from the display,as shown in FIG. 4B. In some embodiments, the touch-sensitive surface(e.g., 451 in FIG. 4B) has a primary axis (e.g., 452 in FIG. 4B) thatcorresponds to a primary axis (e.g., 453 in FIG. 4B) on the display(e.g., 450). In accordance with these embodiments, the device detectscontacts (e.g., 460 and 462 in FIG. 4B) with the touch-sensitive surface451 at locations that correspond to respective locations on the display(e.g., in FIG. 4B, 460 corresponds to 468 and 462 corresponds to 470).In this way, user inputs (e.g., contacts 460 and 462, and movementsthereof) detected by the device on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g.,451 in FIG. 4B) are used by the device to manipulate the user interfaceon the display (e.g., 450 in FIG. 4B) of the multifunction device whenthe touch-sensitive surface is separate from the display. It should beunderstood that similar methods are, optionally, used for other userinterfaces described herein.

Additionally, while the following examples are given primarily withreference to finger inputs (e.g., finger contacts, finger tap gestures,finger swipe gestures), it should be understood that, in someembodiments, one or more of the finger inputs are replaced with inputfrom another input device (e.g., a mouse-based input or stylus input).For example, a swipe gesture is, optionally, replaced with a mouse click(e.g., instead of a contact) followed by movement of the cursor alongthe path of the swipe (e.g., instead of movement of the contact). Asanother example, a tap gesture is, optionally, replaced with a mouseclick while the cursor is located over the location of the tap gesture(e.g., instead of detection of the contact followed by ceasing to detectthe contact). Similarly, when multiple user inputs are simultaneouslydetected, it should be understood that multiple computer mice are,optionally, used simultaneously, or a mouse and finger contacts are,optionally, used simultaneously.

FIG. 5A illustrates exemplary personal electronic device 500. Device 500includes body 502. In some embodiments, device 500 can include some orall of the features described with respect to devices 100 and 300 (e.g.,FIGS. 1A-4B). In some embodiments, device 500 has touch-sensitivedisplay screen 504, hereafter touch screen 504. Alternatively, or inaddition to touch screen 504, device 500 has a display and atouch-sensitive surface. As with devices 100 and 300, in someembodiments, touch screen 504 (or the touch-sensitive surface)optionally includes one or more intensity sensors for detectingintensity of contacts (e.g., touches) being applied. The one or moreintensity sensors of touch screen 504 (or the touch-sensitive surface)can provide output data that represents the intensity of touches. Theuser interface of device 500 can respond to touches based on theirintensity, meaning that touches of different intensities can invokedifferent user interface operations on device 500.

Exemplary techniques for detecting and processing touch intensity arefound, for example, in related applications: International PatentApplication Serial No. PCT/US2013/040061, titled “Device, Method, andGraphical User Interface for Displaying User Interface ObjectsCorresponding to an Application,” filed May 8, 2013, published as WIPOPublication No. WO/2013/169849, and International Patent ApplicationSerial No. PCT/US2013/069483, titled “Device, Method, and Graphical UserInterface for Transitioning Between Touch Input to Display OutputRelationships,” filed Nov. 11, 2013, published as WIPO Publication No.WO/2014/105276, each of which is hereby incorporated by reference intheir entirety.

In some embodiments, device 500 has one or more input mechanisms 506 and508. Input mechanisms 506 and 508, if included, can be physical.Examples of physical input mechanisms include push buttons and rotatablemechanisms. In some embodiments, device 500 has one or more attachmentmechanisms. Such attachment mechanisms, if included, can permitattachment of device 500 with, for example, hats, eyewear, earrings,necklaces, shirts, jackets, bracelets, watch straps, chains, trousers,belts, shoes, purses, backpacks, and so forth. These attachmentmechanisms permit device 500 to be worn by a user.

FIG. 5B depicts exemplary personal electronic device 500. In someembodiments, device 500 can include some or all of the componentsdescribed with respect to FIGS. 1A, 1B, and 3. Device 500 has bus 512that operatively couples I/O section 514 with one or more computerprocessors 516 and memory 518. I/O section 514 can be connected todisplay 504, which can have touch-sensitive component 522 and,optionally, intensity sensor 524 (e.g., contact intensity sensor). Inaddition, I/O section 514 can be connected with communication unit 530for receiving application and operating system data, using Wi-Fi,Bluetooth, near field communication (NFC), cellular, and/or otherwireless communication techniques. Device 500 can include inputmechanisms 506 and/or 508. Input mechanism 506 is, optionally, arotatable input device or a depressible and rotatable input device, forexample. Input mechanism 508 is, optionally, a button, in some examples.

Input mechanism 508 is, optionally, a microphone, in some examples.Personal electronic device 500 optionally includes various sensors, suchas GPS sensor 532, accelerometer 534, directional sensor 540 (e.g.,compass), gyroscope 536, motion sensor 538, and/or a combinationthereof, all of which can be operatively connected to I/O section 514.

Memory 518 of personal electronic device 500 can include one or morenon-transitory computer-readable storage mediums, for storingcomputer-executable instructions, which, when executed by one or morecomputer processors 516, for example, can cause the computer processorsto perform the techniques described below, including processes 700, 900,1100, 1300, and 1500 (FIGS. 7, 9, 11, 13, and 15). A computer-readablestorage medium can be any medium that can tangibly contain or storecomputer-executable instructions for use by or in connection with theinstruction execution system, apparatus, or device. In some examples,the storage medium is a transitory computer-readable storage medium. Insome examples, the storage medium is a non-transitory computer-readablestorage medium. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium caninclude, but is not limited to, magnetic, optical, and/or semiconductorstorages. Examples of such storage include magnetic disks, optical discsbased on CD, DVD, or Blu-ray technologies, as well as persistentsolid-state memory such as flash, solid-state drives, and the like.Personal electronic device 500 is not limited to the components andconfiguration of FIG. 5B, but can include other or additional componentsin multiple configurations.

As used here, the term “affordance” refers to a user-interactivegraphical user interface object that is, optionally, displayed on thedisplay screen of devices 100, 300, and/or 500 (FIGS. 1A, 3, and 5A-5B).For example, an image (e.g., icon), a button, and text (e.g., hyperlink)each optionally constitute an affordance.

As used herein, the term “focus selector” refers to an input elementthat indicates a current part of a user interface with which a user isinteracting. In some implementations that include a cursor or otherlocation marker, the cursor acts as a “focus selector” so that when aninput (e.g., a press input) is detected on a touch-sensitive surface(e.g., touchpad 355 in FIG. 3 or touch-sensitive surface 451 in FIG. 4B)while the cursor is over a particular user interface element (e.g., abutton, window, slider, or other user interface element), the particularuser interface element is adjusted in accordance with the detectedinput. In some implementations that include a touch screen display(e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112 in FIG. 1A or touch screen 112in FIG. 4A) that enables direct interaction with user interface elementson the touch screen display, a detected contact on the touch screen actsas a “focus selector” so that when an input (e.g., a press input by thecontact) is detected on the touch screen display at a location of aparticular user interface element (e.g., a button, window, slider, orother user interface element), the particular user interface element isadjusted in accordance with the detected input. In some implementations,focus is moved from one region of a user interface to another region ofthe user interface without corresponding movement of a cursor ormovement of a contact on a touch screen display (e.g., by using a tabkey or arrow keys to move focus from one button to another button); inthese implementations, the focus selector moves in accordance withmovement of focus between different regions of the user interface.Without regard to the specific form taken by the focus selector, thefocus selector is generally the user interface element (or contact on atouch screen display) that is controlled by the user so as tocommunicate the user's intended interaction with the user interface(e.g., by indicating, to the device, the element of the user interfacewith which the user is intending to interact). For example, the locationof a focus selector (e.g., a cursor, a contact, or a selection box) overa respective button while a press input is detected on thetouch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touchpad or touch screen) will indicatethat the user is intending to activate the respective button (as opposedto other user interface elements shown on a display of the device).

As used in the specification and claims, the term “characteristicintensity” of a contact refers to a characteristic of the contact basedon one or more intensities of the contact. In some embodiments, thecharacteristic intensity is based on multiple intensity samples. Thecharacteristic intensity is, optionally, based on a predefined number ofintensity samples, or a set of intensity samples collected during apredetermined time period (e.g., 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10seconds) relative to a predefined event (e.g., after detecting thecontact, prior to detecting liftoff of the contact, before or afterdetecting a start of movement of the contact, prior to detecting an endof the contact, before or after detecting an increase in intensity ofthe contact, and/or before or after detecting a decrease in intensity ofthe contact). A characteristic intensity of a contact is, optionally,based on one or more of: a maximum value of the intensities of thecontact, a mean value of the intensities of the contact, an averagevalue of the intensities of the contact, a top 10 percentile value ofthe intensities of the contact, a value at the half maximum of theintensities of the contact, a value at the 90 percent maximum of theintensities of the contact, or the like. In some embodiments, theduration of the contact is used in determining the characteristicintensity (e.g., when the characteristic intensity is an average of theintensity of the contact over time). In some embodiments, thecharacteristic intensity is compared to a set of one or more intensitythresholds to determine whether an operation has been performed by auser. For example, the set of one or more intensity thresholdsoptionally includes a first intensity threshold and a second intensitythreshold. In this example, a contact with a characteristic intensitythat does not exceed the first threshold results in a first operation, acontact with a characteristic intensity that exceeds the first intensitythreshold and does not exceed the second intensity threshold results ina second operation, and a contact with a characteristic intensity thatexceeds the second threshold results in a third operation. In someembodiments, a comparison between the characteristic intensity and oneor more thresholds is used to determine whether or not to perform one ormore operations (e.g., whether to perform a respective operation orforgo performing the respective operation), rather than being used todetermine whether to perform a first operation or a second operation.

FIG. 5C illustrates detecting a plurality of contacts 552A-552E ontouch-sensitive display screen 504 with a plurality of intensity sensors524A-524D. FIG. 5C additionally includes intensity diagrams that showthe current intensity measurements of the intensity sensors 524A-524Drelative to units of intensity. In this example, the intensitymeasurements of intensity sensors 524A and 524D are each 9 units ofintensity, and the intensity measurements of intensity sensors 524B and524C are each 7 units of intensity. In some implementations, anaggregate intensity is the sum of the intensity measurements of theplurality of intensity sensors 524A-524D, which in this example is 32intensity units. In some embodiments, each contact is assigned arespective intensity that is a portion of the aggregate intensity. FIG.5D illustrates assigning the aggregate intensity to contacts 552A-552Ebased on their distance from the center of force 554. In this example,each of contacts 552A, 552B, and 552E are assigned an intensity ofcontact of 8 intensity units of the aggregate intensity, and each ofcontacts 552C and 552D are assigned an intensity of contact of 4intensity units of the aggregate intensity. More generally, in someimplementations, each contact j is assigned a respective intensity Ijthat is a portion of the aggregate intensity, A, in accordance with apredefined mathematical function, Ij=A·(Dj/ΣDi), where Dj is thedistance of the respective contact j to the center of force, and EDi isthe sum of the distances of all the respective contacts (e.g., i=1 tolast) to the center of force. The operations described with reference toFIGS. 5C-5D can be performed using an electronic device similar oridentical to device 100, 300, or 500. In some embodiments, acharacteristic intensity of a contact is based on one or moreintensities of the contact. In some embodiments, the intensity sensorsare used to determine a single characteristic intensity (e.g., a singlecharacteristic intensity of a single contact). It should be noted thatthe intensity diagrams are not part of a displayed user interface, butare included in FIGS. 5C-5D to aid the reader.

In some embodiments, a portion of a gesture is identified for purposesof determining a characteristic intensity. For example, atouch-sensitive surface optionally receives a continuous swipe contacttransitioning from a start location and reaching an end location, atwhich point the intensity of the contact increases. In this example, thecharacteristic intensity of the contact at the end location is,optionally, based on only a portion of the continuous swipe contact, andnot the entire swipe contact (e.g., only the portion of the swipecontact at the end location). In some embodiments, a smoothing algorithmis, optionally, applied to the intensities of the swipe contact prior todetermining the characteristic intensity of the contact. For example,the smoothing algorithm optionally includes one or more of: anunweighted sliding-average smoothing algorithm, a triangular smoothingalgorithm, a median filter smoothing algorithm, and/or an exponentialsmoothing algorithm. In some circumstances, these smoothing algorithmseliminate narrow spikes or dips in the intensities of the swipe contactfor purposes of determining a characteristic intensity.

The intensity of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface is,optionally, characterized relative to one or more intensity thresholds,such as a contact-detection intensity threshold, a light press intensitythreshold, a deep press intensity threshold, and/or one or more otherintensity thresholds. In some embodiments, the light press intensitythreshold corresponds to an intensity at which the device will performoperations typically associated with clicking a button of a physicalmouse or a trackpad. In some embodiments, the deep press intensitythreshold corresponds to an intensity at which the device will performoperations that are different from operations typically associated withclicking a button of a physical mouse or a trackpad. In someembodiments, when a contact is detected with a characteristic intensitybelow the light press intensity threshold (e.g., and above a nominalcontact-detection intensity threshold below which the contact is nolonger detected), the device will move a focus selector in accordancewith movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface withoutperforming an operation associated with the light press intensitythreshold or the deep press intensity threshold. Generally, unlessotherwise stated, these intensity thresholds are consistent betweendifferent sets of user interface figures.

An increase of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensitybelow the light press intensity threshold to an intensity between thelight press intensity threshold and the deep press intensity thresholdis sometimes referred to as a “light press” input. An increase ofcharacteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity below the deeppress intensity threshold to an intensity above the deep press intensitythreshold is sometimes referred to as a “deep press” input. An increaseof characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity below thecontact-detection intensity threshold to an intensity between thecontact-detection intensity threshold and the light press intensitythreshold is sometimes referred to as detecting the contact on thetouch-surface. A decrease of characteristic intensity of the contactfrom an intensity above the contact-detection intensity threshold to anintensity below the contact-detection intensity threshold is sometimesreferred to as detecting liftoff of the contact from the touch-surface.In some embodiments, the contact-detection intensity threshold is zero.In some embodiments, the contact-detection intensity threshold isgreater than zero.

In some embodiments described herein, one or more operations areperformed in response to detecting a gesture that includes a respectivepress input or in response to detecting the respective press inputperformed with a respective contact (or a plurality of contacts), wherethe respective press input is detected based at least in part ondetecting an increase in intensity of the contact (or plurality ofcontacts) above a press-input intensity threshold. In some embodiments,the respective operation is performed in response to detecting theincrease in intensity of the respective contact above the press-inputintensity threshold (e.g., a “down stroke” of the respective pressinput). In some embodiments, the press input includes an increase inintensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensitythreshold and a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact belowthe press-input intensity threshold, and the respective operation isperformed in response to detecting the subsequent decrease in intensityof the respective contact below the press-input threshold (e.g., an “upstroke” of the respective press input).

FIGS. 5E-5H illustrate detection of a gesture that includes a pressinput that corresponds to an increase in intensity of a contact 562 froman intensity below a light press intensity threshold (e.g., “IT_(L)”) inFIG. 5E, to an intensity above a deep press intensity threshold (e.g.,“IT_(D)”) in FIG. 5H. The gesture performed with contact 562 is detectedon touch-sensitive surface 560 while cursor 576 is displayed overapplication icon 572B corresponding to App 2, on a displayed userinterface 570 that includes application icons 572A-572D displayed inpredefined region 574. In some embodiments, the gesture is detected ontouch-sensitive display 504. The intensity sensors detect the intensityof contacts on touch-sensitive surface 560. The device determines thatthe intensity of contact 562 peaked above the deep press intensitythreshold (e.g., “IT_(D)”). Contact 562 is maintained on touch-sensitivesurface 560. In response to the detection of the gesture, and inaccordance with contact 562 having an intensity that goes above the deeppress intensity threshold (e.g., “IT_(D)”) during the gesture,reduced-scale representations 578A-578C (e.g., thumbnails) of recentlyopened documents for App 2 are displayed, as shown in FIGS. 5F-5H. Insome embodiments, the intensity, which is compared to the one or moreintensity thresholds, is the characteristic intensity of a contact. Itshould be noted that the intensity diagram for contact 562 is not partof a displayed user interface, but is included in FIGS. 5E-5H to aid thereader.

In some embodiments, the display of representations 578A-578C includesan animation. For example, representation 578A is initially displayed inproximity of application icon 572B, as shown in FIG. 5F. As theanimation proceeds, representation 578A moves upward and representation578B is displayed in proximity of application icon 572B, as shown inFIG. 5G. Then, representations 578A moves upward, 578B moves upwardtoward representation 578A, and representation 578C is displayed inproximity of application icon 572B, as shown in FIG. 5H. Representations578A-578C form an array above icon 572B. In some embodiments, theanimation progresses in accordance with an intensity of contact 562, asshown in FIGS. 5F-5G, where the representations 578A-578C appear andmove upwards as the intensity of contact 562 increases toward the deeppress intensity threshold (e.g., “IT_(D)”). In some embodiments, theintensity, on which the progress of the animation is based, is thecharacteristic intensity of the contact. The operations described withreference to FIGS. 5E-5H can be performed using an electronic devicesimilar or identical to device 100, 300, or 500.

In some embodiments, the device employs intensity hysteresis to avoidaccidental inputs sometimes termed “jitter,” where the device defines orselects a hysteresis intensity threshold with a predefined relationshipto the press-input intensity threshold (e.g., the hysteresis intensitythreshold is X intensity units lower than the press-input intensitythreshold or the hysteresis intensity threshold is 75%, 90%, or somereasonable proportion of the press-input intensity threshold). Thus, insome embodiments, the press input includes an increase in intensity ofthe respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold and asubsequent decrease in intensity of the contact below the hysteresisintensity threshold that corresponds to the press-input intensitythreshold, and the respective operation is performed in response todetecting the subsequent decrease in intensity of the respective contactbelow the hysteresis intensity threshold (e.g., an “up stroke” of therespective press input). Similarly, in some embodiments, the press inputis detected only when the device detects an increase in intensity of thecontact from an intensity at or below the hysteresis intensity thresholdto an intensity at or above the press-input intensity threshold and,optionally, a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact to anintensity at or below the hysteresis intensity, and the respectiveoperation is performed in response to detecting the press input (e.g.,the increase in intensity of the contact or the decrease in intensity ofthe contact, depending on the circumstances).

For ease of explanation, the descriptions of operations performed inresponse to a press input associated with a press-input intensitythreshold or in response to a gesture including the press input are,optionally, triggered in response to detecting either: an increase inintensity of a contact above the press-input intensity threshold, anincrease in intensity of a contact from an intensity below thehysteresis intensity threshold to an intensity above the press-inputintensity threshold, a decrease in intensity of the contact below thepress-input intensity threshold, and/or a decrease in intensity of thecontact below the hysteresis intensity threshold corresponding to thepress-input intensity threshold. Additionally, in examples where anoperation is described as being performed in response to detecting adecrease in intensity of a contact below the press-input intensitythreshold, the operation is, optionally, performed in response todetecting a decrease in intensity of the contact below a hysteresisintensity threshold corresponding to, and lower than, the press-inputintensity threshold.

As used herein, an “installed application” refers to a softwareapplication that has been downloaded onto an electronic device (e.g.,devices 100, 300, and/or 500) and is ready to be launched (e.g., becomeopened) on the device. In some embodiments, a downloaded applicationbecomes an installed application by way of an installation program thatextracts program portions from a downloaded package and integrates theextracted portions with the operating system of the computer system.

As used herein, the terms “open application” or “executing application”refer to a software application with retained state information (e.g.,as part of device/global internal state 157 and/or application internalstate 192). An open or executing application is, optionally, any one ofthe following types of applications:

-   -   an active application, which is currently displayed on a display        screen of the device that the application is being used on;    -   a background application (or background processes), which is not        currently displayed, but one or more processes for the        application are being processed by one or more processors; and    -   a suspended or hibernated application, which is not running, but        has state information that is stored in memory (volatile and        non-volatile, respectively) and that can be used to resume        execution of the application.

As used herein, the term “closed application” refers to softwareapplications without retained state information (e.g., state informationfor closed applications is not stored in a memory of the device).Accordingly, closing an application includes stopping and/or removingapplication processes for the application and removing state informationfor the application from the memory of the device. Generally, opening asecond application while in a first application does not close the firstapplication. When the second application is displayed and the firstapplication ceases to be displayed, the first application becomes abackground application.

Attention is now directed towards embodiments of user interfaces (“U”)and associated processes that are implemented on an electronic device,such as portable multifunction device 100, device 300, or device 500.

FIGS. 6A-6N illustrate exemplary user interfaces for navigating acollection of media items, in accordance with some embodiments. The userinterfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processesdescribed below, including the processes in FIG. 7.

FIG. 6A illustrates an exemplary home screen 604 displayed on atouch-sensitive display 602 of electronic device 600. In someembodiments, electronic device 600 includes one or more features ofdevices 100, 300, or 500. Home screen 604 includes affordancescorresponding to one more applications, including affordance 604Aassociated with a media library application (e.g., entitled “Photos”).Affordance 604A can be used to launch or otherwise open the medialibrary application. As shown, electronic device 600 receives user input606 at a location of affordance 604A. In response to user input 606,electronic device 600 displays view 608, as shown in FIG. 6B.

FIG. 6B illustrates an exemplary view (e.g., years view 608) of a medialibrary (a collection of media items). For example, electronic device600 displays years view 608 in response to receiving user input 606. Asshown in FIG. 6B, exemplary years view 608 includes a plurality of tiles608A-608C, each representing a calendar year. As shown, tile 608Arepresents the year 2019 and includes a region 608A-1 that includes arepresentative media item 609A (e.g., a picture) from the year 2019.Tile 608B represents the year 2018 and includes a region 608B-1 thatincludes a representative media item 609B from the year 2018. Tile 608Crepresents the year 2017 and includes a region 608C-1 that includes arepresentative media item 609C from the year 2017. In this example, theregions 608A-1, 608B-1, and 608C-1 occupy the entire respective tiles608A, 608B, and 608C. In some embodiments, a region (e.g., 608A-1)occupies less than all of a representation (e.g., tile) of a timeperiod. Years view 608 provides a way to display a summarization of amedia library by year using representations (e.g., tiles) for each year,each representation including a media item selected from that year. InFIG. 6B, tiles 608A, 608B, 608C are displayed in a single-column view inchronological order.

A summarized view of a media library (e.g., years view 608) is useful ifa media item selected to represent a time period is selected (e.g., byelectronic device 600 and/or a cloud-based service) to be relevant tocontent that the user is likely to want to view, which can help guideefficient navigation through the media library to locate desired mediaitems. However, the media library summarized by a view (e.g., 608) caninclude many different media items (e.g., hundreds or thousands), andselecting a media item to represent a time period such as a year (andthat is likely to be relevant to what a user is browsing for) canpresent a challenge.

In this example, each of the representative media items 609A-609Cdisplayed in tiles 608A-608C are relevant to a recurring event (alsoreferred to as a “recurring temporal event” herein) that is associatedwith the current date. In FIG. 6B (and other figures herein), a box thatidentifies the current date (e.g., the date when the respectiveinterface illustrated on the device is displayed) is included aboveelectronic device 600 for the benefit of the reader, but is not includedin the respective interface displayed on the device. In the example inFIG. 6B, the current date (e.g., Feb. 17, 2019) is the birthday of aperson (also referred to as an “individual” herein) associated with theuser (e.g., the user, a significant person to the user (e.g., such as afamily member of the user and/or a friend of the user), and/or anyperson otherwise associated with the user (e.g., user's account, user'sdevice)). For example, the person's birthday is saved in the user'scontacts, or in the user's calendar, or the like. As shown in FIG. 6B,each of tiles 608A-608C includes a picture (609A, 609B, and 609C)selected from the person's birthday (February 17) in each of the years2019 (608A), 2018 (608B), and 2017 (608C). For example, the tilerepresenting the current year 2019 includes a picture 609A of thebirthday celebration from the current day (e.g., Feb. 17, 2019), thetile representing previous year 2018 includes a picture 609B from theprevious year's birthday (Feb. 17, 2018), and the tile representingprevious year 2017 includes a picture 609C from that year's birthday(Feb. 17, 2017). In this example, accessing the years view 608 on thedate of a significant recurring event, the birthday (February 17) of theuser's daughter (e.g., who is holding the cake in media item 609B),causes the electronic device 600 to present a view for browsing mediaitems that has been populated with representative media items that arerelevant to the significant recurring event over time, and thus that theuser is likely to browse. For example, on the daughter's birthday (e.g.,in 2019), the user is likely to want to view pictures of their daughter(e.g., and her birthday) over the years, and by presenting the images asshown in years view 608 of FIG. 6B, the number of user inputs and timeneeded to access such media is reduced. These pictures are selected bythe electronic device, in part, through analysis of the photos todetermine their contents.

In some embodiments, if a media item relevant to the recurring event isnot available (e.g., no pictures have been taken on Feb. 17, 2019), thena recent media item (e.g., another picture taken on Feb. 17, 2019; amost recent picture) is selected as the representative media item forthe corresponding time period (e.g., the year 2019).

In some embodiments, a view (e.g., years view 608) includes one or moreaffordances for accessing one or more other views of the media library.For example, years view 608 includes a ribbon 610 that includesaffordances (e.g., 610A-610D) for accessing different views of the medialibrary (e.g., years view, months view, days view, all photos view). Asshown in FIG. 6B, affordance 610A is selected (as indicated by the boxaround “Years”), providing an indication of the currently active view (ayears view), as well as the time increment organization of the currentview (e.g., the current tiles each represent a year time increment, asindicated by the text “Years”).

In some embodiments, a view (e.g., years view 608) includes one or moreaffordances (e.g., in area 612) for performing and/or accessingfunctions of a media application. For example, years view 608 includesapplication function affordances area 612 for performing or accessingfunctions of the photos applications, such as viewing media itemsaccording to a chronological organization (“Photos”, currentlyselected), viewing a media sharing interface (“For You”), accessingspecific albums (“Albums”), or searching the media library (“Search”).

Years view 608 is an example of a view of a media library according to aparticular increment of time (a year). In some embodiments, theincrement of time represented by each tile in a view are different timeincrement. For example, other increments of time can be used, such asmonths, weeks, days, or the like, instead of years. The functions andcharacteristics described with respect to an exemplary years view can beapplied to views for presenting media items according to any timeincrements, which are intended to be within the scope of thisdisclosure. In some embodiments, the representation (e.g., tile) of eachtime period displayed in a view represents the same time increment size(e.g., each represent a different calendar year, or each represent adifferent calendar month). In some embodiments, the representations(e.g., tile) of time periods displayed in a view represent two or moretime increment sizes (e.g., one tile in the view represents a calendaryear and one in the view represents a calendar month).

In some embodiments, a view is navigable (e.g., scrollable) foraccessing additional tiles (e.g., that are not currently displayed) inthe view. For example, years view 608 is vertically scrollable. In someembodiments, a view is navigable for accessing tiles representing everytime period (e.g., according to the current time increment) that isrepresented in the media library. For example, while in the years view,vertical scrolling can be used to cause display of tiles for every yearrepresented by media items in the media library-thus, if there are mediaitems for every year between 2005 and 2019, a tile for each of theseyears (e.g., 15 total) can be accessed in years view 608 (e.g., viascrolling). Each of these tiles can include a respective representativemedia item selected based on the recurring event (e.g., user'sdaughter's birthday in FIG. 6B). In this way, the device provides aninterface with easy navigation and relevant summarization for navigatinga collection of media items. In this example, at FIG. 6B electronicdevice 600 receives user input 614, which is a vertical swipe gesture ina downward direction representing a request to scroll years view 608based on the downward direction of the vertical swipe gesture.

FIG. 6C illustrates years view 608 after navigation (e.g., in responseto electronic device 600 receiving user input 614). In response to userinput 614, which is a swipe gesture in a downward direction representinga request to navigate downward, electronic device 600 has scrolled yearsview 608 downward to display a tile 608D for the year 2016, while alsodisplaying tile 608C. In some embodiments, if a recurring event is asignificant event associated with a person (e.g., a birthday, ananniversary), a media item depicting the person is selected from acorresponding time period without regard to the particular day withinthe corresponding time period that the media item is from. For example,as shown in FIG. 6C, tile 608D includes a representative media item 609Dthat depicts the person (the user's daughter) whose birthdays (from theyears 2017 to 2019) are shown in tiles 608A-608C. However, media item609D is from Feb. 27, 2016 and not from Feb. 17, 2016 (the daughter'sbirthday). In some embodiments, the media item depicting the person isselected based on being a good depiction of that person. For example,the media item 609D can be selected because it is a high-qualityportrait picture of the user's daughter, and thus can be selectedinstead of images from the daughter's birthday Feb. 17, 2016 because itis a better depiction of the user's daughter than the pictures from Feb.17, 2016 in the media library (e.g., there are no pictures from thebirthday on Feb. 17, 2016). For instance, a picture of an individualthat is a portrait shot (e.g., taken in a portrait mode, or a close upof the individual's face) is optionally selected instead of a picture ofan individual that is not a portrait shot. Likewise, where the devicedetermines that a significant event is an anniversary, representativemedia items can be selected as media items that depict the twoindividuals whose anniversary it is (e.g., regardless of whetheractually taken on the anniversary date). These pictures are selected bythe electronic device, in part, through analysis of the photos todetermine their contents.

In some embodiments, a media items is selected as a representative mediaitem based on one or more of the following: whether the media item hasbeen favorited by user, image quality of the media item (e.g., highquality images have priority), length of the media item (e.g., asequence of images or a video) (e.g., longer media items have priority),image composition of the media item (e.g., whether the media itemdepicts a well-composed scene, such as one in which subjects arecentered and visible and exposure is correct, and the like), action thatoccurs during the media item (e.g., movement within the image frame isprioritized over a video in which the subject remains still), andwhether one or more persons are depicted in the media item (e.g., theuser and/or their family get priority over others persons).

In some embodiments, if a media item from a particular day within acorresponding time period is not available (e.g., not included in themedia library), a media item (e.g., depicting the person associated withthe significant event) is selected from the corresponding time periodfrom a day other than the particular day. For example, a good picture(e.g., 609D from Feb. 27, 2016) of the user's daughter can be selectedas the representative media item if a picture from the daughter'sbirthday of Feb. 17, 2016 is not available in the user's library, evenif the selected picture is not from the birthday date or a birthdaycelebration event.

FIG. 6D illustrates another example of an exemplary years view (e.g.,614). For example, electronic device 600 displays years view 614 inresponse to a user input similar to user input 606, but received on adate (e.g., Feb. 18, 2019) different from the date in the exampledescribed in FIGS. 6B-6C (e.g., Feb. 17, 2019). For example, electronicdevice 600 displays years view 614 instead of years view 608 when thecurrent date is not associated with the user's daughter's birthday(e.g., the current date is Feb. 18, 2019 and the daughter's birthday isFebruary 17).

In an alternative example, electronic device 600 displays years view 614in response to user input 606 (FIG. 6A), instead of years view 608(e.g., where the current date is not associated with a significantrecurring event such as a birthday). In such example, electronic device600 displays years view 614 instead of years view 608 on February 17(e.g., of 2019) if that date is not associated with the user'sdaughter's birthday (and, optionally, no other significant recurringevent) as described with respect to FIGS. 6B-6C (e.g., the user'sdaughter's birthday is instead on November 1st). In such example, themedia displayed in years view 614 in FIG. 6B would be media fromFebruary 17 of each respective year.

Years view 614, similar to years view 608, includes tiles 614A-614C thateach include a regions (614A-1, 614B-1, and 614C-1) that includes arepresentative media item (615A, 615B, and 615C) selected based on arecurring event. The representative media items in tiles 614A-614C arerelevant to a recurring event associated with the current date, Feb. 18,2019. Examples of recurring events include a day of the year, a day ofthe month, a day of the week, or the like. In some embodiments, a goodmedia item is selected as the representative media item for a respectivetime period based on the recurring event. Media items from the day ofthe recurring event can be selected to represent their respective timeperiods (e.g., years). In the example depicted in FIG. 6D, the recurringevent is the day of the year February 18th. As shown in FIG. 6D, tile614B includes a representative media item 615B taken on the day of theyear February 18 in the year 2018, and tile 614C includes arepresentative media item 615C taken on the day of the year February 18in the year 2017. Tiles 614B and 614C each include a picture of a carbecause the media library includes media items captured on the datesFeb. 18, 2017 and Feb. 18, 2018 at an annual car show attended by theuser. Thus, the media items from the dates Feb. 18, 2017 and Feb. 18,2018 are associated with the recurring event (the day of the year)February 18th and selected as the representative media items from thoserespective years based on the recurring event (e.g., based on being fromthe day of the year within the respective time period, 2017 or 2018).Tile 614A for the current year does not include an image of a car, butdoes include a representative media item 615A from the current date Feb.18, 2019 (e.g., the media library does not include any images from a carshow in 2019). These pictures are optionally selected by the electronicdevice, in part, through analysis of the photos to determine theircontents and the location at which the photos were taken (using thephoto meta data).

In some embodiments, a media item is selected as a representative mediaitem based on one or more quality metrics. For example, a media item canbe selected because it is a good representation of a set of media itemsfrom that time period and/or for the recurring event (e.g., the bestmedia item of a set depicting similar subject matter, or having a commontheme (e.g., nature, cars, family gathering)). A media item can beselected because it is a good (also referred to as a good quality, ahigh quality, or a prioritized media item) media item based on one ormore quality metrics (e.g., the media item depicts the user, has goodlighting and/or composition, includes action (e.g., for videos orsequences of images), or the like). Thus, in this example, the mediaitems selected in each of tiles 614A, 614B, and 614C represent a goodmedia item and/or a best representation for their respective days of theyear. In some embodiments, a representative media item for one timeperiod is selected independent of a representative media item foranother time period. For example, media items 615B and 615C, bothdepicting a car, can be selected independently of each other as a goodquality image from each respective day (e.g., not selected based on eachshowing a car or having been taken at the same location). In someembodiments, a representative media item for one time period is selectedat least in part on one or more media items from another time period.For example, one or both of media items 615B and 615C, both depicting acar, can be selected because of the common theme of car pictures thatexists in media items from both of their respective days (e.g., mediaitems selected based on each showing a car and/or having been taken atthe same location (based on photo meta data).)

Including a selection of media items that have been selected based on arecurring event over the course of multiple time periods can includeseveral efficiency benefits. For example, the device provides aninterface for viewing and navigating between media items from multipletime periods (e.g., over multiple years) in an efficient manner (e.g.,using an intelligently selected representative media item). Theefficient interface utilizes a representative media item for a timeperiod that is likely to be relevant to the user's navigation of themedia library. In the example of a birthday or other significant event,the number of inputs and user effort (in addition to device resourceusage) is reduced by providing easy access to present and/or pastrecurring event-related pictures when the event is associated with thecurrent date. In other examples of recurring events, such as a day ofthe year scenario, the device provides easy access to media itemsrelevant to the current date, but in previous time periods.

As noted above, an exemplary years view is navigable (e.g., scrollablevertically, horizontally) to access tiles representing other years. Insome embodiments, a time period view (e.g., years view, months view,days view) can be used to access representative media items forsub-periods within a selected time period.

Turning to FIG. 6E, electronic device 600 receives user input 616representing a press and hold gesture at a location of tile 614B. Inresponse to receiving user input 616, electronic device 600 displaysmetadata 620B (which was not previously displayed), in addition tometadata 620A (displayed before user input 616). Metadata 620Aidentifies the time period represented by the tile 614B. Metadata 620Bidentifies a sub-period represented by the tile 614B. In this example,metadata 620A indicates that tile 614B represents the year 2018, andmetadata 620B indicates that tile 614B also represents the month ofFebruary. Accordingly, metadata 620A and 620B together indicate that therepresentative media item depicted therein is from February of 2018. Inaddition, as will be explained in more detail below, the metadata canprovide an indication of where the device will navigate to in responseto selection of the tile. Any combination of metadata (e.g., asdescribed herein) can be displayed before (e.g., without) input, or inresponse to input.

As shown in FIG. 6E, also in response to receiving user input 616, andwhile user input 616 continues to be detected (e.g., is determined to beon the touch screen display), electronic device 600 causes tile 614B toreduce in size. This can provide visual feedback that the user input 616(a touch) is still detected, and that a sub-period navigation operationcan be performed. In some embodiments, the device (e.g., 600) displayspaging indicators in response to user input (e.g., press and holdgesture). For example, electronic device 600 displays paging dots 618 inresponse to receiving user input 616, and while user input 616 continuesto be detected, which include a dot with a different appearance (e.g.,618A is unshaded) representing a relative position (within a pluralityof sub-periods represented by the paging dots) of the sub-periodrepresentation that is currently displayed within the tile 614B. Thedisplay of paging dots can provide feedback regarding that the touch isstill detected, and/or that a sub-period navigation operation can beperformed.

FIG. 6F illustrates navigating between sub-periods while in a view(e.g., a years view) of a particular time increment (e.g., years). InFIG. 6F, in response to movement associated with user input 616 to theright, electronic device 600 has navigated to the right by onesub-period and replaced the representative media item for February 2018displayed within tile 614B of FIG. 6E with a representative media item615D from March 2018 (as indicated by metadata 620B, which has beenupdated to say “March”). In this example, a first recurring event is theday of the year February 18, which was used to select media items fortiles in the years view of FIG. 6E. However, representative media item615D is selected based on a second recurring event associated with thecurrent date. In this example, the second recurring event is a day ofthe month, and in particular the 18th day of the month. In someembodiments, the first recurring event and the second recurring eventare both associated with the current date. For example, representativemedia item 615D is from the 18th day of March 2018 (the date of Mar. 18,2018). Thus, both the first recurring event and the second recurringevent are associated with the current date because they include thecurrent date-February 18th and the 18th day of the month both includethe current date Feb. 18, 2019. In this example, the media item 615Dfrom Mar. 18, 2018 depicts a candid shot of the user's family taken onthat particular day. Accordingly, similar to how each year tile in FIG.6D illustrates previews of media items according to a one-year timeincrement between representations (e.g., arranged vertically), scrolling(e.g., horizontally) through sub-periods within a tile provides previewsof media items according to a one-month increment (where the sub-periodseach represent a month) between representations. In some embodiments,the first recurring event is associated with a first time increment(e.g., years, months, weeks, or days), and the second recurring event isassociated with a second time increment (e.g., years, months, weeks, ordays) different than the first time increment. In some embodiments, thesecond time increment of the sub-periods is smaller than the first timeincrement. For example, the second time increment in the example in FIG.6F is months, while the first time increment is years, and thus thesecond time increment is a smaller time increment than the firstincrement (months are smaller than years).

As further shown in FIG. 6F, paging dots 618 have been updated to show asecond paging dot 618B as currently selected, indicating that therepresentative media item (and thus, displayed sub-period) has changed.In some embodiments, a paging dot can represent one or more sub-periodtransitions. For example, tile 614B includes five paging dots, but canbe used to view representative media items for twelve calendar months.Thus, each paging dot represents more than one month. In this way,progress can be indicated without cluttering the interface.

FIG. 6F also illustrates electronic device 600 providing tactile output622 (e.g., vibration) that indicates that a transition betweensub-periods occurs. For example, while user input 616 continues to bedetected in FIG. 6F, electronic device 600 outputs tactile output 622contemporaneous in time (e.g., at the same time) as the transition(e.g., replacing display operation) from the February 2018 sub-period'srepresentative media item 615B to the March 2018 sub-period'srepresentative media item 615D. Thus, the tactile output can providepositive tactile feedback that a transition has occurred. Additionally,electronic device 600 can continue navigating (e.g., scrolling) throughsub-periods of the time period 2018 while movement associated with userinput 616 is detected (e.g., to the right in this example), providing atactile output 622 at each transition between sub-periods as describedabove.

Turning to FIG. 6G, in response to continuing to detect movementassociated with user input 616 to the right, electronic device 600navigates (e.g., scrolls) to the right by another sub-period andreplaces the representative media item 615D for March 2018 displayedwithin tile 614B of FIG. 6F with a representative media item 615E fromApril 2018 (as indicated by metadata 620B which has been updated to say“April”). For example, the displacement of user input 616 from itsinitial location (e.g., touch down in FIG. 6E) was maintained, and inresponse to continue to detect such movement, electronic device 600continues to navigate to a sup-period for April 2018. Similar torepresentative media item 615D, media item 615E is selected based on thesecond recurring event associated with the current date, the 18th day ofthe month, and thus is a media item from Apr. 18, 2018. In this example,the picture 615E from Apr. 18, 2018 depicts a horse that corresponds toa trip taken to a farm on that particular day.

In some embodiments, continuing to detect movement associated with auser input (e.g., 616) includes continuing to detect that the user inputhas moved from its initial location (e.g., of touch down). For example,electronic device 600 can transition from March 2018 to April 2018(FIGS. 6F-6G) without detecting further movement (e.g., at FIG. 6F), solong as the displacement of user input 616 to the right in FIG. 6F(e.g., that caused the transition from February 2018) away from thetouch down location of user 616 continues to be detected (e.g., at alocation that is beyond a threshold distance)—thus, a user need onlypress and hold and move to the right once (and maintain) to continuetransitioning between sub-periods. In some embodiments, continuing todetect movement associated with a user input (e.g., 616) includesdetecting further movement of the user input. For example, furthermovement at FIG. 6F of user input 616 to the right can cause electronicdevice 600 to display the transition from March 2018 to April 2018. Insome embodiments, the time between transitions depends on the amount ofmovement detected. For example, if user input 616 has moved to the rightfrom its initial location by a small amount (and has stopped),transitions can occur less frequently (e.g., once per second), but ifthe user input 616 has moved to the right a larger amount, transitionscan occur more frequently (e.g., once every 0.5 seconds). The change intransition speed can be continuous (e.g., linearly related to movementamount) or be done based on one or more discrete levels (e.g., slow,normal, fast; 2 seconds, 1 second, 0.5 second). In some embodiments,movement of a user input in a different direction (e.g., to the left ofthe initial location of user input 616) causes the device to transitionthrough sub-periods (e.g., in a different direction than movement to theright) in a different direction (e.g., in a reverse order). For example,movement of user input 616 to the left of its initial location while thesub-period April 2018 is displayed can cause electronic device 600 totransition in reverse order, than would be done for movement to theright, and display March 2018, then February 2018, then January 2018, oruntil the user input 616 or movement is no longer detected.

As further shown in FIG. 6G, tactile output 622 is provided to indicatea transition between sub-period representations: between representativemedia item 615D and representative media item 615E within tile 614B.Additionally, paging dot 618B continues to be displayed as selected(e.g., it represents more than one page transition).

In the examples depicted in FIGS. 6E to 6G, the representative mediaitem within tile 614B was replaced twice while the movement of userinput 616 continued to be detected (e.g., a press and hold followed by adrag to the right). In FIG. 6G, user input 616 continues to be detectedbut has moved back to its initial location (e.g., shown in FIG. 6E), andthus the movement associated with user input 616 is no longer detected.In response to ceasing to detect the movement of user input 616 whileuser input 616 continues to be detected, electronic device 600 ceases tonavigate through sub-periods. In this example, because user input 616 isstill detected (tap a hold), tile 614B continues to be displayed smallerand additional movement (e.g., left or right) can cause navigationbetween sub-periods. For example, subsequent movement of user input 616can cause the April 2018 representative media item to be replaced:movement to the right to replace it with May 2018, or movement to theleft to replace it with March 2018. In some embodiments, navigationthrough sub-periods is circular (which can also be referred to as“looping”). For example, after navigation causes all twelve months ofthe year to be displayed (e.g., beginning at February 2018, progressingto December 2018 and looping back to January 2018 after December 2018)and while scrolling continues, the device (e.g., 600) will replace thetwelfth month (e.g., February 2018 in this example) with the first month(e.g., February 2018 in this example) and continue transitioning throughsub-periods instead of stopping at the twelfth month. For instance, ifuser input 616 were held with movement to the right indefinitely,December 2018 would be reached, followed by January 2018, followed byFebruary 2018, and then March 2018, and continue navigating and looping,until electronic device 600 ceases to detect user input 616 (or movementassociated with user input 616). In some embodiments, scrolling throughsub-periods is not circular (e.g., in this example, would stop atJanuary 2018, which is the twelfth month based on starting from February2018). In some embodiments, non-circular navigation has fixed beginningand endpoints (e.g., which are the first and last months of a calendaryear) (e.g., in this example, would stop at December 2018 navigating tothe right, and step at January 2018 navigating to the left).

In FIG. 6H, user input 616 has been removed and tile 614B has returnedto normal size in response to electronic device 600 ceasing to detectuser input 616 (e.g., after liftoff of user input 616 and prior todetecting user input 624). Also in response to ceasing to detect userinput 616, electronic device 600 no longer displays metadata 620B andpaging dots 618. In some embodiments, metadata (e.g., 620B) and/orpaging dots (e.g., 618) are displayed even while no user input isdetected. In some embodiments, in response to ceasing to detect a userinput that causes navigation between sub-periods, the device maintainsthe representative media item of the sub-period displayed at the timethat the user input ceased to be detected. For example, therepresentative media item 615E is displayed in tile 614B at the momentwhen user input 616 ceases to be detected (e.g., is lifted off thetouch-sensitive display), and continues being displayed after user input616 ceases to be detected, as shown in FIG. 6H. Thus, despite being fromApril 2018 (e.g., and not from the day of the year of the years view614, February 18th), media item 615E is maintained within therepresentative media item region in tile 614B so that subsequentselection can be performed by the user of that sub-period, in order tocontrol the focus of the a next view (e.g., months view) displayed inresponse to such subsequent selection. In other words, after navigatingto April 2018 in years view 614, selection of tile 614B while media item614E is maintained allows navigation to a months view that is focused onthe month April 2018.

In some embodiments, selection of a tile representing a time period cancause an electronic device (e.g., 600) to display a different view ofthe media library according to a different time increment. In someembodiments, a plurality of views of a media library are arranged in ahierarchy of views. For example, selection of an affordance (e.g., atile) in one view (e.g., a years view) causes an electronic device(e.g., 600) to display a next view in the hierarchy of views (e.g., amonths view). In some embodiments, each view in the hierarchy of viewsis arranged and/or organized according to different time increments(e.g., years, months, weeks, days, or the like). In this way, a devicecan provide efficient and intuitive navigation between views havingdifferent time increment organizations. At FIG. 6I, electronic device600 receives user input 624 (e.g., a tap input) at a location associatedwith tile 614B, representing selection of the tile.

FIGS. 6I-6J illustrate an exemplary transition between views of themedia library according to different time increments. FIG. 6Iillustrates an animated transition between a years view 618 and anexemplary months view 626 (of FIG. 6J), displayed by electronic device600 in response to user input 624 selection of year tile 614B. As shownin FIG. 6I, month tiles 626A, 626B, and 626C are at least partiallydisplayed. The selected year tile 614B has been replaced by (e.g.,overlaid by, turned into, transformed into) month tile 626B, whichincludes the same representative media item 615E as the selected yeartile 614B in FIG. 6H. This provides visual continuity when switchingbetween views—the sub-period represented by the selected year tile is afocal point (e.g., center) of the animated transition and/or theresulting new view (e.g., months view) and includes the samerepresentative media item. In this example, tile 626B is centeredvertically during the transition to the new view (months view). Further,tiles 626A and 626C appear to flow out from under tile 626B, visuallyemphasizing 626B is the tile that includes the representative media itemthat has been selected. During the animated transition, year tiles 614Cand 614A are still displayed, but will cease to be displayed (e.g., bybeing animatedly pushed off the display, covered by the month tiles(e.g., 626C and 626A), or faded out) as a result of the animation. Insome embodiments, the media item displayed in the first view (e.g.,years view) remains in place and/or at a same size during a transitionto a second view (e.g., months view). For example, the horse depicted inmedia item 615E in years view 614 in FIG. 6H can appear to not moveposition or change in size during the transition to being displayed in amonth tile 626B in months view 626, even if the tile frame changes sizearound it (e.g., 626B is smaller than 614B). Remaining static whileother aspects of the interface change can further provide visualemphasis of the selected media item and visual continuity to a user.

FIG. 6J illustrates an exemplary months view 626. Electronic device 600displays months view 626 as shown in FIG. 6J in response to receivinguser input 624. Months view 626, similar to years view 614, includestiles 626A-626C that include representative media items (628A, 615E, and615D) selected based on a recurring event. However, months view 626 isorganized according to a different time increment than years view614—specifically, months rather than years. Thus, a day of the yearrecurring event (a first recurring event) is not used to select mediaitems for a months view, but rather a related recurring event (a secondrecurring event) of a day of the month is used, where both the day ofthe year and the day of the month recurring events are associated withthe current date. For example, the day of the year and the day of themonth both include the current date. In the example in FIG. 6J, therepresentative media items in tiles 626A-626C are relevant to a secondrecurring event associated with the current date, Feb. 18, 2019. Similarto as discussed above with respect to scrolling between sub-periods, thetiles 626A-626C are relevant to a recurring event that is a particularday of the month—in this example, the 18th day of the month. Thus,representative media item 628A is from May 18, 2018, representativemedia item 615E is from Apr. 18, 2018, and representative media item615D is from Mar. 18, 2018. Also in FIG. 6J, affordance 610B is shown asselected to indicate that the current view is a months view (e.g., andaffordance 610A is no longer selected).

As discussed above, in order to maintain continuity when transitioningbetween views in a hierarchy or navigating sub-periods in a view, arepresentative media item for a time period (e.g., a year) can also be arepresentative media item for a particular sub-period (e.g., a month) ofthat time period. In such case, the representative media item can beconsidered to have been selected based on either or both a firstrecurring event (e.g., day of the year) and a second recurring event(e.g., day of the month). For example, in FIG. 6E, media item 615B isselected based on satisfying the day of the year recurring event ofFebruary 18th, but can also be considered to be selected based onsatisfying the day of the month recurring event of the 18th day of themonth.

In an alternative example to the one shown in FIG. 6J, such as when arecurring event is associated with one or more particular individuals(persons) (e.g., for a birthday, an anniversary, a holiday), arepresentative media item is selected from a time period represented bythe corresponding tile without necessarily being from a particular dayin that time period. For example, if a recurring event is a birthdayassociated with an individual (as illustrated in FIG. 6B) and a userinput selection (similar to 624) is received at a location of tile 608B(FIG. 6B) while representative media item 609B is displayed, a viewchanges from a years view to a months view. Because displaying mediaitems depicting the individual is important, representative media itemsfor the resulting displayed month tiles can be media items selectedbased on whether they depict the individual whose birthday it is (andthus based on the same recurring event used in the years view) but fromany day within the representative month, and not necessarily from thesame day of the month as the birthday. Thus, representative media itemsfor tiles in views at different levels of a hierarchical set of viewscan be selected based on the same recurring event (e.g., selected forbeing a good depicting of the individual whose birthday it is).

In some embodiments, a months view (or any other increment) includes oneor more of the features described above with respect to a years views.For example, months view 626 is navigable (e.g., scrollable vertically,horizontally) to access additional tiles representing other timesperiods (months) of the view. In some embodiments, tiles representingmonths (or any other increment) include one or more of the featuresdescribed above with respect to years tiles. For example, a user input(e.g., press and hold associated with movement in a direction) can beused to navigate (within a month tile) representative media items ofsub-periods of the month (e.g., weeks, days).

At FIG. 6J, electronic device 600 receives user input 630 representing atap gesture at a location of tile 626B representing selection of tile626B.

FIGS. 6K-6M illustrate an exemplary days view 640 of a media library. Asshown in FIG. 6K, days view 640 includes representations (e.g.,thumbnails, cropped and/or reduced-size previews) of media items fromthe media library from one or more time periods. In some embodiments, adays view (e.g., 640) includes a plurality of representations of mediaitems from a particular time period of the one or more time periods. Insome embodiments, the plurality of representations are grouped in thedays view according to their particular time period of the one or moretime periods. In some embodiments, a particular time period is acombination of two smaller time periods. For example, days view 640 inFIG. 6K includes representation 640C (including media item 615E),representation 640D (including media item 642A), and representation 640E(including media item 642B), among others, from the time period of Apr.18-19, 2018 as indicated by metadata 646A. In some embodiments, theparticular time period is a sub-period of another time period (or ofanother sub-period, an example of a time period) represented (e.g., by atile) in a different view. For example, in FIG. 6K, the media itemrepresentations displayed are from the sub-period of Apr. 18-19, 2018,which is a sub-period of the time period of April 2018 represented bytile 626B (FIG. 6J), which is a sub-period of the time period of 2018represented by tile 614B (FIG. 6H). In some embodiments, a days view isa level in a hierarchy of multiple views. For example, a hierarchy ofviews can include a years view, a months view, and a days view.Selection of a tile in a years view causes the device to display amonths view, and selection of a tile in a months view causes the deviceto display a days view.

A days view provides an exemplary technique for providing a low-level,high-detail interface for viewing multiple individual media items in themedia library from the same time period. That is, one or more of theyears view or months view can be used to locate a representative mediaitem and/or time period of interest, and focus in by navigating downthrough the hierarchy to the days view to a smaller time period.Alternatively, the days view can be accessed directly by selectingaffordance 610C (which is shown as selected in FIG. 6K, indicating thatthe current view is the days view).

In some embodiments, the one or more time periods represented in thedays view includes one or more days. For example, as shown in FIG. 6K,media items for Apr. 18, 2018 and Apr. 19, 2018 are grouped andpresented together as Apr. 18-19, 2018, as indicated by metadata 646A.

In some embodiments, a days view (e.g., 640) includes a curated set ofmedia items (e.g., less than all media items available from theparticular time period). For example, days view 640 includesrepresentations of fewer than all of the media items in the medialibrary from the dates Apr. 18-19, 2018. For example, high-qualitymedia-items can be selected to be part of the curated set (e.g., mediaitems that meet one or more qualifications based on: lighting, subjectmatter, composition, sharpness/focus of subjects, inclusion of movementof the subject or action, or the like). In some embodiments, a days view(e.g., 640) includes an affordance (e.g., 640B) that, in response toselection, causes all media items (e.g., from a particular time period,or from the media library) to be displayed (e.g., in the days view). Forexample, days view 640 includes a show all affordance 640B that causeselectronic device 600, in response to user input representing selectionof 640B, to display the full set of media items from Apr. 18-19, 2018(in other words, the superset that includes the curated set and otheradditional media items). In some embodiments, selecting a show allaffordance (e.g., 640B) in a days view causes just the full set of mediaitems from one particular time period corresponding to the show allaffordance to be displayed, and other time periods still include arespective curated set of media items. For example, if days view 640 inFIG. 6K is scrolled (e.g., vertically as shown in FIGS. 6L-6M) to revealrepresentative media items from time period(s) not included in Apr.18-19, 2018, then those time period(s) would be presented as curatedsets of media items (whose full sets can be accessed by one or morerespective select all affordances).

In some embodiments, a days view (e.g., 640) includes a media selectionaffordance (e.g., 640A) that, in response to selection, causes thedevice (e.g., 600) to enter a selection mode for selecting media items.For example, days view 640 includes a media selection affordance 640Athat causes electronic device 600, in response to detecting user inputrepresenting selection of 640A, to enter a selection mode allowingselection of one or more of the media items in days view 640 (e.g., forsending via an electronic message, adding to an album, marking fordeletion, or other operation).

In some embodiments, a days view (e.g., 640) includes an indication of aboundary between time periods. For example, days view 640 in FIG. 6Kincludes an indication 644 that is displayed as media items having adimmed or darkened appearance, and indicates the boundary between thebeginning of representations of media items from the time period Apr.18-19, 2018 and the end of representations of media items from apreceding time period (e.g., Apr. 14, 2018) that are arranged verticallyabove and accessible via navigation of (e.g., scrolling of) the daysview. In this way, an excessive white space or other area is not neededto visually emphasize a boundary between media items that are fromdifferent time periods, saving space on a display. Further, dimming ordarkening media items that are from a time period that is not thecurrent focus of the days view visually emphasizes the media items fromthe time period that is the current focus of the days view, whichpotentially makes the interface more intuitive to a user and potentiallyreduces power consumption of a display (e.g., versus displayinghigh-brightness white space). In some embodiments, an indication of aboundary (e.g., 644) is overlaid on one or more representations of mediaitems (e.g., from a time period that is not the current focus of thedays view), and moves to remain overlaid as the representations moveduring navigation (e.g., are scrolled up or down). For example, when theindicator is overlaid, its position tracks movement of the position ofany underlying representations of media items.

In some embodiments, a days view includes display of metadata (e.g.,646A, 646B) related to media items (e.g., from the time period that isthe current focus of the days view). In some embodiments, a days viewincludes a banner area (e.g., 645 in FIG. 6L) that includes metadatarelated to media items (e.g., from the time period that is the currentfocus of the days view) and/or that provides separation between mediaitems from different time periods. In some embodiments, a days viewincludes a separation area (e.g., 647 in FIG. 6L) that providesseparation between media items of different days view time periods. Forexample, in FIG. 6L, a small separation area 647 is displayed betweenmedia items from two different time periods (April 18-19 and May 1-2).In some embodiments, the banner area (e.g., 645) or the separation area(e.g., 647) is partially overlaid on representations of media items fromone or more time periods that are the current focus of the days view.For example, banner area 645 can be a persistent banner that includesmetadata for the currently focused on time period, and navigating thedays view can cause media items to scroll under the banner (e.g., untilthe banner is replaced with a persistent banner from a another timeperiod, or until the metadata of the banner is updated to reflect thenew current focused on time period). In some embodiments, metadatacommon to multiple displayed time periods (e.g., a year) is onlydisplayed once (e.g., at the top of the display). For example, in 646Ain FIG. 6L includes the year 2018, but 646B does not.

In some embodiments, an indication of a boundary (e.g., 644) is overlaidon at least a portion (e.g., all visible portions) of representations ofmedia item(s) from a time period that is not the current focus of thecurrent view (e.g., a days view). For example, in FIG. 6L, all visibleportions of the representation of a media item from the period May 1-2,2018 are displayed overlaid with indication 644 and thus have adimmed/darkened appearance, and representations of media items from Apr.18-19, 2018 are not displayed overlaid with 644.

In some embodiments, a days view (e.g., 640) includes displayed ofmetadata that includes information about one or more media items orgroup of media items (e.g., from a time period). For example, days view640 in FIG. 6K includes metadata 646A identifying the time period thatthe media items displayed (e.g., below the metadata and currently thefocus of the days view) are from—April 18-19 of 2018.

In some embodiments, representations of media items in a days view(e.g., 640) can be arranged having non-uniform sizes. For example, inFIG. 6K, representation 640C is displayed the largest (e.g., is a keymedia item at the top of the currently focused section of the days viewthat includes the media items from the period Apr. 18-19, 2018),representation 640D is displayed smaller than 640C but larger than otherrepresentations, and representation 640E is displayed smaller than bothof the other two. In some embodiments, the size of a representation of amedia item in a view (e.g., days view) depends on one or more factorssuch as dimensions of the media item, whether the media item has animportant status (e.g., has been favorited by a user), whether itdepicts action (e.g., for a media item that can be played back overtime), whether it depicts particular individuals, the quality of themedia item (e.g., composition, lighting, focus), whether it is a goodrepresentation of other media items in the time period or of an event(e.g., a picture of an entire family for a time period that includes afamily vacation), and whether it is selected for automatic playback.

In some embodiments, a days view (e.g., 640) is navigable (e.g.,scrollable). In some embodiments, the days view is navigable (e.g.,scrollable) to display additional (e.g., not yet displayed) portions orrepresentations of media items from the time period currently in focus.For example, in FIG. 6K, electronic device 600 receives user input 648which is a swipe gesture in an upward direction representing a requestto scroll upward. In response to receiving user input 648, electronicdevice 600 displays more of representation 640E of media item 642B, asshown in FIG. 6L.

In some embodiments, the days view is navigable (e.g., scrollable) todisplay additional (e.g., not yet displayed) representations of mediaitems from one or more time periods (e.g., of the same time period ifall representations do not fit on the display concurrently; of one ormore different time periods). For example, in FIG. 6K, electronic device600 receives user input 648 which is a swipe gesture in an upwarddirection representing a request to navigate the days view upward. Inresponse to receiving user input 648, electronic device 600 scrolls daysview 640 upward to display a portion of representation 640F, as shown inFIG. 6L. In this example, representation 640F is from the time periodMay 1-2, 2018 as indicated by metadata 646B (which also includes alocation associated with the group of media items included in this timeperiod, which is “San Jose, Calif.” (which can also be written San Jose,Calif.)). As shown in FIG. 6L, the time period May 1-2, 2018 is notcurrently in focus in the days view 640, so representation 640F (ofmedia item 642C) is displayed as overlaid with an indication of aboundary 644 (dimmed appearance).

In response to detecting user input 648 (in FIG. 6L) moving further inan upward direction while continuing to be detected on the touch screendisplay, electronic device 600 scrolls days view 640 upward to the stateshown in FIG. 6M. In FIG. 6M, electronic device 600 displays additionalrepresentations of media items from the time period May 1-2, 2018 due tothe scrolling navigation-representation 640G (of media item 642D) isdisplayed. Notably, also in response to user input 648 moving further inthe upward direction, electronic device 600 displays, as shown in FIG.6M, the representations of media items from the time period April 18-19,2018 overlaid with an indication of a boundary 644 (dimmed appearance)because that time period is no longer currently in focus in the daysview 640. Additionally, as shown in FIG. 6M, in response to detectinguser input 648 moving further in the upward direction, electronic device600 ceases to display the representations of media items from the timeperiod May 1-2, 2018 as overlaid by an indication of a boundary 644(dimmed appearance) because the May 1-2, 2018 time period is nowcurrently in focus in the days view 640 due to the scrolling. In someembodiments, a time period is considered in focus if it occupies aparticular location on the display (e.g., the center of the display, orthe center of the days view). In some embodiments, a time period isconsidered in focus if an edge (e.g., top) of a representation (e.g., afirst representation for the time period, such as 640F) is past (e.g.,above, below) a particular location on the display (e.g., above ahalfway point on the display).

As described above, a device can be used to navigate between variousviews of a hierarchy to view a media library at different layers ofgranularity and summarization (e.g., summarized by year, by month, bydays, etc.). Further, it can be important to access media items in aone-up view for viewing detail of a selected media item. FIG. 6Nillustrates an exemplary one-up view of a selected media item.

At FIG. 6M, electronic device 600 receives user input 650 which is a tapgesture representing selection of the representation 640G of media item642D. At FIG. 6N, in response to receiving user input 650, electronicdevice 600 displays exemplary one-up view 652. One-up view 652 includesone-up area 652A that includes a large-scale view of a media item—inthis example, of media item 642D selected in FIG. 6M. One-up view 652also includes a scrubbing area 652B that can be used (e.g., via userinput) to perform scrubbing through one or more adjacent media items(e.g., adjacent in the curated set of media items in the media library,or adjacent in the full set of media items in the media library) tocause display of another media item (e.g., the media item at whichscrubbing ceases) in the one-up area 652A (e.g., by replacing display ofmedia item 642D). One-up view 652 also includes area 652C that includesa representation of the media item being viewed in the one-up area652A—in this example, media item 642D. For example, a swipe gesturewithin scrubbing area 652B to move another representation into area 652Cwould cause the corresponding media item to be displayed in area 652A.

FIG. 7 is a flow diagram illustrating a method for navigating acollection of media items using an electronic device in accordance withsome embodiments. Method 700 is performed at a device (e.g., 100, 300,500) with a display device and one or more input devices. Someoperations in method 700 are, optionally, combined, the orders of someoperations are, optionally, changed, and some operations are,optionally, omitted.

As described below, method 700 provides an intuitive way for navigatinga collection of media items. The method reduces the cognitive burden ona user for navigating a collection of media items, thereby creating amore efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated computingdevices, enabling a user to navigate a collection of media items fasterand more efficiently conserves power and increases the time betweenbattery charges.

The electronic device (e.g., 600) receives (702), via the one or moreinput devices (e.g., 602), a first input (e.g., 606; selection of 610A;selection of 610B). In response to receiving the first input, theelectronic device (e.g., 600) displays (704), via the display device(e.g., 602), a first view (e.g., 608, 614, 626) (e.g., years view,months view; a summarized view with less than all photos of a medialibrary) of a collection of media items (e.g., media items in a medialibrary) that includes multiple different media items that areassociated with corresponding dates and times (e.g., plurality of years,plurality of months), including concurrently displaying a representation(e.g., 608B, 614B, 626B) (e.g., a tile that includes a representativemedia item) of a first time period (e.g., previous year 2018) and arepresentation (e.g., 608C, 614C, 626C) (e.g., tile that includes arepresentative media item) of a second time period (e.g., previous year2017) that is different from the first time period.

In accordance with a determination (706) that a current time (e.g., Feb.18, 2019) is associated with a first recurring temporal event (e.g., dayof the week, day of the month, holiday, birthday, anniversary, or thelike): the representation (e.g., 608B in FIG. 6B, 614B in FIG. 6D, 626Bin FIG. 6J) of the first time period (e.g., 2018 for years views 608 or614 in FIGS. 6B and 6D, April for months view 626 in FIG. 6J) includes afirst region (e.g., 608B-1, 614B-1, 626B-1) that is occupied by a firstrepresentative media item (e.g., 609B, 615B, 615E) from the first timeperiod (e.g., taken during the time period) that is selected based onthe first recurring temporal event (e.g., individual's birthday, day ofthe year February 18 for FIG. 6D, the 18th day of the month for FIG.6J), and the representation (e.g., 608C, 614C, 626C) of the second timeperiod (e.g., 2017 for years views 608 or 614 in FIGS. 6B and 6D, Marchfor months view 626 in FIG. 6J) includes a second region (e.g., 608C-1,614C-1, 626C-1) that is occupied by a second representative media item(e.g., 609C, 615C, 615D) from the second time period (e.g., taken duringthe time period) that is selected based on the first recurring temporalevent.

In accordance with a determination (708) that the current time (e.g.,Feb. 17, 2019) is associated with a second recurring temporal event(e.g., individual's birthday in FIG. 6B), wherein the second recurringtemporal event is different from the first recurring temporal event(e.g., day of the year February 18): the first region (e.g., 608B-1 inFIG. 6B) of the representation (e.g., 608B) of the first time period(e.g., 2018) is occupied by a third representative media item (e.g.,609B) from the first time period that is selected based on the secondrecurring temporal event (e.g., individual's birthday) and is differentfrom the first representative media item (e.g., 615B in FIG. 6D) fromthe first time period, and the second region (e.g., 608C-1) of therepresentation (e.g., 608C) of the second time period (e.g., 2017) isoccupied by a fourth representative media item (e.g., 609C) from thesecond time period that is selected based on the second recurringtemporal event and is different from the second representative mediaitem (e.g., 615C) from the second time period.

Selecting and displaying representative media items based on aparticular recurring temporal event associated with a current timeautomatically provides dynamically and contextually relevant media itemswhen displaying a collection of media items, reducing the time a userspends navigating interfaces to find such relevant media items.Performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met withoutrequiring further user input enhances the operability of the electronicdevice and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., byhelping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakeswhen operating/interacting with the electronic device) which,additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of thedevice by enabling the user to use the electronic device more quicklyand efficiently.

In some embodiments, a current time includes one or more of a currenttime of day (e.g., hour, minute) and a current date (e.g., Feb. 18,2019). For example, the current time can be: a time of day, a dateassociated with the current time of day, a day of the week associatedwith the current time and/or date, day of the month associated with thecurrent time or date, and/or a range of time/dates that include thecurrent time. In some embodiments, the current time is associated with arecurring temporal event when both fall on the same day of the week,both fall on the same day of the month, or both fall on the date of asignificant event (e.g., birthday, anniversary, holiday, or the like).

In some embodiments, selecting a representative media item based on arecurring temporal event includes one or more of selecting therepresentative media item: from a day of the week associated with thecurrent time, from a day of the month associated with the current time,from a day of the year associated with the current time, and from arange of time/dates that include the current time (e.g., recent datesand/or times). In some embodiments, selecting a representative mediaitem based on a recurring temporal event includes selecting therepresentative media item that is representative of a significant event(e.g., birthday, anniversary, holiday). In some embodiments, selecting arepresentative media item for a time period that includes the currenttime includes selecting a recent media item (e.g., the most recent mediaitem).

In some embodiments, when the current time (e.g., Feb. 17, 2019) isassociated with the second recurring temporal event (e.g., individual'sbirthday in FIG. 6B), the representation (e.g., 609B in FIG. 6B) of thefirst time period (e.g., 2018) excludes the first representative mediaitem (e.g., 615B in FIG. 6D). In some embodiments, the first time periodincludes the current time (e.g., Feb. 17, 2019). For example, the firsttime period can be 2019 when the current time is Feb. 17, 2019.

In some embodiments, when the current time (e.g., Feb. 17, 2019) isassociated with the second recurring temporal event (e.g., individual'sbirthday in FIG. 6B), the representation (e.g., 608C of FIG. 6B) of thesecond time period (e.g., 2017) excludes the second representative mediaitem (615C of FIG. 6D).

In some embodiments, a view (e.g., years view, months view) (e.g., 608,614, 626, 640) of a collection of media items is a graphicalpresentation of the collection of media items. For example, differentviews (e.g., 608, 614, 626, 640) of the same plurality of media itemscan present the media items (a portion or all of the collection) indifferent ways, such as having one or more different: visualarrangements of media items, organization of media items (e.g., by year,month, day, event, persons depicted, location, or the like), ordering ofmedia items, curation of presented media items (e.g., only presenting asubset of media items), and the like.

In some embodiments, a media item (e.g., 609A-609C, 615A-615C, 628A) isselected as a representative media item based on having one or moreattributes. In some embodiments, one or more attributes of a media iteminclude one or more of the following: whether a media item has beenfavorited by user, media item image quality (e.g., high quality imageshave priority), length of a sequence of images or a video (e.g., longermedia items have priority), image composition of a media item (e.g., amedia item depicts a well-composed scene, such as one in which subjectsare centered and visible and exposure is correct, and the like), actionthat occurs during the media item (e.g., movement within the image frameis prioritized over a video in which the subject remains still), andindividuals depicted (e.g., the user and/or their family get priorityover other persons). In some embodiments, the one or more attributesused to select the representative media item depend on the recurringtemporal event that selection is based on. For example, a recurringtemporal event that is an individual's birthday (e.g., as shown in FIG.6B) will cause selection of a representative media item associated withan attribute that indicates the corresponding media item depicts thatindividual.

In some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g., 600) displays metadata(e.g., identifying a year, month, day, or event) (e.g., 620A and/or620B) visually associated with (e.g., overlaid on) a representation(e.g., 614B) of a time period (e.g., 2018) (e.g., overlaid on thecorresponding representative media item). For example, the text “2018”can be overlaid on a representation 614B of a time period for the year2018, as shown in FIGS. 6D-6E.

In some embodiments, a view (e.g., first view) (e.g., 608, 614, 626)includes any number of representations (e.g., 608A-608D, 614A-614C,626A-626C) of time periods. In some embodiments, the view (e.g., firstview) (e.g., 608, 614, 626) includes a number of representations of timeperiods equal to the number of time periods represented by the medialibrary. For example, if a first view is a years view and the medialibrary includes media items from each year of 10 full years, then thefirst view can include 10 representations of time periods (years in thisexample). In some embodiments, if some time periods (e.g., years) do notinclude media items in the media library (e.g., are ‘empty’), thenrepresentations for such time periods can be excluded from the firstview (e.g., no tile displayed for a year that has no media items).

In some embodiments, the first view (e.g., 608, 614, 626) is navigable(e.g., scrollable) to display representations of time periods. Forexample, as shown in FIGS. 6B-6C, the exemplary first view 608 can bescrolled (e.g., vertically) to display representations of time periods,all of which are not necessarily displayed concurrently (e.g., displaydevice displaying the view can display 3 at a time).

In some embodiments, representations of time periods in a view (e.g.,first view) (e.g., 608, 614, 626) are arranged chronologically. Forexample, the first view can be arranged chronologically from oldest ontop to newest on bottom-thus, representations of older time periods aredisplayed above representations for newer time periods (e.g., as shownin views 608, 614, and 626). Further, in such example, navigating up inthe first view (e.g., scrolling up) causes representations of even oldertime periods to be displayed (if available), navigating down in thefirst view (e.g., scrolling down) causes representations of even newertime periods to be displayed (if available).

In some embodiments, the representation (e.g., 614B of FIG. 6D) of thefirst time period (e.g., 2018) includes a single representative mediaitem (e.g., 615B) selected from the collection of media items for thefirst time period (e.g., 614B does not include two representative mediaitems), and the representation (e.g., 614C of FIG. 6D) of the secondtime period (e.g., 2017) includes a single representative media item(e.g., 615C) selected from the collection of media items for the secondtime period (e.g., 614C does not include two representative mediaitems).

In some embodiments, each single representative media item (e.g., 615A,615B, 615C in FIG. 6D) for a corresponding representation (e.g., 614A,614B, 614C) of a time period (e.g., 2019, 2018, 2017) occupies at leasta predetermined threshold amount of its corresponding representation ofa time period (e.g., at least 25%, 33%, 50%, 66%, 75%). For example, inthe example shown in FIG. 6D, each media item occupies 100% of arepresentation of a media item (e.g., of a tile, such as 614B) (e.g.,regions 614B-1 and 614C-1 occupy their entire respective tiles). Inother examples, the representative media item (e.g., 615B) in arepresentation (e.g., 614B) of a time period can occupy less than 100%,but still at least some threshold amount such as 75%. The remaining areacan include other information or content associated with thecorresponding time period (e.g., one or more other media items, textualinformation, metadata, or the like).

In some embodiments, a respective media item (e.g., first, second,third, fourth representative media items) (e.g., 615B, 615C) from arespective time period (e.g., first, second time periods) (e.g., 2018,2017) that is selected based on a corresponding recurring temporal event(e.g., first, second recurring temporal events) (e.g., day of the year,day of the month) is selected based on one or more of: in accordancewith the corresponding recurring temporal event including a day of theyear (e.g., February 18) of the current time (e.g., Feb. 18, 2019), therespective media item (e.g., 615B, 615C) being from (e.g., captured on,saved on) the day of the year (e.g., February 18) of the current time(e.g., Feb. 18, 2019); in accordance with the corresponding recurringtemporal event including a day of the month (e.g., the 18th day of themonth) of the current time (e.g., Feb. 18, 2019), the respective mediaitem (e.g., 615B, 615C) being from the day of the month (e.g., the 18thday of a month) of the current time (e.g., Feb. 18, 2019); and inaccordance with the corresponding recurring temporal event including aday of the week (e.g., Monday; the first day of the week) of the currenttime (e.g., Monday, Feb. 18, 2019), the respective media item being fromthe day of the week (e.g., Monday; the first day of the week) of thecurrent time (e.g., Monday, Feb. 18, 2019).

In some embodiments, the current time (e.g., Feb. 18, 2019) isassociated with the first recurring temporal event (e.g., day of theyear February 18). In accordance with the first time period (e.g., 2018)and the second time period (e.g., 2017) representing different calendaryears: the first recurring temporal event is a day of the year (e.g.,month and day that occurs in multiple years; February 18), and the firstrepresentative media item (e.g., 615B in FIG. 6D) from the first timeperiod (e.g., 2018) that is selected based on the first recurringtemporal event is selected based on the first representative media itembeing from a plurality of media items from (e.g., captured on, saved on)the day of the year (e.g., February 18) from a first calendar year(e.g., 2018) represented by the first time period (e.g., 2018), and thesecond representative media item (e.g., 615C in FIG. 6D) from the secondtime period that is selected based on the first recurring temporal eventis selected based on the second representative media item being from aplurality of media items from (e.g., captured on, saved on) the day ofthe year from a second calendar year (e.g., 2017) represented by thesecond time period (e.g., 2017), wherein the first calendar year and thesecond calendar year are different. For example, where eachrepresentation of different time periods each represents a differentyear (e.g., as shown in 6D), a representative media item in at least one(e.g., all) representation is selected from the same day of the year asthe current time. For example, if the first time period represents theyear 2018, and the day of the year of the first recurring temporal eventis February 18, then the first representative media item is selectedfrom media items from Feb. 18, 2018. For example, if the second timeperiod represents the year 2017, and the day of the year of the firstrecurring temporal event is February 18, then the second representativemedia item is selected from media items from Feb. 18, 2017.

In some embodiments, the current time (e.g., Feb. 18, 2019) isassociated with the first recurring temporal event (e.g., the 18th dayof the month), and in accordance with the first time period (e.g., April2018) and the second time period (e.g., March 2018) representingdifferent calendar months: the first recurring temporal event is a dayof the month (e.g., day that occurs each month, such as the 1st, 5th,8th, or 21st day of the month) (e.g., the 18th day of the month), andthe first representative media item (e.g., 615E in tile 626B of FIG. 6J)from the first time period (e.g., April 2018) that is selected based onthe first recurring temporal event is selected based on the firstrepresentative media item being from a plurality of media items from(e.g., captured on, saved on) the day of the month (e.g., 18th day ofthe month) from a first calendar month (e.g., April 2018) represented bythe first time period (e.g., April 2018), and the second representativemedia item (e.g., 615D) from the second time period that is selectedbased on the first recurring temporal event is selected based on thesecond representative media item being from a plurality of media itemsfrom (e.g., captured on, saved on) the day of the month (e.g., 18th dayof the month) from a second calendar month (e.g., March 2018)represented by the second time period (e.g., March 2018), wherein thefirst calendar month and the second calendar month are different. Forexample, where each representation of different time periods eachrepresents a different month (e.g., as shown in FIG. 6J), arepresentative media item in at least one (e.g., all) representation isselected from the same day of the month as the current time. Forexample, if the first time period represents the month of April 2018,and the day of the month of the first recurring temporal event is the18th day of the month, then the first representative media item isselected from media items from Apr. 18, 2018. For example, if the secondtime period represents the month of March 2018, and the day of the monthof the first recurring temporal event is the 18th day of the month, thenthe second representative media item is selected from media items fromMar. 18, 2018. In some embodiments, the first calendar month (e.g.,April) and the second calendar month (e.g., March) are from the samecalendar year (e.g., 2018). In some embodiments, the first calendarmonth and the second calendar month are from different calendar years(e.g., December 2017 and January 2018).

In some embodiments, the current time (e.g., Feb. 18, 2019) isassociated with the first recurring temporal event, and the firstrecurring temporal event is a significant event (e.g., a significantpersonal event) that occurs at the current time, and the firstrepresentative media item (e.g., 609B in FIG. 6B) from the first timeperiod (e.g., 2018) that is selected based on the first recurringtemporal event (e.g., user's daughter's birthday on February 17th) isselected based on one or more characteristics of the significant event,and the second representative media item (e.g., 609C in FIG. 6B) fromthe second time period (e.g., 2017) that is selected based on the firstrecurring temporal event is selected based on one or morecharacteristics of the significant event.

In some embodiments, a significant event is a holiday. In someembodiments, a significant event is a birthday (e.g., of the user, oranother individual (person) associated with the user such as a member ofthe user's family), an anniversary (e.g., a wedding anniversary betweenthe user and their spouse), or the like. In some embodiments, asignificant event is determined based on a calendar entry (e.g., definedby the user) associated with the device or associated with a useraccount that is associated with the device. In some embodiments, asignificant event is determined based on information stored regardingone or more individuals (e.g., a birthday saved in contact information).For example, a media item is selected as a representative media item fora corresponding time period if the media item represents the significantevent well. In some embodiments, the significant event is associatedwith one or more characteristics that are used to select arepresentative media item. In some embodiments, characteristics are usedbased on what a media items depicts (e.g., family members, a particularperson, a Christmas tree). For example, a significant event can be aholiday such as Christmas, and a representative media item can beselected based on a family characteristic (e.g., whether it depicts theuser's family) (e.g., because the user takes many pictures with theirfamily each year during Christmas), and/or based on a holiday-relatedcharacteristic (e.g., whether it depicts a Christmas tree). As anotherexample, a birthday of a particular person (e.g., user's daughter)causes media items that include the particular person (e.g., and thedevice user) as representative media items.

In some embodiments, the significant event is a holiday, and the firstrepresentative media item (e.g., 615B) that is selected based on the oneor more characteristics of the significant event is selected based onthe first representative media item being a media item from the firsttime period that is representative of the one or more characteristics ofthe holiday, and the second representative media item (e.g., 615C) thatis selected based on the one or more characteristics of the significantevent is selected based on the second representative media item being amedia item from the second time period that is representative of the oneor more characteristics of the holiday. In some embodiments, a mediaitem that matches one or more of those characteristics (e.g., that bestmatches) is selected as a representative media item for a correspondingtime period. For example, the holiday of “Christmas” can be associatedwith the characteristic “tree” (e.g., a Christmas tree), and thus apicture that includes a depiction of a Christmas tree can be selectedbased on the picture including such tree (e.g., determined based onanalysis of the image by one or more image recognition algorithms). Forfurther example, the holiday of Christmas can further be associated withthe characteristic “family.” Thus, a picture depicting members of theuser's family standing in front of a Christmas tree can be selected asthe representative media item (e.g., selected instead of a picture ofjust a tree, and other pictures) based on it being associated with twocharacteristics (e.g., depicts a tree, depicts a user's family). In someembodiments, the first time period includes the significant event, andthe second time period does not. For example, the first time period canbe December, and the significant event can be Christmas (e.g., which isincluded in December). In such example, a second time period can beNovember (e.g., in a months view), which does not include the Christmasholiday, but the second representative media item for the second timeperiod can still be selected based on the one or more characteristics ofthe significant event. For example, a media item from November thatdepicts the user's family can be selected based on the holiday Christmasbeing associated with a “family” characteristic.

In some embodiments, the significant event is an anniversary (e.g.,wedding anniversary) for a first individual (e.g., the user) and asecond individual (e.g., user's spouse), and the first representativemedia item that is selected based on the one or more characteristics ofthe significant event is selected based on the first representativemedia item being a media item from the first time period that depictsthe first individual and the second individual (e.g., the firstindividual and the second individual are identified in the one or morecharacteristics), and the second representative media item that isselected based on the one or more characteristics of the significantevent is selected based on the second representative media item being amedia item from the second time period that depicts the first individualand the second individual. In some embodiments, a media item for acorresponding time period is selected based on quality or rating metrics(e.g., metrics used to determine whether the media item is a goodphotograph or a photograph that the user has indicated is a good orimportant media item, such as whether the first individual and thesecond individual are prominently featured in the media item, whetherthere are a large number of other faces detected in the media item). Forexample, a media item that prominently features the first and secondindividuals together without a large number of other faces can beselected over other media items that don't have such features.

Selecting and displaying representative media items based on ananniversary between two individuals based on the media item depictingthe two individuals automatically provides dynamically and contextuallyrelevant media items when displaying a collection of media items,reducing the time a user spends navigating interfaces to find suchrelevant media items. Performing an operation when a set of conditionshas been met without requiring further user input enhances theoperability of the electronic device and makes the user-device interfacemore efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs andreducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the electronicdevice) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves batterylife of the device by enabling the user to use the electronic devicemore quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, the significant event is a birthday of a thirdindividual (e.g., the user, or another individual)(e.g., user's daughteras discussed with respect to FIGS. 6B-6C), and the first representativemedia item (e.g., 609B in FIG. 6B) that is selected based on the one ormore characteristics of the significant event (e.g., user's daughter'sbirthday) is selected based on the first representative media item beinga media item from the first time period (e.g., 2018) that depicts thethird individual (e.g., the third individual is identified in the one ormore characteristics), and the second representative media item (e.g.,609C) that is selected based on the one or more characteristics of thesignificant event is selected based on the second representative mediaitem being a media item from the second time period (e.g., 2017) thatdepicts the third individual. In some embodiments, a representativemedia item selected based on the one or more characteristics (e.g.,depicts a third individual) of the significant event is from aparticular corresponding time period (e.g., first time period, or secondtime period), but is not necessarily from the same day of the year, dayof the month, day of the week (or the like) as the current time. Forexample, in the case of the birthday of the third individual, arepresentative media item for a previous year 2018 can be a good pictureof the third individual from 2018 but not necessarily be from the sameday of the year (e.g., February 17) as the current time (e.g., the thirdindividual's birthday) (e.g., current time is Feb. 17, 2019 andrepresentative media item is from Mar. 27, 2018). Similarly, arepresentative media item for a month tile can be the best picture ofthe third individual from that month, and does not necessarily need tobe from the same day of the month as the current time (e.g., the thirdindividual's birthday) (e.g., current time is Feb. 17, 2019 andrepresentative media item for a tile representing March 2018 is fromMar. 27, 2018). In some embodiments, the media item (e.g., 609A, 609B,609C) is selected based on quality or rating metrics (e.g., metrics usedto determine whether the media item is a good photograph or a photographthat the user has indicated is a good or important media item, such aswhether the third individual is prominently featured in the media item,whether there are a large number of other faces detected in the mediaitem. For example, a media item that prominently features the thirdindividual without a large number of other faces can be selected overother media items that don't have such features.

In some embodiments, in accordance with the third individual being asignificant individual, the birthday of the third individual is asignificant event; and in accordance with the third individual not beinga significant individual, then the birthday of the third individual isnot a significant event. In some embodiments, the user is a significantindividual. In some embodiments, criteria for whether an individual is asignificant individual includes one or more of: whether the individualis marked as a favorite individual (e.g., by the user), whether theindividual is a close family member (e.g., child of the user, spouse ofthe user, parent of the user, sibling of the user), whether the medialibrary of the user includes more than a threshold amount of media itemsthat depict that individual (e.g., the user has a high number ofpictures of the individual). For example, a birthday of a thirdindividual is a significant event if the third individual is the user'schild. As another example, an individual that is a casual acquaintancewould not qualify as a significant individual, and thus their birthdaywould not be considered a significant event, even if the user's accountor device was aware of the acquaintance's birthday; in the case of thecasual acquaintance's birthday (not a significant event), if nosignificant event was associated with the current time that includes theacquaintance's birthday, then another recurring temporal event can beused (to select representative media items) such as a day of the year(for a year view) or a day of the month (for a month view). Similarly,in the case of an anniversary, the anniversary can be considered asignificant event if one or more (or all of) of the individuals (whoseanniversary it is) is considered a significant individual.

Selecting and displaying representative media items based on anindividual's birthday based on the media item depicting the individualautomatically provides dynamically and contextually relevant media itemswhen displaying a collection of media items, reducing the time a userspends navigating interfaces to find such relevant media items.Performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met withoutrequiring further user input enhances the operability of the electronicdevice and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., byhelping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakeswhen operating/interacting with the electronic device) which,additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of thedevice by enabling the user to use the electronic device more quicklyand efficiently.)

In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the currenttime is associated with the first recurring temporal event: the firstrepresentative media item (e.g., 615B in FIG. 6D) that is selected basedon the first recurring temporal event (e.g., day of the year February18th) is selected based on the first representative media item being amedia item from a particular day (e.g., the same day of the year, sameday of the month, or same day of the week as the current time) (e.g.,day of the year February 18th) within the first time period (e.g.,2018), and the second representative media item (e.g., 615C in FIG. 6D)that is selected based on the first recurring temporal event is selectedbased on the second representative media item being a media item from aparticular day (e.g., the same day of the year, same day of the month,or same day of the week as the current time) (e.g., day of the yearFebruary 18th) within the second time period (e.g., 2017). For example,where the first representative media item is selected to represent theentire year (e.g., upon initial display of a year view) for a previousyear 2018, then the first representative media item is from the same dayof the year in 2018 as the current time. As another example, if thefirst representative media item is selected to represent a month (e.g.,in a months view, or horizontally scrolling through months in a yearsview tile), then the first representative media item is from the sameday of the month as the current time.

In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the currenttime is associated with the second recurring temporal event (e.g.,user's daughter's birthday) (and, optionally, not associated with thefirst recurring temporal event): the third representative media item(e.g., 609B in FIG. 6B) that is selected based on the second recurringtemporal event is selected based on the third representative media itembeing a media item from the first time period (e.g., 2018) and without arequirement that the third representative media item is from aparticular day (e.g., February 17) within the first time period (e.g.,the same day of the year, same day of the month, or same day of the weekas the current time), and the fourth representative media item (e.g.,609C in FIGS. 6B-6C) that is selected based on the second recurringtemporal event is selected based on the fourth representative media itembeing a media item from the second time period (e.g., 2017) and withouta requirement that the fourth representative media item is from aparticular day (e.g., February 17) within the second time period (e.g.,the same day of the year, same day of the month, or same day of the weekas the current time). For example, where the third representative mediaitem is selected to represent the entire year (e.g., upon initialdisplay of a year view) for a previous year 2018, then the thirdrepresentative media item is selected from the year 2018, but is notnecessarily selected from the same day of the year in 2018 as thecurrent time (Feb. 17, 2019). For example, if the second recurringtemporal event is a significant event, such as a birthday of anindividual, a high quality media item (e.g., a portrait photograph) ofthat individual from 2018 can be selected that is not necessarily fromthe day of the individual's birthday in 2018 (e.g., because the medialibrary might not include any for that particular birthday, but a userwould still want to see a good picture of that person over the years).As another example, if the third representative media item is selectedto represent a month (e.g., in a months view, or horizontally scrollingthrough months in a years view tile), then the third representativemedia item is from the month it represents, but not necessarily the sameday of the month as the current time.

In some embodiments, a single recurring temporal event is selected to beassociated with the current time. For example, a significant eventrecurring temporal event can take priority over a day of theyear/month/week recurring temporal event; thus, a significant event isused to select representative media items if it exists for the currenttime, otherwise a day of the year/month/week recurring temporal event isused when no significant event exists for the current time.

In some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g., 600) receives, via theone or more input devices, a second input (e.g., 616 in FIG. 6E). Inresponse to receiving the second input: in accordance with adetermination that a duration of the second input exceeds a thresholdduration (e.g., is a press and hold gesture), and in accordance with adetermination that the second input corresponds to a location of therepresentation (e.g., 614B of FIG. 6E) of the first time period, theelectronic device displays, via the display device, information (e.g.,620B) (e.g., a month) related to the first time period (e.g., 2018 inFIG. 6E) (e.g., a year). In some embodiments, the information isdisplayed visually associated with (e.g., overlaid on, displayed justbelow or above) the first representation (e.g., 614B in FIG. 6E). Insome embodiments, the information identifies an event and/or time periodthat includes less than all of the first time period. For example, ifthe first time period is a calendar year (e.g., 2018), the informationdisplayed in response to a press and hold can be a month (e.g., theparticular month from 2018 that the currently displayed representativemedia item is from). In some embodiments, in accordance with adetermination that a duration of the second input does not exceed thethreshold duration (e.g., is a tap gesture), and in accordance with adetermination that the second input corresponds to a location of therepresentation of the first time period, the electronic device (e.g.,600) displays, via the display device, a different view (e.g., monthsview such as 626 in FIG. 6J) (e.g., months view or a days view,different from the current first view that is a years view) than thecurrent view (e.g., 614 in FIG. 6D). In some embodiments, the secondinput is received at a location of the representation (e.g., 614C ofFIG. 6D) of the second time period (e.g., 2017). In some embodiments, inaccordance with a determination that the duration of the second inputexceeds the threshold duration (e.g., is a press and hold gesture), andin accordance with a determination that the second input corresponds toa location of the representation of the second time period, theelectronic device displays, via the display device, information (e.g., amonth) related to the second time period (e.g., 2017 in FIG. 6D) (e.g.,a year). In some embodiments, the second input is received at a locationassociated with any representation of any time period in the first viewand, in response, the electronic device (e.g., 600) displays informationvisually associated with the selected representation related to thecorresponding time period of the selected representation.

Providing access to information related to the first time period inresponse to user input allow a user to access information withoutcluttering the display before such information is needed (e.g.,requested). Providing additional control options without cluttering theUI with additional displayed items enhances the operability of thedevice and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., byhelping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakeswhen operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reducespower usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the userto use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, in accordance with the determination that theduration of the second input (e.g., 616 in FIG. 6E) exceeds thethreshold duration (e.g., is a press and hold gesture), and inaccordance with the determination that the second input corresponds tothe location of the representation (e.g., 614B) of the first time period(e.g., 2018), the electronic device (e.g., 600) reduces the size of therepresentation of the first time period. For example, in response toreceiving input 616, representation 614B is reduced in size in FIG. 6E(e.g., compared to FIG. 6D before input 616). In some embodiments, therepresentation (e.g., 614B) remains at a reduced size for as long as theinput is detected (e.g., until lift off of the contact of 616). In someembodiments, the representation reduces in size temporarily and thenreturns to normal size (e.g., bounces back without requiring lift off).

Reducing the size of a representation provides feedback about the stateof a device (e.g., that a press and hold gesture has been detected) andthat the device is ready to perform another operation in response to afurther manipulation of the input (e.g., horizontal swipe to navigatesub-periods). Providing improved feedback enhances the operability ofthe device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., byhelping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakeswhen operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reducespower usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the userto use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, while the first representative media item (e.g.,614B in FIG. 6E) is displayed in the first region (e.g., 614B-1),wherein the first representative media item is from a first sub-period(e.g., February 2018) included within the first time period (e.g., 2018)(e.g., first representative media item is from February 2018, which is asub-period of the year 2018): the electronic device (e.g., 600)receives, via the one or more input devices, a third input (e.g., 616;movement of 616). In response to receiving the third input: inaccordance with a determination that the third input (e.g., a swipe; apress and hold that is dragged) includes movement in a first direction(e.g., left or right) (e.g., 616 moves to the right as shown in FIG.6F), and in accordance with a determination that the third inputcorresponds to (e.g., starts at) a location of the representation (e.g.,614B) of the first time period, the electronic device (e.g., 600)navigates through a plurality of sub-periods (e.g., the calendar monthsof 2018) included within the first time period including replacingdisplay of, via the display device, the first representative media item(e.g., 615B in FIG. 6E) from the first sub-period (February 2018) in thefirst region with display of a fifth representative media item (e.g.,615D in FIG. 6F) from the first time period (e.g., 2018) (e.g.,replacing first representative media item from a first month with arepresentative media item from a different month) that is selected basedon the first recurring temporal event (e.g., day of the year February 18that includes the current date) (e.g., the same significant event, suchas a birthday or anniversary, as the first representative media item) ora third recurring temporal event (e.g., different than the firstrecurring temporal event) (e.g., day of the month that includes thecurrent date) (e.g., 18th day of the month) related to the firstrecurring temporal event, wherein the fifth representative media item isfrom a second sub-period (e.g., March 2018 as shown in FIG. 6F) includedwithin the first time period that is different from the first sub-period(e.g., the fifth representative media item is from a second sub-period(e.g., March) that is adjacent to the first sub-period (e.g., February),which are both sub-periods of the first time period (e.g., the year2018)). For example, in response to receiving an input 616 (e.g., anexemplary third input) that is a press and hold that is draggedhorizontally (e.g., to the right, an exemplary first direction) on arepresentation of the year 2018, the electronic device (e.g., 600)navigates through one or more of a plurality of sub-periods includedwithin the time period associated with the location of the receivedinput (e.g., the first time period in the case of the third input),wherein navigating through the one or more plurality of sub-periodsincludes replacing display of a displayed representative media item forone sub-period from the time period with a representative media itemfrom another sub-period from the time period. In some embodiments,navigating includes scrolling (e.g., continuously) throughrepresentative media items corresponding to sub-periods. For example,while the third input continues to be detected (e.g., has not beenlifted off a touch-sensitive surface), the electronic device (e.g., 600)can scroll through (e.g., replacing display of) representative mediaitems of sub-periods continuously (e.g., stopping on each for apredetermined amount of time, such as one second), until the third inputceases to be detected.

Navigating through representative media items from sub-periods of afirst time period within a region of a representation of the first timeperiod allows the user to easily and logically navigate through acollection of media items in predictable and logical increments whiledisplaying previews of underlying content, thereby reducing the numberof inputs needed to navigate the collection to find media items.Reducing the number of inputs needed to perform an operation enhancesthe operability of the device and makes the user-device interface moreefficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs andreducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device)which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life ofthe device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly andefficiently.

In some embodiments, a recurring temporal event (e.g., the firstrecurring temporal event) is related to another recurring temporal event(e.g., the third recurring temporal event) based on representing a daythat includes the current time with respect to different time intervals.For example, an exemplary first recurring temporal event can represent aday of the year February 18 and be related to an exemplary thirdrecurring temporal event that represents a day of the month that is the18th day of the month because both include the current time, Feb. 18,2019. In some embodiments, whether the first recurring temporal event isused or the third recurring temporal event is used to select the fifthrepresentative media item (e.g., 615D in FIG. 6F) depends on whether thefirst recurring temporal event is associated with a significant event.For example, if the first recurring temporal event is a significationevent (e.g., birthday) associated with a person characteristic, then theperson characteristic of the significant event can also be used toselect a media item that depicts the person from within the appropriatesub-period (e.g., March 2018). If the first recurring temporal event isa day of the year/month/week, then moving down the hierarchy of viewsmeans that the related third recurring temporal event should be used.For example, when scrolling through representative media items formonths, media items from each month are needed, and thus a day of monthrecurring event is used instead of a day of the year recurring event;however, the day of the year and the day of the month are related inthat they both include the current date. In some embodiments, therepresentations of time periods (e.g., 614A-614C) are navigable (e.g.,scrollable) along an axis (e.g., vertically), and the third input is ina direction different than the axis (e.g., not in a direction along theaxis, substantially perpendicular to the vertical axis, horizontally)(e.g., horizontally to the right as shown in FIG. 6F).

In some embodiments, one or more representations of other time periods(e.g., time periods that do not correspond to the location of the thirdinput) continue to be displayed (e.g., unchanged in response to thethird input) while navigating through sub-periods of the first timeperiod (e.g., in FIG. 6F, tiles 614A and 614C remain unchanged inresponse to user input 616). For example, in response to a press andhold that is dragged horizontally on a representation of the year 2018(e.g., an exemplary third input), the electronic device (e.g., 600)replaces the representative media item displayed in the first regionfrom being a representative media item from a first month (e.g., anexemplary first sub-period) with a representative media item from asecond month (e.g., an exemplary second sub-period); however,representations for the years 2017 and 2019 can remain displayed andunchanged (as shown in FIG. 6F).

In some embodiments, the third input (e.g., 616) is a press and holdgesture that is dragged in the first direction (e.g., to the right asshown in FIGS. 6E-6F) while contact is maintained with the one or moreinput devices. In some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g., 600)navigates (e.g., scrolls) in a first direction (e.g., to the right) inresponse to the third input including movement in the first direction.In some embodiments, the device scrolls in a second direction (e.g.,opposite the first; to the left) in response to the third inputincluding movement in the second direction.

In some embodiments, while the third input (e.g., 616) including themovement in the first direction (e.g., to the right) continues to bedetected (e.g., contact on the input device(s) is continuouslymaintained without lift off) (e.g., as shown in FIG. 6F): the electronicdevice (e.g., 600) continues to navigate through the plurality ofsub-periods included within the first time period including replacingdisplay of, via the display device, the fifth representative media item(e.g., 615D in FIG. 6F) in the first region with display of a sixthrepresentative media item (e.g., 615E in FIG. 6G) from the first timeperiod (e.g., 2018) that is selected based on the first recurringtemporal event (e.g., the same significant event, such as a birthday oranniversary) or the third recurring temporal event (e.g., day of themonth that includes the current date, where the first recurring temporalevent is a day of the year that includes the current date), wherein thesixth representative media item is from a third sub-period (e.g., April2018) included within the first time period (e.g., 2018) that isdifferent from the first sub-period (e.g., February) and from the secondsub-period (e.g., March) (e.g., fifth representative media item is fromMarch, which gets replaced with sixth representative media item which isfrom April). For example, in response to an input 616 including movementthat continues to be detected, electronic device 600 continuesnavigating sub-periods (months) of the year 2018 which includesreplacing the currently displayed representative media item from asub-period with the next sub-period's representative media item as shownin FIGS. 6F-6G. In some embodiments, a representative media item for asub-period is maintained (e.g., displayed in the first region) for apredetermined amount of time. For example, a media item 615E can bedisplayed in the first region for 1 second before the continuing tonavigate causes it to be replaced with another media item. In someembodiments, the speed of continuous navigation (e.g., the length of thepredetermined amount of time that a sub-period representation ismaintained) (e.g., of replacing display of representative media items)depends on a characteristic of the movement (e.g., amount/amplitude in aparticular direction, speed of movement). In some embodiments, theelectronic device (e.g., 600) performs circular scrolling through thesub-periods (e.g., scrolls through each month individually betweenJanuary and December, then begins again at January and repeats, so longsas the movement associated with the input is maintained). In someembodiments, while navigating through the plurality of sub-periods, theelectronic device (e.g., 600) outputs, via one or more tactile outputdevices (e.g., 167, 357), a tactile output (e.g., 622) in conjunctionwith (e.g., contemporaneous in time with) replacing display of anyrepresentative media item (e.g., 615D in FIG. 6F) from a sub-period ofthe plurality of sub-periods with another representative media item(e.g., 615E in FIG. 6G) from another sub-period of the plurality ofsub-periods.

Outputting a tactile output as navigation between sub-periodrepresentative media items occurs provides improved feedback to the userwhile holding a navigation gesture by revealing the internal state ofthe device to the user and that the device has responded to user input.Providing improved feedback enhances the operability of the device andmakes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping theuser to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes whenoperating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reducespower usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the userto use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, while a representative media item (e.g., 615E inFIG. 6G) from a fourth sub-period (e.g., April 2018) of the plurality ofsub-periods (e.g., months of 2018) other than the first sub-period(e.g., February 2018) is displayed in the first region (e.g., 614B-1 inFIG. 6G) (e.g., a representative media item different than the originalrepresentative media item is currently displayed as the representativemedia item): in accordance with a determination that the third input(e.g., 616) is no longer detected (e.g., lift off from the one or moreinput devices): the electronic device (e.g., 600) ceases to navigatethrough the plurality of sub-periods (e.g., months) included within thefirst time period (e.g., 2018), and maintains (e.g., after determiningthat the third input is no longer detected, after detecting lift off ofthe third input), in the first region (e.g., 614B-1 in FIG. 6H), displayof the representative media item (e.g., 615E in FIG. 6H) from the fourthsub-period of the plurality of sub-periods other than the firstsub-period (e.g., February 2018) is displayed in the first region. Insome embodiments, an input (e.g., 624 in FIG. 6H) representing selection(e.g., a tap) of the representative media item (e.g., 615E in FIG. 6H)displayed upon ceasing to navigate causes the device to display a secondview (e.g., 626 in FIGS. 6I-6J) of the collection of media items thatincludes concurrently displayed representations (e.g., 626A, 626B, and626C) of a plurality of representative media items (e.g., 628A, 615E,and 615D) for a plurality of the two or more sub-periods (e.g., March2018, April 2018, and May 2018 as shown in FIG. 6J) (e.g., changes froma years view to a months view). In some embodiments, the selectedrepresentative media item (e.g., 615E in FIG. 6H) is included in theinitial display of the second view (e.g., 615E in FIG. 6J) (e.g.,centered, displayed first or prominently). For example, selecting arepresentation (e.g., 614B in FIG. 6H) of a year (e.g., 2018) causes thedevice to display a month representation (e.g., 626B in FIG. 6J) withthe same representative media item (e.g., 615E) as that which wasdisplayed in the selected representation of the year. For furtherexample, the month representation can be one of a plurality of monthtiles from the year that are displayed in response to the selection(e.g., multiple months from 2018 are displayed in response, as shown inFIG. 6J).

Maintaining display of a representative media item from a sub-period inaccordance with the third input no longer being detected provides aquick way to switch between representative media items for differentsub-periods with a smaller number of inputs. Reducing the number ofinputs needed to perform an operation enhances the operability of theelectronic device and makes the user-device interface more efficient(e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing usermistakes when operating/interacting with the electronic device) which,additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of thedevice by enabling the user to use the electronic device more quicklyand efficiently.

In some embodiments, the current time (e.g., Feb. 17, 2019) isassociated with the first recurring temporal event (e.g., user'sdaughter's birthday). The electronic device (e.g., 600) receives, viathe one or more input devices, a fourth input (e.g., 614) (e.g., anupward swipe, a downward swipe) that includes movement in a seconddirection (e.g., downward) (e.g., a vertical direction, different fromthe first direction)(e.g., substantially perpendicular to a sub-periodnavigation direction). In response to receiving the fourth input,navigating (e.g., scrolling) the first view (e.g., 608 in FIGS. 6B-6C)of the collection of media items to display, via the display device, oneor more other representations (e.g., 608D in FIG. 6C) of one or morerespective other time periods (e.g., 2016) different from the first timeperiod (e.g., 2018) and from the second time period (e.g., 2017),wherein each of the one or more other representations of the one or morerespective other time periods includes a respective region (e.g.,608D-1) that is occupied by a respective representative media item(e.g., 609D) from the respective other time period (e.g., 2016), therespective representative media item selected based on the firstrecurring temporal event (e.g., user's daughter's birthday).

In some embodiments, the first view (e.g., 614, 626) organizes thecollection of media items using a first time-based grouping (e.g., mediais presented grouped by year), and while displaying the first view ofthe collection of media items, the electronic device (e.g., 600)receives, via the one or more input devices, a fifth input (e.g., 624,630) (e.g., a tap) that corresponds to selection of the representation(e.g., 614B, 626B) of the first time period (e.g., 2018, April 2018). Inresponse to receiving the fifth input: in accordance with the first viewrepresenting a first level in a hierarchy of views (e.g., Years in thehierarchy of Years-Months-Days) (e.g., first view is years view 614),the electronic device (e.g., 600) displays, via the display device, asecond view (e.g., 626) (e.g., changes from a years view to a monthsview) of the collection of media items that includes multiple differentmedia items that are associated with corresponding dates and times,wherein the second view is different from the first view (e.g., 614),and wherein the second view presents the collection of media itemsorganized by a second time-based grouping (e.g., media is presentedgrouped by month in 626); and in accordance with the first viewrepresenting a second level in a hierarchy of views (e.g., Months in thehierarchy of Years-Months-Days) (e.g., first view is months view 626)that is different than the first level, displaying, via the displaydevice, a third view (e.g., days view 640) (e.g., changes from a monthsview to a days view) of the collection of media items that includesmultiple different media items that are associated with correspondingdates and times, wherein the third view is different from the first viewand the second view, and wherein the third view presents the collectionof media items organized by a third time-based grouping (e.g., media ispresented grouped by one or more days). In some embodiments, atime-based grouping is based on a time increment (e.g., year, month,week, day, or the like)

Displaying views of a collection of media items that are arranged in ahierarchy, each with a different time-based grouping, based on whether aselection is made at a particular level of the hierarchy, allows a userto step through logical presentations of media items automatically,depending on a current view's level, in response to selection of arepresentation of time period. Performing an operation when a set ofconditions has been met without requiring further user input enhancesthe operability of the device and makes the user-device interface moreefficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs andreducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device)which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life ofthe device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly andefficiently.

In some embodiments, the current time (e.g., Feb. 18, 2019) isassociated with the first recurring temporal event (e.g., day of theyear February 18) (e.g., day of the week, day of the month, holiday,birthday, anniversary, etc.), and wherein displaying the second view(e.g., months view 626) comprises: concurrently displaying arepresentation (e.g., 626B in FIG. 6J) of a third time period (e.g.,April 2018) and a representation (e.g., 626C of FIG. 6J) of a fourthtime period (e.g., March 2018) that is different from the third timeperiod, including: the representation of the third time period includesa third region (e.g., 626B-1) that is occupied by a seventhrepresentative media item (e.g., 615E) from the third time period (e.g.,taken during the time period) that is selected based on the firstrecurring temporal event (e.g., the same significant event, such as abirthday or anniversary) or a fourth recurring temporal event (e.g., dayof the month of the 18th day of the month) (e.g., day of the month)related to the first recurring temporal event (e.g., February 18) (e.g.,day of the year) (e.g., selected based on the date associated with thecurrent time (current date, holiday, birthday, anniversary), day of theweek associated with the current time, day of the month associated withthe current time, a range of time/dates that include the current time),wherein the third time period is a sub-period included within the firsttime period (e.g., 2018); and the representation of the fourth timeperiod includes a fourth region (e.g., 626C-1) that is occupied by aneighth representative media item (e.g., 615D) from the fourth timeperiod (e.g., taken during the time period) that is selected based onthe first recurring temporal event (e.g., the same significant event,such as a birthday or anniversary) or the fourth recurring temporalevent related to the first recurring temporal event, wherein the fourthtime period is a sub-period included within the first time period. Insome embodiments, a recurring temporal event (e.g., the first recurringtemporal event) is related to another recurring temporal event (e.g.,the fourth recurring temporal event) based on representing a day thatincludes the current time with respect to different time intervals. Forexample, an exemplary first recurring temporal event can represent a dayof the year February 18 and be related to an exemplary fourth recurringtemporal event that represents a day of the month that is the 18th dayof the month because both include the current time, Feb. 18, 2019. Insome embodiments, whether the first recurring temporal event is used orthe fourth temporal event is used to select the seventh and eighthrepresentative media items (and, optionally, other representations inthe second view) depends on whether the first recurring temporal eventis associated with a significant event. For example, if the firstrecurring temporal event is a birthday associated with a personcharacteristic, then the person characteristic can be used to select amedia item that depicts the person from within the appropriate timeperiod. If the first recurring temporal event is a day of theyear/month/week, then moving down the hierarchy of views means that therelated fourth recurring temporal event should be used (e.g., in amonths view, media items for each month are needed, and thus a day ofmonth recurring event is used instead of a day of the year recurringevent; however, the day of the year and the day of the month are relatedin that they both include the current date). In some embodiments, thesecond view includes any number of representations of time periods. Insome embodiments, the second view includes a number of representationsof time periods equal to the number of time periods represented by themedia library. For example, if a second view is a months view and themedia library includes media items from each month (e.g., 12 per year)of exactly 10 full years, then the second view can include 120 (e.g., 10multiplied by 12) representations of time periods (months in thisexample). In some embodiments, if some months do not include media, thena representations for such months can be excluded from the second view.In some embodiments, the second view is navigable (e.g., scrollable) todisplay representations of time periods. For example, the second viewcan be scrolled (e.g., vertically) to display representations (e.g., ofmore months), all of which are not necessarily displayed concurrently(e.g., display device can display 3 at a time).

In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the fifthinput (e.g., 624 in FIG. 6H) (e.g., corresponding to selection of therepresentation of the first time period) is received while the seventhrepresentative media item (e.g., 615E) is displayed (e.g., alone) in thefirst region (e.g., 614B-1) of the representation (e.g., 614B) of thefirst time period (e.g., 2018) in the first view (e.g., 614 in FIG. 6H),the representation (e.g., 626B in FIG. 6J) of the third time period(e.g., April 2018) (e.g., that includes the seventh representationoccupying the third region) is displayed at a first location (e.g., acentral location, a visually emphasized location, or a location that isotherwise a visual focus of the second view) in the second view (e.g.,tile 626B with media item 615E is displayed centered in months view 626in FIG. 6J); and in accordance with a determination that the fifth inputis received while the eighth representative media item (e.g., 615D) isdisplayed (e.g., alone) in the first region of the representation of thefirst time period in the first view, the representation of the fourthtime period (e.g., 626C in FIG. 6J) (e.g., that includes the eighthrepresentation occupying the fourth region) is displayed at the firstlocation (e.g., instead of the representation of the third time period)in the second view (e.g., if 615D is displayed in tile 614B as shown inFIG. 6F when input 624 was received, then tile 626C in FIG. 6J would bedisplayed in the center of view 626 in FIG. 6J). For example, the monthcorresponding to the representative media item that is displayed in theregion of a representation of a year when the representation of the yearis selected (e.g., tapped) is the month that is displayed (e.g., arepresentation thereof) centered on the display in response to selectionof the representation of the year (and moving from the years view to themonths view in a hierarchy of views).

In some embodiments, the representations (e.g., 626A, 626B, 626C) oftime periods in the second view (e.g., 626 in FIG. 6J) are smaller thanrepresentations (e.g., 614A, 614B, 614C) of time periods in the firstview (e.g., 614 in FIG. 6H). For example, the representations in view614 that each represent a year are larger than representations in view626 that each represent a month. The size of a representation of a timeperiod can provide an intuitive visual indication of the current view(e.g., level in the hierarchy of views). In some embodiments, inresponse to selection (e.g., via input 624) of a representation (e.g.,614B in FIG. 6H) of a time period in the first view causesrepresentations (e.g., 626A, 626C) of time periods that are sub-periodsof the selected time period to animatedly emerge from the selectedrepresentation (e.g., to display the second view) (e.g., as shown inFIGS. 6I-6J). For example, upon selection of a representation of a year,individual representations of the months of that particular year canappear to be created and/or emerge from the location of the selectedyear representation, which can provide a visual indication that thedevice is moving down a hierarchy of related views.

Displaying a representation of a time period that is a sub-period ofanother time period when a representation of the other time period isselected, and including the same representative media item, provides theuser with feedback regarding the navigation operation. Providingimproved feedback enhances the operability of the device and makes theuser-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user toprovide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes whenoperating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reducespower usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the userto use the device more quickly and efficiently.

Displaying a representation of a time period that is a sub-period ofanother time period when a representation of the other time period isselected, and including the same representative media item, maintainsthe context of the user and thus reduces the number of inputs needed tonavigate to a desired sub-period after moving between levels of ahierarchy of views. Reducing the number of inputs needed to perform anoperation enhances the operability of the device and makes theuser-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user toprovide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes whenoperating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reducespower usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the userto use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, the current time (e.g., Feb. 18, 2019) isassociated with the first recurring temporal event (e.g., 18th day ofthe month) (e.g., day of the week, day of the month, holiday, birthday,anniversary, etc.), and wherein displaying the third view (e.g., daysview 640 in FIG. 6K) comprises: displaying, via the display devices, aplurality of representations (e.g., 640C, 640B, 640D) of media items(e.g., 615E, 642A, 642B) from the first time period (e.g., April 2018)(e.g., fewer than all (e.g., a curated set) from the first time period,or all photos from the first time period).

In some embodiments, while displaying the plurality of representations(e.g., 640C, 640B, and 640C in FIG. 6K) of media items from the firsttime period (e.g., April 2018), the electronic device (e.g., 600)receives, via the one or more input devices, a sixth input (e.g., 648 inFIG. 6K) (e.g., a swipe, a scroll). In response to receiving the sixthinput, the electronic device (e.g., 600) updates the third view (e.g.,days view 640 scrolls as shown in FIGS. 6K-6M) of the collection ofmedia items, including: transitioning the plurality of representationsof media items from the first time period off of the display (e.g., 640Cand 640B are no longer displayed in FIG. 6M) (e.g., scrolling, sliding,covering up, fading to black, ceasing to display); and displaying aplurality of representations (e.g., 640F and 640G in FIG. 6M) of mediaitems (e.g., 642C, 642D) from the second time period (e.g., May 2018 inFIG. 6M) (e.g., swipe to reveal the media items from the unselected,adjacent days/events). In some embodiments, media items are arrangedchronologically in the third view. For example, the third view (e.g.,days view 640) can be arranged chronologically from oldest on top tonewest on bottom, such that scrolling up to display representations ofmedia items from the second time period means that the second timeperiod precedes the first time period chronologically.

In some embodiments, while displaying the plurality of representationsof media items (e.g., 640F, 640G in FIG. 6M) from the first time period(e.g., May 2018) in the third view (e.g., 640 in FIG. 6M), theelectronic device (e.g., 600) receives, via the one or more inputdevices, a seventh input (e.g., 650 in FIG. 6M) (e.g., a tap) thatcorresponds to selection of a media item (e.g., 642D) of the pluralityof representations of media items from the first time period. Inresponse to receiving the seventh input, the electronic device (e.g.,600) replaces display of, via the display device, the third view (e.g.,640 in FIG. 6M) with display of a one-up view (e.g., 652 in FIG. 6N) ofthe selected media item (e.g., 642D) of the plurality of representationsof media items from the first time period. In some embodiments, a one-upview includes an area (e.g., 652A) that includes a representation of amedia item (e.g., 642D in FIG. 6N) displayed having larger dimensionsthan other representations concurrently displayed (e.g., in 652B) and/orlarger dimensions than prior to being selected in another view (e.g., asdisplayed in representation 640G in days view 640 in FIG. 6M). In someembodiments, the area (e.g., 652A) occupies at least a threshold amountof display area (e.g., at least 75% of the display area). In someembodiments, a one-up view (e.g., 652) includes a scrubbing region(e.g., 652B) (e.g., outside of the area 652A) that includesrepresentations of a plurality of media items from the media library(e.g., media items that are adjacent in the media library to the mediaitem in the area 652A). In some embodiments, the representations in thescrubbing region are displayed at a smaller size than the representationin the area (e.g., 652A). In some embodiments, electronic devicereceives input (e.g., a directional gesture, a tap) (e.g., in scrubbingregion 652B) and in response navigates between media items (e.g.,changes which media item is displayed within the area 652A). The inputcan be a gesture (e.g., a directional swipe in the area; a tap ordirectional swipe in the scrubbing region).

In some embodiments, at a subsequent current time (e.g., Feb. 19, 2019)that is subsequent to the current time (e.g., Feb. 18, 2019): subsequentto receiving the first input (e.g., 606), the electronic device (e.g.,600) receives, via the one or more input devices, an eighth input (e.g.,another input like 606). In response to receiving the eighth input, theelectronic device (e.g., 600) displays, via the display device, thefirst view (e.g., a years view like 608 or 614, a months view like 626;a summarized view with less than all photos of a media library) of thecollection of media items that are associated with corresponding datesand times (e.g., plurality of years, plurality of months), includingconcurrently displaying the representation (e.g., 614B) of the firsttime period (e.g., 2108) and the representation (e.g., 614C) of thesecond time period (e.g., 2017) that is different from the first timeperiod, including: in accordance with a determination that thesubsequent time is associated with a fifth recurring temporal event(e.g., day of the year February 19) (e.g., day of the week, day of themonth, holiday, birthday, anniversary, etc.) that is different from thefirst recurring temporal event (e.g., day of the year February 18) andthe second recurring temporal event (e.g., user's daughter's birthdayFebruary 17): the first region (e.g., 614B-1) of the representation ofthe first time period is occupied by a ninth representative media itemfrom the first time period (e.g., taken during the time period) that isselected based on the fifth recurring temporal event (e.g., selectedbased on the date associated with the current time (current date,holiday, birthday, anniversary), day of the week associated with thecurrent time, day of the month associated with the current time, a rangeof time/dates that include the current time); and the second region(e.g., 614C-1) of the representation of the second time period isoccupied by a tenth representative media item from the second timeperiod (e.g., taken during the time period) that is selected based onthe fifth recurring temporal event. For example, entering years view 614on a different day subsequent to Feb. 18, 2019 causes the samerepresentations for the years 2018 and 2017 to be displayed, but withrepresentative media items selected based a different recurring temporalevent based on the subsequent date. In some embodiments, the first viewis displayed at any number of times, having representative media itemsselected based on any number of recurring temporal events. For example,the electronic device (e.g., 600) can display the first view asuccessive number of occurrences (e.g., a different times), eachoccurrence including representative media items occupying the regions inrespective representations of time periods (e.g., first time period,second time period, and so on) selected based on a different recurringtemporal event associated with each occurrence. In some embodiments, arecurring temporal event can be used again. For example, in a subsequentyear (e.g., 2020) on the same day of the year as the current date (Feb.18, 2019), a day of the year (e.g., February 18) recurring temporalevent can be used again to select representative media items—but thefirst view can include a representation for an additional year sincelast used.

Displaying a first view at different times that results in selection anddisplay of different representative media items for the same timeperiods based on different particular recurring temporal eventsautomatically provides dynamically and contextually relevant media itemswhen viewing a collection of media items, reducing the burden ofnavigating through the collection to find such relevant media items.Performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met withoutrequiring further user input enhances the operability of the device andmakes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping theuser to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes whenoperating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reducespower usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the userto use the device more quickly and efficiently.

Note that details of the processes described above with respect tomethod 700 (e.g., FIG. 7) are also applicable in an analogous manner tothe methods described below. For example, method 900 optionally includesone or more of the characteristics of the various methods describedabove with reference to method 700. For brevity, these details are notrepeated below.

FIGS. 8A-8Q illustrate exemplary user interfaces for navigating acollection of media items, in accordance with some embodiments. The userinterfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processesdescribed below, including the processes in FIG. 9.

FIGS. 8A-8D illustrate automatic playback of content in one view of amedia library, but not in another view of the media library. FIG. 8Aillustrates days view 640, which includes representation 640F of mediaitem 642C from the time period May 1-2, 2018. At FIG. 8A, electronicdevice 600 receives user input 802 which is a swipe gesture in adownward direction representing a request to navigate days view 640downward.

FIG. 8B illustrates days view 640 after a navigation operation (e.g., ata different scroll position than FIG. 8A). In this example, days view640 is displayed as shown in FIG. 8B in response to receiving user input802 at FIG. 8A. In FIG. 8B, representations of media items from the timeperiod Apr. 18-19, 2018 are now displayed, including representation 640Cof media item 615E, representation 640D of media item 642A, andrepresentation 640E of media item 642B. In some embodiments, a view(e.g., days view 640) automatically plays back content over time. Inthis example, media item 615E and media item 642A are associated with(e.g., include) content that can be played back over time. In someembodiments, content that can be played back over time is a video or asequence of images (e.g., an animated media item). In FIG. 8B, mediaitems 615E and 642A are displayed at a first time, and at a first statein their playback. Notably, representation 640E of media item 642B isalso associated with content that can be played back over time.

FIG. 8C illustrates days view 640 at a second time, different than thefirst time of FIG. 8B. In this example, the second time is subsequent tothe first time. As shown in FIG. 8C, representation 640C of media item615E has changed—the horse in the image has moved its head-due toelectronic device 600 automatically playing back the content associatedwith media item 615E (e.g., a sequence of images) over time. Likewise,representation 640D of media item 642A has changed—the child is now in astanding position and no longer is jumping with arms and legs extendedfrom his sides-due to electronic device 600 automatically playing backthe content associated with media item 642A (e.g., a sequence of images)over time.

In some embodiments, automatic playback of a media item's contentdepends on a scrolling position of the representation of the media item.In some embodiments, automatic playback of the content begins based onthe corresponding representation being displayed at a thresholdlocation. For example, in FIG. 8A, representations 640C and 640D are notdisplayed, and in FIGS. 8B and 8C electronic device 600 has scrolleddays view 640 downward to reveal representations 640C and 640D. Whilescrolling, for example, the content in representations 640C and 640D maynot initially begin automatic playback upon first being displayed (e.g.,entering view from the top of display 602), but begin playing uponreaching or crossing a threshold location (e.g., entering the middle 80%of the display area). In some embodiments, automatic playback of thecontent ceases based on the corresponding representation no longer beingdisplayed at a threshold location. For further example, representations640C and 640D can cease automatically playing back in response tocontinued scrolling that causes the representations to cross or exit athreshold location (e.g., exiting the middle 80% of the display area).

In some embodiments, an electronic device (e.g., 600) automaticallyplays back content in fewer than all of the representations associatedwith content that can be played back over time. For example, in FIG. 8C,representation 640E of media item 642B has not changed from FIG. 8B. Inthis example, media item 642B is associated with content that can beplayed back over time (e.g., a video), but has not been played back overtime automatically in FIGS. 8B-8C.

In some embodiments, representations of media items that include contentthat is automatically played back are displayed at a larger size thanrepresentations of content that are not selected for automatic playback.For example, in days view 640 in FIGS. 8B and 8C, representations 640Cand 640D (played back automatically) are displayed at a larger size thanrepresentation 640E (not played back automatically) as well as largerthan the other representations (e.g., which are not associated withcontent that can be played back over time). In some embodiments, arepresentation of content selected for automatic playback is displayedlarger (e.g., than one or more other representations) based on therepresentation being selected for automatic playback. For example,representations 640C and 640D can be displayed larger because they areselected for automatic playback. In some embodiments, a representationis selected for automatic playback based on the representation beingdisplayed larger. For example, representations that have been selectedto be displayed larger (e.g., based on other considerations, such asbecause it has been favorited by a user previously) are selected (and/orprioritized over other representations) because they are displayedlarger. Thus, important and/or high-quality representations are selectedfor automatic playback, and are displayed larger for emphasis andimproved viewing experience.

In some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g., 600) concurrentlydisplays two or more representations of media items automaticallyplaying back content over time. For example, in FIGS. 8B to 8C,electronic device 600 has concurrently played back content inrepresentations 640C and 640D (e.g., between the first time and thesecond time). In some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g., 600)concurrently displays no more than a maximum number of representationsautomatically playing back content over time. In the example shown inFIGS. 8B and 8C, the maximum number of representations that are playedback over time automatically is two. Thus, the reason thatrepresentation 640E (which is associated with content that can be playedback over time) is not played back automatically can be becauserepresentations 640C and 640D are playing back. In another example, ifrepresentation 640E were not being played back over time, representation640C can be selected for playback concurrently with 640D. In this way,an electronic device automatically plays back content in up to a selectnumber of representations, so as to automatically enhance the medialibrary viewing experience without overwhelming device resources and auser with a high number of concurrently-moving representations.

In some embodiments, play back of content from two or more media itemsis concurrent (e.g., they play back at the same time). In someembodiments, play back of content from two or more media items issequential (e.g., they play back one at a time). In some embodiments,play back of content of a media item repeats automatically (e.g., loopsthe content playback). In some embodiments, play back of content of amedia item does not repeat (or repeats only a predetermined number oftimes) (e.g., plays back once then stops automatically playing back,without further input).

In some embodiments, an electronic device (e.g., 600) that displays aview (e.g., 640) selects the content to be automatically played back. Insome embodiments, one or more remote devices (e.g., a server, acloud-based service) selects the content to be automatically playedback. In some embodiments, a combination of the displaying electronicdevice and one or more remote devices selects the content to beautomatically played back.

At FIG. 8C, electronic device 600 receives user input 804 representingselection of affordance 610D in ribbon 610. Affordance 610D isassociated with an all photos view.

FIG. 8D illustrates an exemplary all photos view 810. For example,electronic device 600 displays all photos view 810 in response to userinput 804. As shown in FIG. 8D, affordance 610D indicates the currentview is an all photos view (e.g., as indicated by the text “AllPhotos”). In some embodiments, an all photos view (e.g., 810) includesrepresentations of a non-curated set of media items from a media library(e.g., all media items from the media library). For example, days view640 can include representations of a curated set of media items from thetime period Apr. 18-19, 2018 (e.g., a selected number of fewer than allof the media items from those days), and all photos view can includerepresentations of a non-curated set of the media items from the timeperiod Apr. 18-19, 2018 (e.g., all of the media items from those days).For example, in FIG. 8E, all photos view includes a representation 810Gof a media item that was not depicted in the days view 640.

In some embodiments, representations of media items in a days view arearranged chronologically. In some embodiments, the chronologicalarrangement in a days view is based on times that media items werecaptured (e.g., by an imaging device, represented in metadata of themedia item) (e.g., rather than when the media item was added to themedia library).

In some embodiments, representations of media items in an all photosview are arranged chronologically. In some embodiments, thechronological arrangement is based on times that media items were addedto the media library. For example, a media item that includes metadataindicating that it was captured on Jan. 1, 2014, but was added to (e.g.,saved to) the media library on Dec. 1, 2016 would be chronologicallyordered using the Dec. 1, 2016 date. This can occur, for example, wherea media item is saved at a date later than its captured date because acopy of the media item was received from another user who captured itpreviously-thus, the time when the media item is added does notnecessarily coincide with the time that the media item was captured,which would be substantially similar when an electronic device bothcaptures the media item and stores it to the media library (e.g.,immediately thereafter). In such example, representations of media itemsin the all photos view would be arranged such that a givenrepresentation would have been added to the media library after anadjacent representation in one direction (e.g., a neighboringrepresentation to the left, in the case of a left to right ascendingdate arrangement) and before another adjacent representation in theopposite direction (e.g., a neighboring representation to the right, inthe case of a left to right ascending date arrangement). In someembodiments, the chronological arrangement is based on times that mediaitems were captured. In some embodiments, an all photos view is arrangednon-chronologically. In some embodiments, media items for different timeperiods are grouped into a combined time period and presented as if theywere from a single time period (e.g., Apr. 18-19, 2018).

In some embodiments, media items from first time period are grouped(e.g., in a days view, in an all photos view) with media items of asecond time period (e.g., adjacent to the first time period) if one ormore of the first time period and the second time period do not includemore than a threshold amount of media items. In some embodiments, timeperiods for a plurality of time periods (e.g., adjacent to each other)are grouped until the combined group includes more than a thresholdamount of media items. For example, media items from Apr. 18, 2018 andApr. 19, 2018 are grouped together into the combined time period Apr.18-19, 2018 (even though they represent separate days) in exemplary daysview 640 in FIG. 8B. In some embodiments, representations of media itemsare arranged grouped by time period (e.g., Apr. 18-19, 2018) but notdisplayed strictly chronologically (e.g., layout is optimized forpresentation of important items) within those groups (e.g., the left toright, top to bottom order of media items in 640 at FIG. 8B is differentthan the left to right, top to bottom order of media items in 810 inFIG. 8E). In some embodiments, a days view (e.g., 640) and an all photosview (e.g., 810) are arranged differently. For example, in a days view(e.g., 640), representations of media items are arranged grouped by timeperiod (e.g., Apr. 18-19, 2018) but not displayed strictlychronologically (e.g., layout is optimized for presentation of importantitems) within those groups, whereas an all photos view (e.g., 810) canhave all of the media items arranged chronologically (e.g., the orderthat representations are presented corresponds to the actual chronologyused to arrange). For example, in all photos view 810, time and date fora given representation always ascends (e.g., is more recent) when movingto the right and/or down, in the case of a left to right and top tobottom ascending date arrangement, but this is not necessarily true forview 640.

In some embodiments, representations in an all photos view (e.g., 810)are displayed as a multi-column multi-row array (e.g., a grid). In someembodiments, representations in an all photos view (e.g., 810) aredisplayed at a uniform size. For example, as shown in FIG. 8D, therepresentations of media items (e.g., 810A, 810B, 810C) are displayed ata uniform size in a grid (e.g., each having the same width and/or eachhaving the same height).

In some embodiments, an all photos view includes metadata. For example,in FIG. 8E, the dates April 18-19 are displayed at the top. In someembodiments, the displayed metadata indicates corresponds to the mediaitems at a particular location on the display. For example, in FIG. 8E,the metadata April 18-19 corresponds to the media items closest to thetop edge of the display. In some embodiments, metadata is displayedbased on zoom level. For example, electronic device 600 can forgodisplaying metadata if a zoom level is too high (e.g., zoomed in) and/ortoo low (e.g., zoomed out, as in FIGS. 8F-8G).

FIGS. 8D-8E illustrate scrolling of an all photos view. In someembodiments, an all photos view (e.g., 810) is navigable (e.g.,scrollable). At FIG. 8D, electronic device 600 receives user input 812which is a vertical downward swipe gesture representing a request toscroll all photos view 810.

At FIG. 8E, electronic device 600 has scrolled all photos view 810 inresponse to user input 812. In some embodiments, an all photos view isnavigable (e.g., scrollable) to display representations of an entiremedia library. For example, all photos view 810 can be continuallyscrolled (e.g., vertically) to display a representation of each of themedia items that are included in the media library—that is, a user cannavigate through their entire media library in the all photos view.

In some embodiments, an all photos view (e.g., 810) includes a mediaselection affordance (e.g., 810D) that, in response to selection, causesthe device (e.g., 600) to enter a selection mode for selecting mediaitems. For example, all photos view 810 in FIG. 8E includes a mediaselection affordance 810D that causes electronic device 600, in responseto user input representing selection of 810D, to enter a selection modeallowing selection of one or more of the media items in all photos view810 (e.g., for sending via an electronic message, adding to an album,marking for deletion, or other operation).

FIGS. 8E-8I illustrate adjusting a zoom level of an all photos view. Insome embodiments, an electronic device (e.g., 600) adjusts a zoom levelof an all photos view in response to receiving user input. For example,in FIG. 8E, electronic device 600 receives user input 814 which is atwo-contact pinch gesture representing a request to zoom out. An allphotos view can be initially displayed (e.g., a default display at adefault zoom level) (e.g., in response to selection of 610D) at anylevel of zoom (e.g., in a multi-column multi-row array having any numberof columns and/or rows).

FIG. 8F illustrates all photos view 810 after having zoomed out. Inresponse to receiving user input 814 in FIG. 8E, electronic device 600has zoomed out all photos view 810 as shown in FIG. 8F. In someembodiments, zooming (e.g., in or out) an all photos view includesre-arranging representations of media items. In some embodiments,re-arranging representations of media items includes changing one ormore spacing dimensions (e.g., horizontal width, vertical height). Forexample, in FIG. 8E, all photos view 810 included an array having threecolumns of media items (e.g., along the short axis of electronic device600), and in FIG. 8F zooming out included changing the number of columnsto six (e.g., number of representations went up, the width of each mediaitem went down). For further example, in FIG. 8E, all photos view 810included an array having six rows of media items (e.g., along the longaxis of electronic device 600), and in FIG. 8F zooming out includedchanging the number of rows to ten (e.g., number of representations wentup, the height of each media item went down). In some embodiments,changing the one or more spacing dimensions includes changing one ormore dimensions of the representations of media items arranged withinthe view. For example, representations (e.g., 810A, 810B, 810C) of mediaitems from FIG. 8E have been made smaller in both height and width. Insome embodiments, re-arranging representations of media items includeschanging layout positioning of representations of media items. Forexample, media items in all photos view 810 in FIG. 8E that were notdisplayed in the same row are now displayed in the same row in FIG. 8Fafter zooming out-thus, the relative layout of media items has changeddue to the grid dimensions changing and the constraint of maintainingchronological order of the media items. Notably, zooming out of allphotos view 810 in FIG. 8F has revealed new representations of mediaitems (e.g., representation 810H of FIG. 8F). In some embodiments, tozoom out, the representations shown in all photos view 810 of FIG. 8Fare selected based on a location of user input 814 of FIG. 8E. Inresponse to receiving user input 814, electronic device 600 determines alocation based on user input 814 (e.g., identifies a location directlybetween the two touch inputs) and a representation corresponding to thelocation (e.g., displayed at that identified location or closestrepresentation to the identified location). The device identifies aregion on the display at FIG. 8E at which the representationcorresponding to the identified location is being displayed. Whenupdating to display all photos view 810 of FIG. 8F, electronic device600 arranges the representations such that the representationcorresponding to the identified location is displayed at an updatedregion on the display, such that the updated region is a subset of theoriginal region. As a result, the device anchors the representationcorresponding to the identified location, enabling the user to moreeasily locate representations on the display and to maintain continuitywhen viewing representations.

In some embodiments, a request to zoom an all photos view is received asa user input selection associated with an affordance. For example,affordance 810E of FIG. 8E can be selected to cause all photos view 810to be zoomed out. As another example, affordance 810F of FIG. 8E can beselected to cause all photos view 810 to be zoomed in.

In some embodiments, an all photos view can be zoomed to be amulti-column multi-row array of any size (e.g., any number of columns,any number of rows). For example, by allowing the all photos view to bezoomed in or out to varying numbers of columns and/or numbers of rows, ahighly-customizable navigation experience is achieved that allows a userto efficiently navigate a collection of media items. For example, atFIG. 8F, electronic device receives user input 816 which is atwo-contact pinch gesture representing a request to zoom out (again).FIG. 8G illustrates all photos view 810 after having zoomed out further.In response to receiving user input 816 in FIG. 8F, electronic device600 has zoomed out all photos view 810 as shown in FIG. 8G. As shown inFIG. 8G, the multi-column multi-row array has a width of ten mediaitems, and the representations of media items have been re-arranged(e.g., made smaller). In some embodiments, electronic device 600 anchorsthe representation corresponding to an identified location based on userinput 816, as discussed above with respect to user input 814.

In some embodiments, a view (e.g., 810) snaps to fully-displayedrepresentations in response to a request to zoom. For example, as shownin FIG. 8F, each row in all photos view 810 includes the full width ofeach representation, rather than having a portion of a representation(e.g., on the right edge) partially cut off. In other words, the viewfits a plurality of representations across one or more dimensions (e.g.,width, height) of the viewable area of the display 602. In someembodiments, a view includes partially displayed representations of oneor more representations (e.g., in the vertical dimension along anavigable axis, scrolling can cause partially representations).

FIGS. 8G-8I illustrate exemplary zooming in of an all photos view. AtFIG. 8G, electronic device (e.g., 600) receives user input 818 which isa two-contact de-pinch gesture representing a request to zoom in. Inresponse to receiving user input 818 in FIG. 8G, electronic device 600has zoomed in all photos view 810 as shown in FIG. 8H. As shown in FIG.8H, all photos view has zoomed in from being arranged in a multi-columnmulti-row array with a number of columns (width) of ten media items(FIG. 8G) to being arranged in a multi-column multi-row array with anumber of columns (width) of two media items. As shown in FIG. 8H, themulti-column multi-row array has a number of columns (width) of twomedia items, and the representations (e.g., 810I, 810J) of media itemshave been re-arranged (e.g., made bigger, re-flowed to maintainsequential order of the view that is chronological left to right andthen top to bottom). In some embodiments, to zoom in, therepresentations shown in all photos view 810 of FIG. 8G are selectedbased on a location of user input 818 of FIG. 8G. In response toreceiving user input 818, electronic device 600 determines a locationbased on user input 818 (e.g., identifies a location directly betweenthe two touch inputs) and a representation corresponding to the location(e.g., displayed at that identified location or closest representationto the identified location). The device identifies a region on thedisplay at FIG. 8G at which the representation corresponding to theidentified location is being displayed. When updating to display allphotos view 810 of FIG. 8H, electronic device 600 arranges therepresentations such that the representation corresponding to theidentified location is displayed at an updated region on the display,such that the updated region includes the original region (or at least aportion of the original region). As a result, the device anchors therepresentation corresponding to the identified location, enabling theuser to more easily locate representations on the display and tomaintain continuity when viewing representations.

In some embodiments, an all photos view can be arranged as a grid havinga single media item width. For example, in FIG. 8H electronic device 600receives user input 820 which is a tap representing selection ofaffordance 810F, representing a request to zoom in. In response toreceiving user input 820, electronic device 600 has zoomed in all photosview 810 as shown in FIG. 8. As shown in FIG. 8I, the multi-columnmulti-row array is zoomed into a single-item array (e.g., an array withone column, and one or more rows) (e.g., an array with one row, and oneor more columns) that has a width of one media item, and therepresentations (e.g., 810I, 810J, 810K) of media items have beenre-arranged vertically (e.g., which includes making the representationslarger).

As noted above, an all photos view can be navigable. FIGS. 8I-8Jillustrate scrolling of the single-item array all photos view 810. AtFIG. 8I, electronic device 600 receives user input 822 which is a swipegesture in an upward direction representing a request to scroll upward.At FIG. 8J, in response to receiving user input 822, electronic device600 has scrolled the all photos view 810 upward to display otherrepresentations (e.g., representation 810I). As can be seen in FIGS.8I-8J, the single-item array all photos view 810 maintains the sameordering of media items from the media library as shown in the morezoomed out states such as FIGS. 8D-8H, except as an array with a singlecolumn.

FIGS. 8J-8L illustrate using a directional swipe gesture on a displayedrepresentation to perform one or more actions. In some embodiments, adirectional swipe gesture (e.g., 824, 826) at a location of a displayedrepresentation (e.g., 810I) of a media item (e.g., 810L) causes theelectronic device (e.g., 600) to perform an action related to the mediaitem. For example, at FIG. 8J, electronic device 600 receives user input824 which is a directional swipe gesture to the right that begins at alocation associated with representation 810I of media item 810L. Inresponse to receiving user input 824, electronic device 600 causesdeletion of the media item 810L associated with representation 810I fromthe media library. As another example, in response to receiving userinput 824, electronic device can display a delete affordance 826 (asshown in FIG. 8K) that, when selected, causes electronic device to causedeletion of the media item 810L associated with representation 810I fromthe media library. In some embodiments, the action performed in responseto a directional swipe gesture depends on the length of the directionalswipe gesture (e.g., from touch down to lift off of the contact). Insome embodiments, the electronic device performs a first action if thelength of the directional swipe is below a threshold length and a secondaction if the length of the directional swipe is equal to or above thethreshold length. For example, in response to user input 824 being belowa threshold distance (e.g., a predetermined number of pixels, aproportion of the display dimensions) electronic device 600 displaysaffordance 826 without causing deletion of the media item 810L, and inresponse to user input 824 being equal to or above the thresholddistance (e.g., a predetermined number of pixels, a proportion of thedisplay dimensions) electronic device 600 causes deletion of the mediaitem 810L. In some embodiments, the electronic performs the first actionwhile the user input contact (e.g., 824) is still detected (e.g.,regardless of length of the directional swipe, but while the contact andthe movement is detected). For example, while user input 824 is movingto the right affordance 826 is displayed, and in response to lift off ata distance above the threshold length the media item 810L is deleted(e.g., without requiring selection of affordance 826). In someembodiments, in response to the user input contact exceeding thethreshold length while contact is still detected, the electronic device(e.g., 600) displays an indication that the threshold length has beenexceeded (e.g., moves affordance 826, ceases display affordance 826,changes a color of affordance 826, replaces affordance 826). In someembodiments, in response to the swipe length movement falling below thethreshold length while contact is still detected (e.g., input has beendragged back toward the original touch down location), the electronicdevice (e.g., 600) displays an indication that the threshold length isno longer exceeded (e.g., moves affordance 826, begins displayingaffordance 826, changes a color of affordance 826).

As another example of an action performed in response to a directionalswipe gesture, in response to receiving user input 826 at FIG. 8J whichis a directional swipe gesture to the left, electronic device 600 causesthe media item 810L associated with representation 810I to be marked asa favorite media item (e.g., by updating metadata in the media library).As another example, in response to receiving user input 826, electronicdevice can display a favorite affordance 828 that, when selected, causeselectronic device to cause the media item 810L associated withrepresentation 810I to be marked as a favorite media item the medialibrary. Similar to as described above with respect to user input 824and affordance 826 of FIG. 8K, a length of user input 826 can determinewhether a first action (e.g., display affordance 828 without marking asa favorite) is performed or a second action is performed (e.g., markingas a favorite) based on a threshold length.

In some embodiments, electronic device (e.g., 600) performs an action,of two or more actions, in response to a directional swipe, whereinwhich action (of the two or more actions) is performed depends on thedirection of the directional swipe. For example, electronic device 600can perform the one or more actions associated with deleting the mediaitem 810L represented by representation 810 in response to user input824 (e.g., a swipe to the right on representation 810I), and perform theone or more actions associated with marking the media item 810Lrepresented by representation 810I as a favorite in response to userinput 826 (e.g., a swipe to the left on representation 810I).

FIGS. 8M-8N illustrate an exemplary technique for entering a one-up viewfrom an all photos view. In this example, all photos view 810 in FIG. 8Mis in the same state as shown in FIG. 8I (e.g., prior to electronicdevice 600 receiving user input 822). In some embodiments, in responseto receiving user input (e.g., 830 in FIG. 8M) associated with alocation of a displayed representation (e.g., 810K) of a media item(e.g., 642D), the electronic device (e.g., 600) displays a one-up view(e.g., 652) of the media item (e.g., 642D). For example, in FIG. 8M,electronic device 600 receives user input 830 which is a tap at alocation associated with representation 810K of media item 642D and, inresponse to receiving user input 830 displays one-up view 652 as shownin FIG. 8N. As shown in FIG. 8N, media item 642D is displayed in area652A in an enlarged size. At FIG. 8N, electronic device 600 receivesuser input 832 which is a directional swipe gesture in an upwarddirection.

FIG. 8O illustrates an exemplary one-up view that includes exemplaryregions for viewing and modifying information associated with a mediaitem. For example, one-up view 652 in FIG. 8O includes a plurality ofregions 652D-652G for viewing and/or editing information associated withmedia item 642D. In some embodiments, one or more regions for viewingand modifying information associated with a media item are displayed inresponse to receiving user input associated with a displayedrepresentation of a media item (e.g., displayed in a one-up view). Forexample, electronic device 600 displays one-up view 652 as shown in FIG.8O in response to receiving user input 832 in FIG. 8N.

In some embodiments, a caption region (e.g., 652D) includes display ofone or more captions associated with the media item. For example,caption region 652D includes a heading “CAPTION”) and caption text(“JANE IN WATERFALL PARK”) associated with the media item 642D (e.g.,saved with the media item in the media library). In some embodiments,selection of a location associated with the caption region (e.g., withinit) causes the electronic device (e.g., 600) to display an interface forediting (e.g., adding, modifying, and/or deleting) a caption associatedwith the media item. For example, in response to user input selection ofthe heading “CAPTION” in region 652D, or the text “JANE IN WATERFALLPARK”, electronic device 600 can display a text entry interface (e.g., atext entry marker and a keyboard) for editing the caption text. In someembodiments, the caption region includes an affordance that, whenselected, causes display of the text entry interface for editing thecaption text.

In some embodiments, a tag region (e.g., 652E) includes display of oneor more tags (e.g., keywords, hashtags) associated with the media item.For example, tag region 652E includes a heading “TAGGING”) and tags(#WATERFALL, #PARK, and #SUNNY) associated with the media item 642D(e.g., saved with the media item in the media library). In someembodiments, selection of a location associated with the tag region(e.g., within it) causes the electronic device (e.g., 600) to display aninterface for editing (e.g., adding, modifying, and/or deleting) a tagassociated with the media item. For example, in response to user inputselection of the heading “TAGGING” in region 652E, electronic device 600can display a text entry interface (e.g., a text entry marker and akeyboard) for editing the caption text. In some embodiments, the taggingregion includes an affordance that, when selected, causes display of thetext entry interface for editing a tag. In some embodiments, in responseto user input selection of a tag in a tag region, the electronic devicedisplays representations of one or more media items that are associatedwith the selected tag. For example, in response to selection of the tag“#PARK” in tag region 652E, electronic device 600 can display a view(e.g., similar to a days view, similar to an all photos view, or inanother presentation) of representations of media items that alsoinclude the tag “#PARK”.

As shown in FIG. 8O, one-up view 652 also includes people region 652F,which includes indicators for one or more individuals depicted in themedia item 642D in area 652A. In this example, people region 652Fincludes person indicator 652H identifying the woman in the phots asJane. In some embodiments, in response to user input selection of aperson indicator, the electronic device displays representations of oneor more media items that depict the individual associated with theselected person indicator. For example, in response to selection of theperson indicator 652H associated with Jane in people region 652F,electronic device 600 can display a view (e.g., similar to a days view,similar to an all photos view, or in another presentation) ofrepresentations of media items that also include Jane.

As shown in FIG. 8O, one-up view 652 also includes places region 652G,which includes a map and indicator for a geographic location associatedwith the media item 642D in area 652A (e.g., where the media item wastaken). In this example, places region 652G includes map 652I thatincludes an indicator of the location that media item 642D was captured(e.g., as determined based on geographic location information inmetadata associated with the media item in the media library). In someembodiments, in response to user input selection of the map, theelectronic device displays a larger representation of the map and/or oneor more media items (or indicators thereof) from one or more similargeographic locations.

In some embodiments, one-up view 652 is scrollable (e.g., vertically) todisplay one or more regions. For example, an upward directional swipe atone-up view 652 in FIG. 8O (e.g., swipe up on region 652E) can displayone or more regions or reveal more of a partially displayed region. Forexample, in response to an upward swipe, electronic device 600 canscroll the regions upward and display more of the partially-displayedmap 652I in places region 652G.

FIGS. 8P-8Q illustrate changing representations of media items in a viewfrom having uniform aspect ratios to having the actual respective aspectratios of the represented media items.

FIG. 8P illustrates exemplary all photos view 810 that hasrepresentations of media items arranged in a multi-column multi-rowarray and having uniform aspect ratios (e.g., each representation hasthe same width and/or height). In this example, each representationshown (e.g., 810I and 810K) in FIG. 8P has the same width and height. Inthis example, all photos view 810 is displayed in a landscape view(e.g., in response to detecting rotation of the device to besubstantially horizontal). In some embodiments, other views (e.g., 608,614, 626, 640) can be displayed in a landscape view. In someembodiments, a view (e.g., 810) includes an affordance (e.g., 810M) forcausing display of representations in the actual aspect ratios of theirunderlying media items. For example, in FIG. 8P, all photos view 810includes full frame affordance 810M. In some embodiments, the affordance(e.g., 810M) for causing display of representations in the actual aspectratios of their underlying media items is displayed in accordance withone or more conditions being met. In some embodiments, the conditionsinclude one or more of: that the representations are currently beingdisplayed having uniform aspect ratios, that the electronic device(e.g., 600) is currently in a specific orientation (e.g., in ahorizontal landscape mode), that the electronic device (e.g., 600) is aparticular type of electronic device (e.g., the affordance is displayedon some devices but not others), and that the electronic device (e.g.,600) includes a display that meets display dimension criteria (e.g., theaffordance is displayed on a device with a large display, but not on adevice with a small display). For example, affordance 810M is displayedin response to electronic device 600 being placed in landscape mode(e.g., turned horizontally, as detected by one or more accelerometers).

FIG. 8Q illustrates exemplary all photos view 810 that hasrepresentations of media items displayed in the actual aspect ratios oftheir underlying media items (e.g., each representation has an aspectratio that is not necessarily the same as the other representations). Inthis example, electronic device 600 displays all photos view 810 in FIG.8Q in response to receiving user input 854 representing selection offull frame affordance 810M. As shown, the uniform aspect ratiorepresentations of FIG. 8P have transitioned to be replaced withrepresentations of varying aspect ratios, which represent the actualaspect ratios of the underlying media item of each respectiverepresentation. For example, representation 810K in FIG. 8Q has ashorter width than representation 810K in FIG. 8P, since the media itemwas taken in a portrait style (e.g., aspect ratio having longer verticalheight dimension than horizontal width). In some embodiments,representations of media items displayed having the same actual aspectratios of the underlying media items do not include cropping of theunderlying media item. For example, representations of media itemsdisplayed in an array style (e.g., as a uniform grid) (e.g., as in FIG.8P) can be cropped versions of the underlying media items, butrepresentations of media items displayed in the full frame style (e.g.,as in FIG. 8Q) can be non-cropped versions of the underlying media items(e.g., which include the entirety of the media item, displayed at areduced size). Providing the ability to display actual aspect ratio ofmedia items while in an all photos view (e.g., at a customized level ofzoom with other representations) allows easy viewing and comparison ofmedia item characteristics without the need to select and view a mediaitem (e.g., in a one-up view).

In some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g., 600) displays anaffordance (e.g., 810N) for displaying representations in an arrangementhaving uniform aspect ratios. For example, in FIG. 8Q, electronic device600 has replaced full frame affordance 810M with grid affordance 810N inresponse to receiving user input 854. For further example, in responseto receiving selection of affordance 810N at FIG. 8Q, electronic device600 can return to the display of the all photos view 810 as shown inFIG. 8P, with representations having uniform aspect ratios.

FIG. 9 is a flow diagram illustrating a method for navigating acollection of media items using an electronic device in accordance withsome embodiments. Method 900 is performed at a device (e.g., 100, 300,500) with a display device and one or more input devices. Someoperations in method 900 are, optionally, combined, the orders of someoperations are, optionally, changed, and some operations are,optionally, omitted.

As described below, method 900 provides an intuitive way for navigatinga collection of media items. The method reduces the cognitive burden ona user for navigating a collection of media items, thereby creating amore efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated computingdevices, enabling a user to navigate a collection of media items fasterand more efficiently conserves power and increases the time betweenbattery charges.

The electronic device (e.g., 600) displays (e.g., 902), via the displaydevice, a first plurality of representations (e.g., 640F and 640G inFIG. 8A) of media items (e.g., 642C and 642D in FIG. 8A) in a first view(e.g., days view 640 in FIG. 8A) of a collection of media items (e.g.,the collection comprising media items 642C, 642D, 615E, 642A, and 642Bin FIGS. 8A-8B) (e.g., a media library; media items from a particulartime period, such as a day or an event (e.g., multiple days)), wherein aplurality of media items (e.g., 615E, 642A, and 642B in FIG. 8B) in thecollection of media items include content that can be played back overtime (e.g., videos or sequences of images).

While displaying the first plurality of representations (e.g., 640F and640G in FIG. 8A) of media items (e.g., 642C and 642D in FIG. 8A) in thefirst view (e.g., days view 640 in FIG. 8B), the electronic device(e.g., 600) receives (904), via the one or more input devices, a firstinput (e.g., 802) (e.g., a swipe to scroll) that corresponds to arequest to navigate (e.g., scroll) through a portion of the first viewof the collection of media items that includes representations (e.g.,640C, 640D, and 640E in FIG. 8B) of two or more media items (e.g., 615E,642A, and 642B) that include content that can be played back over time(e.g., videos or sequences of images).

In response to receiving the first input (e.g., 802), the electronicdevice (e.g., 600) navigates (906) through (e.g., scrolls, pans) thefirst view (e.g., 640) of the collection of media items (e.g., scrollsview 640 down as shown in FIGS. 8A-8B) and while navigating through thefirst view of the collection of media items automatically playingcontent from two or more (e.g., 615E and 642A as shown in FIGS. 8B-8C)of the media items in the plurality of media items (e.g., 615E, 642A,and 642B in FIG. 8B). For example, in response to input 802, electronicdevice 600 scrolls day view 640 from the state shown in FIG. 8A to thestate shown in FIG. 8B, then automatically plays media items 615E and642A as shown in FIGS. 8B to 8C (e.g., showing the representations ofboth media items change from being played back over time).

After navigating through the first view (e.g., 640) of the collection ofmedia items, the electronic device (e.g., 600) receives (908), via theone or more input devices, a second input (e.g., 804) (e.g., tap on anaffordance, such as an All Photos affordance) that corresponds to arequest to switch to a second view (e.g., all photos view 810) of thecollection of media items.

In response to receiving the second input (e.g., 804), the electronicdevice (e.g., 600) displays (910) a second plurality of representations(e.g., 810A, 810B, 810C in FIG. 8D) (e.g., can be representations of thesame media items as the first view, or of a different a set (e.g.,superset or subset) of media items from the collection in the firstview; can be different aspect ratios, sizes, ordering, etc.) of mediaitems (e.g., 615E, 642A, 642B in FIG. 8D) in the second view (e.g., allphotos view 810 in FIG. 8D) of the collection of media items.

While displaying the second plurality of representations (e.g., 810A,810B, 810C in FIG. 8D) of media items (e.g., 615E, 642A, 642B in FIG.8D) in the second view (e.g., all photos view 810 in FIG. 8D) of thecollection of media items, the electronic device (e.g., 600) receives(912), via the one or more input devices, a third input (e.g., 812)(e.g., a swipe to scroll) that that corresponds to a request to navigate(e.g., scroll) through a portion of the second view of the collection ofmedia items that includes representations of two or more media items(e.g., 615E and 642A) (e.g., the same two or more as in the first view,or a different two or more) that include content that can be played backover time (e.g., videos or sequences of images).

In response to receiving the third input (e.g., 812), the electronicdevice (e.g., 600) navigates (914) through (e.g., scrolls view 810 asshown in FIGS. 8D-8E) the second view of the collection of media itemswithout automatically playing content from media items in the pluralityof media items (e.g., does not automatically play back content frommedia items 615E and 642A). For example, no media items that can beplayed back over time are automatically played in an all photos view(e.g., 810).

Automatically playing back content in a first view of a collection ofmedia items, but not in a second view of a collection of media itemsprovides the user with different interface options for viewing mediaitems that result automatically depending on the selected view.Performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met withoutrequiring further user input enhances the operability of the device andmakes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping theuser to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes whenoperating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reducespower usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the userto use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, the plurality of media items in the collection(e.g., 615E, 642A, and 642B) (e.g., media items that include contentthat can be played back over time) includes at least one media item(e.g., 642B) that includes content that can be played back over timethat is not selected for automatic playback (e.g., media item 642B isnot played back in FIGS. 8B-8C), and wherein the at least one media itemis different from the two or more media items (e.g., 615E and 642A). Forexample, at least one video/sequence of images is not automaticallyplayed back (e.g., in days view 640). While navigating through thecollection of media items, the electronic device (e.g., 600) forgoesautomatically playing content from the at least one media item (e.g.,media item 642B is not played back in FIGS. 8B-8C) of the plurality ofmedia items that is not selected for automatic playback. In someembodiments, the electronic device (e.g., 600) prevents more than apredetermined number (e.g., one, two, or three) of the plurality ofmedia items from playing back at the same time. For example, in FIGS.8B-8C, only two media items 615E and 642A are played back at a time.

Forgoing automatically playing content from at least one media itemavoids distracting a user, as well as reduces power usage by playingback fewer media items concurrently. Performing an operation when a setof conditions has been met without requiring further user input enhancesthe operability of the device and makes the user-device interface moreefficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs andreducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device)which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life ofthe device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly andefficiently.

In some embodiments, the two or more media items (e.g., 615E and 642A)that are selected for automatic playback are displayed larger than theone or more media items not selected for automatic playback (e.g., 642B)(e.g., larger in at least one respective dimension) (e.g., automaticplaying content is larger in x-direction dimension, in y-directiondimension, or in both). For example, in days view 640 in FIGS. 8B-8C,media items 615E and 642A (selected for automatic playback) aredisplayed larger than 642B (not selected). In some embodiments, inaccordance with a determination that media items are selected forautomatic playback, displaying the media items selected for automaticplayback includes displaying the media items at a size greater than aplayback threshold size, and in accordance with a determination thatmedia items are not selected for automatic playback, displaying themedia items not selected for automatic playback includes displaying themedia items at a size less than a playback threshold size. For example,a playback threshold size can be a minimum size at which content to beplayed back is displayed (e.g., to avoid displaying video content at asize that is too small for a user to comfortably view it).

Displaying automatically played back content larger than content that isnot automatically played back allows the user to view the played contentmore easily without requiring further input. Performing an operationwhen a set of conditions has been met without requiring further userinput enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-deviceinterface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide properinputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with thedevice) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves batterylife of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quicklyand efficiently.

In some embodiments, the two or more media items (e.g., 615E and 642A)are selected for automatic playback based on the two or more media itemshaving a higher priority than other media items (e.g., 642B) that arenot selected for automatic playback. In some embodiments, a media itemsis prioritized (e.g., selected) for automatic playback based on one ormore of the following: whether the media item has been favorited byuser, image quality of the media item (e.g., high quality images havepriority), length of the media item (e.g., a sequence of images or avideo) (e.g., longer media items have priority), image composition ofthe media item (e.g., whether the media item depicts a well-composedscene, such as one in which subjects are centered and visible andexposure is correct, and the like), action that occurs during the mediaitem (e.g., movement within the image frame is prioritized over a videoin which the subject remains still), and persons depicted in the mediaitem (e.g., the user and/or their family get priority over otherspersons).

In some embodiments, displaying representations (e.g., 810A, 810B, 810Cin FIG. 8D) of media items (e.g., 615E, 642A, 642B in FIG. 8D) in thesecond view (e.g., 810 in FIG. 8D) of the collection of media itemscomprises: displaying, via the display device, the representations(e.g., 810A, 810B, 810C in FIG. 8D) of media items in the second viewarranged as a multi-row multi-column array (e.g., as a grid) having afirst spacing (e.g., horizontal dimensions of media items, verticaldimensions of media items). For example, exemplary second view 810 inFIG. 8D includes representations arranged in an exemplary multi-row(e.g., six rows are displayed, more can be accessed by navigating)multi-column (e.g., three columns) array. In some embodiments, a spacing(e.g., first spacing) of a multi-row multi-column array includeshorizontal dimensions between media items in the array and/or verticaldimensions between media items in the array. For example, an exemplaryfirst spacing can indicate that each media item occupies a 200 pixel(width) by 200 pixel (height) area (e.g., if the media item is displayedoccupying its entire area, then the media item representation hasdimensions of 200 pixels by 200 pixels). In some embodiments, a mediaitem can occupy less than the area created by the spacing dimensions. Insome embodiments, a spacing (e.g., first spacing) includes uniformhorizontal dimensions (e.g., of media items), uniform verticaldimensions (e.g., of media items), or both. For example, media items canbe horizontally spaced at a uniform increment of 200 pixels (e.g., theleft edge of one media item is 200 pixels from the left edge of the nextmedia item in the row), and media items can be vertically spaced at auniform increment of 200 pixels (e.g., the top edge of one media item is200 pixels from the top edge of the next media item in the row). In someembodiments, horizontal dimensions and vertical dimensions aredifferent. The electronic device (e.g., 600) receives, via the one ormore input devices, a fourth input (e.g., 814, 818) (e.g., de-pinch,pinch, tap on an affordance (e.g., 810E or 810F, +/− buttons; arrows)).In response to receiving the fourth input: in accordance with adetermination that the fourth input corresponds to a request to zoom in(e.g., is a de-pinch such as 818) (e.g., input on touch-sensitivesurface is a de-pinch, input is a selection of a zoom in affordance),the electronic device (e.g., 600) re-arranges the representations ofmedia items in the second view to have a second spacing (e.g., changesall photos view 810 from FIG. 8G to FIG. 8H), including: reducing one ormore of: a number of displayed rows of representations of media items,and a number of displayed columns of representations of media items(e.g., in FIG. 8H, the number of displayed rows (four) and columns (two)has changed from the number of rows (twenty) and columns (ten) in FIG.8G): and increasing sizes (e.g., height and/or width) of therepresentations of media items in the second view (e.g., in FIG. 8H, thesizes of the displayed representations have increased from FIG. 8G). Insome embodiments, the sizes of the representations of media items in thesecond view are uniform (e.g., each representation has the samedimensions). In some embodiments, the sizes of all representationsremain uniform in response to increasing and/or decreasing. In responseto receiving the fourth input: in accordance with a determination thatthe fourth input corresponds to a request to zoom out (e.g., pinchgesture such as 814) (e.g., input on touch-sensitive surface is a pinch,input is a selection of a zoom out affordance), the electronic device(e.g., 600) re-arranges the representations of media items in the secondview to have a third spacing (e.g., changes all photos view 810 fromFIG. 8E to FIG. 8F), including: increasing one or more of: the number ofdisplayed rows of representations of media items, and the number ofdisplayed columns of representations of media items (e.g., in FIG. 8F,the number of displayed rows (ten) and columns (six) has changed fromthe number of rows (six) and columns (three) in FIG. 8E); and reducingsizes (e.g., height and/or width) of the representations of media itemsin the second view (e.g., in FIG. 8F, the sizes of the displayedrepresentations have decreased from FIG. 8E).

In some embodiments, subsequent to receiving the fourth input (e.g.,814, 818), the electronic device (e.g., 600) receives, via the one ormore input devices, a fifth input (e.g., 816, 820) (e.g., de-pinch, tapon a zoom in affordance). In response to receiving the fifth input: inaccordance with a determination that the fifth input corresponds to arequest to zoom in (e.g., is input 820, a tap on zoom affordance 810F)(e.g., input is a de-pinch, input is a selection of a zoom inaffordance) while displaying the representations of media items in thesecond view having the second spacing (e.g., all photos view 810 asshown in FIG. 8H) (e.g., a second zoom in request), the electronicdevice (e.g., 600) re-arranges the representations of media items in thesecond view to have a fourth spacing (e.g., changes all photos view 810from FIG. 8H to FIG. 8I), including: reducing one or more of: the numberof displayed rows of representations of media items, and the number ofdisplayed columns of representations of media items (e.g., in FIG. 8I,the number of displayed rows (three) and columns (one) has changed fromthe number of rows (four) and columns (two) in FIG. 8H); and increasingsizes (e.g., height and/or width) of the representations of media itemsin the second view (e.g., in FIG. 8I, the sizes of the displayedrepresentations have increased from FIG. 8H). In response to receivingthe fifth input: in accordance with a determination that the fifth inputcorresponds to a request to zoom out (e.g., is input 816) (e.g., inputis a pinch, input is a selection of a zoom out affordance) whiledisplaying the representations of media items in the second view havingthe third spacing (e.g., all photos view 810 as shown in FIG. 8F) (e.g.,a second zoom out request), the electronic device (e.g., 600)re-arranges the representations of media items in the second view tohave a fifth spacing (e.g., changes all photos view 810 from FIG. 8F toFIG. 8G), including: increasing one or more of: the number of displayedrows of representations of media items, and the number of displayedcolumns of representations of media items (e.g., in FIG. 8G, the numberof displayed rows (twenty) and columns (ten) has changed from the numberof rows (ten) and columns (six) in FIG. 8F); and reducing sizes (e.g.,height and/or width) of the representations of media items in the secondview (e.g., in FIG. 8G, the sizes of the displayed representations havedecreased from FIG. 8F).

In some embodiments, re-arranging the representations of media items inthe second view (e.g., 810) to have the second spacing includesre-arranging the representations of media items in the second view intoa single-item array of representations of media items (e.g., as shown inFIG. 8I) (e.g., a column that is vertically scrollable, or a row that ishorizontally scrollable). While displaying the single-item array ofrepresentations of media items, the electronic device (e.g., 600)receives, via the one or more input devices, a sixth input (e.g., 822,824, 826) (e.g., vertical swipe, horizontal swipe) at a location of arepresentation (e.g., 810 in FIG. 8J) of a first media item (e.g., 810L)from the collection of media items. In response to receiving the sixthinput: in accordance with a determination that the sixth inputrepresents a swipe (e.g., is input 822, a downward swipe) gesture in afirst direction (e.g., vertically, up, down), the electronic device(e.g., 600) navigates (e.g., scrolls) through the collection of mediaitems to display a representation of a second media item from thecollection of media items (e.g., changes all photos view from FIG. 8I toFIG. 8J) (e.g., scrolls the single-item width array to reveal a newmedia item). In some embodiments, the single-item width array can bescrolled in multiple directions (e.g., up or down). In accordance with adetermination that the sixth input represents a swipe (e.g., is input824, 826; a horizontal swipe) gesture in a second direction (e.g.,horizontally, left, right) different from (e.g., perpendicular to orsubstantially perpendicular to) the first direction (e.g., down), theelectronic device (e.g., 600) performs an action (e.g., marks fordeletion; marks as a favorite) associated with the first media item. Insome embodiments, the electronic device (e.g., 600) forgoes navigatingthe collection in response to the swipe (e.g., 824, 826) in the seconddirection. In some embodiments, performing an action includes deleting(or marking for deletion) the corresponding media item. In someembodiments, performing an action includes marking a media item as afavorite media item (or something similar, such as a ‘liked’ or‘important’ or ‘starred’ media item). In some embodiments, performing anaction includes displaying an affordance (e.g., 826, 828) (e.g., adelete affordance, a favorite affordance) that when selected causesanother action to be performed (e.g., mark media item for deletion, markmedia item as a favorite). In some embodiments, a swipe gesture in thesecond direction (e.g., right) modifies a first stored property (e.g.,deletes a media item), and a swipe gesture in a third direction (e.g.,left) modifies a second stored property (e.g., marks the item as afavorite) (e.g., as shown in FIGS. 8J-8L). In some embodiments,representations of media items in the singe-item width array (e.g., asshown in FIG. 8I) are each displayed at a uniform size (e.g., samedimensions and aspect ratio, which can require cropping of image contentfrom the underlying the media items) (e.g., in FIG. 8I, therepresentations are rectangles of uniform size). In some embodiments,representations of media items in the singe-item width array are eachdisplayed at the respective aspect ratio of their corresponding mediaitem (e.g., each representation has the same aspect ratio as theunderlying media item, which can result in representations withdifferent aspect ratios being displayed in the single-item width array).For example, a media item that has dimensions of 200 pixels by 500pixels will be displayed at that aspect ratio (e.g., 200:500), and amedia item that has dimensions of 600 pixels by 400 pixels will bedisplayed at that aspect ratio (e.g., 600:400).

Re-arranging representations of media items into a single-item widtharray in response to a request to zoom in provides an intuitive way forthe user to enter such an arrangement easily and without requiringadditional controls or gestures. Providing additional control optionswithout cluttering the UI with additional displayed controls enhancesthe operability of the device and makes the user-device interface moreefficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs andreducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device)which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life ofthe device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly andefficiently.

Using a directional gesture to either navigate or modify a property of amedia item, depending on the direction, allows the user an intuitive wayto perform either action without requiring additional controls orgestures. Providing additional control options without cluttering the UIwith additional displayed controls enhances the operability of thedevice and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., byhelping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakeswhen operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reducespower usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the userto use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, navigating through the first view (e.g., 640) ofthe collection of media items comprises scrolling the collection ofmedia items in the first view (e.g., scrolling 640 from FIG. 8A to FIG.8B). In some embodiments, automatically playing content from two or moreof the media items (e.g., 615E and 642A as shown in FIGS. 8B-8C) in theplurality of media items while navigating through the collection ofmedia items comprises, while scrolling the collection of media items inthe first view: automatically playing content from a first media item(e.g., 615E) of the two or more media items (e.g., 615E and 642A asshown in FIGS. 8B-8C) based at least in part on a scroll position of thefirst media item in the first view (e.g., a media item begins playingupon reaching a predetermined position on the display) (e.g., media item615E begins playback upon reaching a predetermined position as allphotos view 640 is scrolled in response to input 802). In someembodiments, other factors affect whether a media item beginsautomatically playing, including whether a predetermined number of mediaitems are already automatically playing. For example, the device canautomatically playback no more than the predetermined number of mediaitems (e.g., two at a time), and thus any media item in excess of thepredetermined number would not begin playing back until at least one ofthe other media items ceases to be played back.

Automatically playing content based on a scroll position provides anintelligent interface that takes into account the likelihood that amedia item is at an appropriate location on a display. Performing anoperation when a set of conditions has been met without requiringfurther user input enhances the operability of the device and makes theuser-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user toprovide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes whenoperating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reducespower usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the userto use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, while scrolling the collection of media items inthe first view (e.g., scrolling 640 from FIG. 8A to FIG. 8B), and whileautomatically playing content from the first media item (e.g., 615E) ofthe two or more media items (e.g., 615E and 642A as shown in FIGS.8B-8C): the electronic device (e.g., 600) automatically plays contentfrom a second media item (e.g., 642A) of the two or more media items(e.g., 615E and 642A as shown in FIGS. 8B-8C) based at least in part ona scroll position of the second media item in the first view; and ceasesto automatically play content from the first media item (e.g., 615E) ofthe two or more media items while continuing to display a representationof the first media item of the two or more media items. In someembodiments, the first media item ceases automatically playing based atleast in part on a scroll position. For example, in response to thesecond media item (e.g., 642A) reaching a scroll position that causes itto automatically playback, or in response to the first media item (e.g.,615E) reaching a different scroll position associated with ceasingautomatic playback, the first media item ceases automatically playing.In some embodiments, the first media item ceases automatically playingin response to reaching a second predetermined scrolling position (e.g.,different than the scrolling position that caused it to beginautomatically playing) (e.g., begins playing upon appearing on thedisplay during navigation and ceases playing just before being scrolledoff the display as navigation continues).

In some embodiments, media items (e.g., 615E, 642A, 642B in FIG. 8C)that are displayed in the first view (e.g., 640) of the collection ofmedia items are selected so as to exclude one or more media items thatare displayed in the second view (e.g., 810) of the collection of mediaitems (e.g., by excluding media items that are similar to each other)(e.g., all photos view 810 includes media items that are not included indays view 640). For example, the second view (e.g., 810) can includerepresentations for every media item in the media library (e.g.,accessible by scrolling the second view), whereas the first view (e.g.,640) includes a subset of fewer than the media items included in thesecond view.

In some embodiments, the first plurality of representations (e.g., 640C,640D, 640E in FIG. 8C) of media items (e.g., 615E, 642A, 642B) in thefirst view (e.g., 640) include representations that are at least twodifferent sizes (e.g., aspect ratios and/or dimensions) (e.g., in FIG.8C, representations having different sizes are displayed), and thesecond plurality of representations (e.g., 810A, 810B, 810C in FIG. 8D)of media items (e.g., 615E, 642A, 642B) in the second view (e.g., 810)include representations that are each uniform in size (e.g., have thesame dimensions) (e.g., in FIG. 8D, representations that are each thesame size are displayed). For example, all displayed representations ofmedia items in the second plurality of representations of media items inthe second view are displayed at the same size.

In some embodiments, while displaying either the first view (e.g., 640)or the second view (e.g., 810): the electronic device (e.g., 600)receives, via the one or more input devices, a seventh input (e.g.,selection of media item 842D in 8A, 8H, or 8J) (e.g., 830) (e.g., a tap)that corresponds to selection of a representation (e.g., 810K in FIG.8M) of a media item (e.g., 642D). In response to receiving the seventhinput, the electronic device (e.g., 600) replaces display of, via thedisplay device, the first view or the second view with display of aone-up view (e.g., 652 as shown in FIG. 8N) of the selected media item(e.g., 642D).

In some embodiments, while displaying the one-up view (e.g., 652 in FIG.8N) of the selected media item (e.g., 642D), receiving, via the one ormore input devices, an eighth input (e.g., 832) (e.g., an upward swipe).In response to receiving the eighth input, and while continuing todisplay at least a portion of the selected media item (e.g., in area642D as shown in FIG. 8O): in accordance with a determination that theeighth input is a swipe gesture in a third direction (e.g., up),displaying, via the display device, one or more options (e.g., 652D,652E in FIG. 8O) (e.g., affordances, text entry fields) for enteringinformation (e.g., one or more captions, one or more tags) to associatewith the selected media item. In some embodiments, the electronic device(e.g., 600) receives entry of information (e.g., a caption, a tag) viathe one or more options (e.g., selection of the option and characterinput thereafter), and causes the entered information to be stored andassociated with the selected media item. In some embodiments, the one ormore options includes an affordance (e.g., 652D, 652E), a text entryfield, or other graphical element that can be selected and/or indicatethat information can be entered. In some embodiments, the informationincludes one or more of a caption for the selected media item, and a tag(e.g., a hashtag) for the selected media item. In some embodiments, theone or more options are displayed with additional fields (e.g., 652F,652G) that include data (e.g., metadata) about the selected media item,including one or more of: people (e.g., face and/or name) depicted inthe selected media item (e.g., as shown by 652H), an identifier of adevice that captured the media item (e.g., a camera model), a geographiclocation of the media item (e.g., where it was captured) (e.g., as shownby 652I), among other relevant information. In some embodiments, the oneor more options are displayed in a scrollable interface. For example,the interface 652 can be scrolled to reveal the one or more options (orthe data about the selected media item). In some embodiments, the eighthinput gesture is a tap on an affordance, which causes the device todisplay the one or more options in response (e.g., instead of swipe, oralternatively to swipe). In some embodiments, in response to an inputthat corresponds to selection of a tag associated with the selectedmedia item (e.g., selection of the tag “#PARK” in FIG. 8O), the devicedisplays one or more representations of other media items that are alsoassociated with the selected tag (e.g., tap a tag to view a smart albumfor that tag).

Using a directional gesture to access options for entering informationfor a displayed media item provides the user with an intuitive way toperform a relevant operation on a media item without requiringadditional controls or gestures. Providing additional control optionswithout cluttering the UI with additional displayed controls enhancesthe operability of the device and makes the user-device interface moreefficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs andreducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device)which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life ofthe device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly andefficiently.

In some embodiments, while displaying either the first view (e.g., 640)of the collection of media items or the second view (e.g., 644) of thecollection of media items, the electronic device (e.g., 600) displays,via the display device, an indication (e.g., 644) of a boundary betweena first set of media items (e.g., media items from a first day, or firstrange of dates) (e.g., media items from May 1-2 in FIG. 8A) of thecollection of media items and a second set of media items (e.g., mediaitems from a second day, or second range of dates) (e.g., media itemsfrom April 18-19 in FIG. 8A) of the collection of media items, whereinthe first set of media items is different from the second set of mediaitems (e.g., no overlap of included media items between the sets),wherein the first set of media items are related to each other based onsatisfying a first criteria (e.g., are each from the same day, range ofdates, and/or location) (e.g., each are from May 1-2, 2018 as shown inFIG. 8A), and wherein the second set of media items are related to eachother based on satisfying a second criteria (e.g., are each from thesame day, range of dates, and/or location) (e.g., each are from Apr.18-19, 2018 as shown in FIG. 8A) different from the first criteria. Forexample, the first set of media items does not satisfy the secondcriteria, and the second set of media items does not satisfy the firstcriteria (e.g., the sets are mutually exclusive). In some embodiments,the electronic device (e.g., 600) displays the indication of theboundary between the first set and the second set in response to ascroll of the currently displayed view (e.g., 644 is displayed on thefirst set in response to input 648 that causes scrolling as shown inFIGS. 6L-6M). In some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g., 600)ceases to display the indication of the boundary a predetermined amountof time after an event associated with the scrolling ends (e.g., afterthe input that caused the scrolling ceases to be detected by thedevice), or after the scrolling movement ceases). For example, anindication of the boundary between sets is displayed as a visual aid(e.g., to focus attention while scrolling through different logicalgroupings of media items) and fades away after some amount of time.

Displaying an indication of a boundary between different sets of mediaitems helps a user identify boundary between groups of objects andenables faster navigation by providing improved feedback. Providingimproved feedback enhances the operability of the device and makes theuser-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user toprovide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes whenoperating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reducespower usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the userto use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, displaying the indication (e.g., 644) of theboundary between the first set of media items (e.g., media items fromMay 1-2 in FIG. 8A) of the collection of media items and the second setof media items (e.g., media items from April 18-19 in FIG. 8A)comprises, concurrently displaying: at least a portion of the second setof media items with a dimmed appearance (e.g., as shown in FIG. 8A)while the second set of media items is not a currently viewed set ofmedia items (e.g., is not occupying the center of the display in FIG.8A); and at least a portion of the first set of media items without adimmed appearance (e.g., as shown in FIG. 8A) while the first set ofmedia items is a currently viewed set of media items (e.g., is occupyingthe center of the display in FIG. 8A). In some embodiments, a currentlyviewed set of media items is a set of media items that occupy apredetermined location (e.g., center of the display) in the currentview. For example, when an object (e.g., a media item from the set)associated with the first set of media items occupies a center position(e.g., vertically where the view is scrollable vertically) of thedisplay, the first set is the currently viewed set of media items. Forexample, media items from May 1-2 in FIG. 8A occupy the center of thedisplay, and thus are a currently viewed set of media items. In someembodiments, one or more other sets can be at least partially displayedwhile a current set is partially displayed, where the other sets aredisplayed with a dimmed appearance (e.g., to emphasize focus on thecurrently viewed set, while still allowing adjacent sets to be visible).For example, the set of media items from April 18-19 in FIG. 8A ispartially displayed concurrently with the currently viewed set from May1-2, but with a dimmed appearance (overlaid by indicator 644). In someembodiments, there are more than one currently viewed set of media itemsat a time.

In some embodiments, displaying media items having a dimmed appearanceincludes displaying the media items having an overlay (e.g., a color, amask) having a non-zero level of opacity (e.g., such that it obscures atleast some of the visual information of the media items). For example,indication 644 can be an overlay of a gray color with a slight opacity.In some embodiments, the dimmed appearance has a dynamic opacity that isprogressive and based on a position (e.g., while navigating throughrepresentations) associated with the media items being displayed withthe dimmed appearance. In some embodiments, the opacity increases as theposition associated with the media items being displayed with the dimmedappearance (e.g., a leading edge or boundary) moves (e.g., scrolls) inresponse to user input (e.g., 648, 802, 812, 822). For example, thesecond set of media items can be displayed with a dimmed appearance thatincreases in opacity (e.g., increasing the level of obscuring of theunderlying media item) as a boundary between the second set of mediaitems and the first set of media items moves (e.g., while scrolling)past a predetermined location (e.g., not displayed) on the display,toward a near edge of the display (e.g., closest display edgeperpendicular to the movement direction), and/or further away from beingthe currently viewed set of media items (e.g., away from the center ofthe display). As another example, the second set of media items can bedisplayed with a dimmed appearance that decreases in opacity (e.g.,decreasing the level of obscuring of the underlying media item) as aboundary between the second set of media items and the first set ofmedia items moves (e.g., while scrolling) past a predetermined location(e.g., not displayed) on the display, away from the near edge of thedisplay, and/or toward being the currently viewed set of media items(e.g., toward the center of the display). In these examples, the dimmedappearance moves with the media items (e.g., is not a static region ofdimming).

Displaying non-currently viewed media items with a dimmed appearanceprovides the user improved feedback regarding the currently viewed mediaitems (e.g., boundary information) and improved feedback regarding thenon-currently viewed media items (e.g., are still partially visible).Providing improved feedback enhances the operability of the device andmakes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping theuser to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes whenoperating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reducespower usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the userto use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, displaying the indication (e.g., 644) of theboundary between the first set of media items (e.g., media items fromMay 1-2 in FIG. 8A) of the collection of media items and the second setof media items (e.g., media items from April 18-19 in FIG. 8A) comprisesdisplaying metadata (e.g., for the first set and/or for the second set)(e.g., 646A, 646B in FIG. 8A). In some embodiments, the electronicdevice (e.g., 600) displays metadata for the second set (e.g., 646A),when the second set is not a currently viewed set of media items (e.g.,as shown in FIG. 8A), in the area with the dimmed appearance (e.g., areawith indication 644) (e.g., overlaid on the media items of the secondset).

In some embodiments, while displaying a third set of representations(e.g., the representations in FIG. 8P, including representations 810Iand 810K) of media items from the collection of media items (e.g., inview 810) (e.g., in the second view) (e.g., in an all photos view)(e.g., in the first view) (e.g., in view 640) (e.g., in a days view),the electronic device (e.g., 600) receives, via the one or more inputdevices, a ninth input (e.g., 854) (e.g., a tap on an affordance),wherein the third set of representations are each displayed having auniform aspect ratio (e.g., as shown in FIG. 8P, each representation isdisplayed having the same aspect ratio) (e.g., which can requirecropping the underlying media item), and wherein each media itemcorresponding to the third set of representations is associated with anactual aspect ratio. In response to receiving the ninth input, theelectronic device (e.g., 600) transitions the representations of thethird set of representations from the uniform aspect ratio to the actualaspect ratio of their corresponding media item (e.g., as shown in FIG.8Q, each representation is now displayed having the aspect ratio of itscorresponding media item), and wherein at least two representations ofthe second set of representations have different actual aspect ratios(e.g., the representations in FIG. 8Q are displayed having at least twodifferent aspect ratios).

Transitioning representations from a uniform aspect ratio to actualaspect ratios provides the user the ability to see the actual aspectratios of media without requiring an excessive number of inputs.Reducing the number of inputs needed to perform an operation enhancesthe operability of the device and makes the user-device interface moreefficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs andreducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device)which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life ofthe device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly andefficiently.

Note that details of the processes described above with respect tomethod 900 (e.g., FIG. 9) are also applicable in an analogous manner tothe methods described above. For example, method 900 optionally includesone or more of the characteristics of the various methods describedabove with reference to method 700. For brevity, these details are notrepeated below.

FIGS. 10A-10O illustrate exemplary devices and user interfaces fornavigating a collection of media items, in accordance with someembodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustratethe processes described below, including the processes in FIG. 11.

FIG. 10A depicts electronic device 600, which is a smartphone withdisplay 602.

Display 602 includes a touch-sensitive surface on which electronicdevice 600 can detect user gestures (e.g., tap, swipe, drag). In someembodiments, electronic device 600 includes one or more features ofelectronic device 100, 300, or 500.

At FIG. 10A, electronic device 600 displays user interface 1000 fornavigating a collection of media items (e.g., photos, videos). Userinterface 1000 includes photos (e.g., 1002A-1002C) being displayed inall photos view 810 with a multi-column layout. Additionally, the photos(e.g., 1002A-1002C) are all being displayed at the same initial sizewith the same initial aspect ratio (e.g., 1:1).

It is noted that the all photos view 810 is described above with respectto FIG. 8D. For example, as discussed above, all photos view 810includes a non-curated set of media items (e.g., photos, videos) from amedia library or representations thereof.

Returning to FIG. 10A, user interface 1000 also includes title 1003(e.g., corresponding to metadata 646A), which provides an indication ofthe time period to which the displayed photos correspond. Next to title1003, user interface 1000 includes zoom affordance 1004, which, whenselected, triggers zooming in or zooming out on the displayed photosdepending on whether the “+” or “−” button is activated.

As shown in FIG. 10A, a user performs a pinch out gesture to expandphoto 1002A. As a result, electronic device 600 detects input 1006 withtwo contacts, where the distance between the two contacts is increasing.

At FIG. 10B, in response to detecting input 1006, electronic device 600increases the size of the displayed photos, where the increase in sizecorresponds to the change in distance between the two contacts of input1006. In particular, photos 1002A-1002C have increased in size from theinitial size in FIG. 10A to a first intermediate size, while maintainingthe same aspect ratio (e.g., 1:1). The increase in size of a photooccurs via a change in level of magnification of the photo (e.g., thedevice zooms in on the photo). Moreover, in response to detecting input1006, some of the photos displayed in FIG. 10A (e.g., the top row ofphotos) cease to be displayed in user interface 1000.

In some embodiments, in response to detecting input 1006, electronicdevice 600 maintains the order (e.g., sequence) of the displayed photos.Thus, in some embodiments, electronic device 600 replaces photo 1002Bwith photo 1002A during the transition from FIGS. 10A-10F to maintainthe order. In some embodiments, electronic device 600 uses crossfadingto transition from photo 1002B to photo 1002C. Techniques forcrossfading are further described below with respect to FIGS. 12A-12I.

Returning to FIG. 10B, the user continues the pinch out gesture tofurther expand photo 1002A. As a result, electronic device 600 continuesto detect input 1006 with two contacts, where the distance between thetwo contacts is increasing.

At FIG. 10C, in response to continued detection of input 1006,electronic device 600 continues to increase the size of the displayedphotos based on the change in distance between the two contacts of input1006. Specifically, photos 1002A-1002C have increased in size from thefirst intermediate size in FIG. 10B to a second intermediate size, whilemaintaining the same aspect ratio (e.g., 1:1).

As shown in FIG. 10C, the user continues the pinch out gesture tofurther expand photo 1002A. As a result, electronic device 600 continuesto detect input 1006 with two contacts, where the distance between thetwo contacts is increasing.

At FIG. 10D, in response to continued detection of input 1006,electronic device 600 continues to further increase the size of thedisplayed photos based on the change in distance between the twocontacts of input 1006. In particular, photos 1002A-1002B have increasedin size from the second intermediate size in FIG. 10C to a thirdintermediate size, while maintaining the same aspect ratio (e.g., 1:1).Moreover, photo 1002C has ceased to be displayed in user interface 1000.At the third intermediate size, photo 1002A occupies the full width ofdisplay 602 (e.g., no content is displayed to the left or right of photo1002A).

As depicted in FIG. 10D, the user continues the pinch out gesture tofurther expand photo 1002A. As a result, electronic device 600 continuesto detect input 1006 with two contacts, where the distance between thetwo contacts is increasing.

At FIG. 10E, in response to continued detection of input 1006,electronic device 600 changes the aspect ratio and increases the size ofphoto 1002A based on the change in distance between the two contacts ofinput 1006. In particular, electronic device 600 changes the aspectratio of photo 1002A from an initial aspect ratio (e.g., 1:1) to anintermediate aspect ratio (e.g., 3:4). Further, as illustrated in FIG.10E, electronic device 600 changes the height of photo 1002A byinitially displaying top and bottom portions of photo 1002A that werenot previously being displayed (e.g., in FIGS. 10A-10D). While changingthe height of photo 1002A, electronic device 600 maintains the width ofphoto 1002A. Due to the change in height, photo 1002A has increased insize from the third intermediate size in FIG. 10D to a fourthintermediate size. The size of the photo has increased, but the level ofmagnification of the photo has not changed (e.g., the device does notzoom in on the photo).

In some embodiments, electronic device 600 changes the aspect ratio of aphoto in response to detecting input 1006 and in accordance with adetermination that the photo has reached a threshold size. For example,once the photo has reached a size that occupies the full width ofdisplay 602, electronic device 600 changes the aspect ratio. In someembodiments, electronic device 600 does not change the aspect ratio ifthe photo has not yet reached the threshold size.

Returning to FIG. 10E, the user continues the pinch out gesture tofurther expand photo 1002A. As a result, electronic device 600 continuesto detect input 1006 with two contacts, where the distance between thetwo contacts is increasing.

At FIG. 10F, in response to continued detection of input 1006,electronic device 600 continues changing the aspect ratio and increasingthe size of photo 1002A based on the change in distance between the twocontacts of input 1006. Specifically, electronic device 600 changes theaspect ratio of photo 1002A from the intermediate aspect ratio (e.g.,3:4) to a final aspect ratio (e.g., 9:16). In some embodiments, thefinal aspect ratio is the native (e.g., original) aspect ratio of thephoto (e.g., 1002A). Additionally, electronic device 600 changes theheight of photo 1002A by initially displaying top and bottom portions ofphoto 1002A that were not previously being displayed (e.g., in FIGS.10A-10E). While changing the height of photo 1002A, electronic device600 maintains the width of photo 1002A. Due to the change in height,photo 1002A has increased in size from the fourth intermediate size inFIG. 10E to a final size. Similar to FIG. 10E, the size of the photo hasincreased, but the level of magnification of the photo has not changed(e.g., the device does not zoom in on the photo). In some embodiments,at the final size, photo 1002A is being fully displayed (e.g., noportions fail to be displayed).

As a result of detecting input 1006, electronic device 600 hastransitioned from the multi-column layout in FIG. 10A to thesingle-column layout in FIG. 10F. As discussed above, in themulti-column layout in FIG. 10A, electronic device 600 displays thephotos at the same aspect ratio. In contrast, in the single-columnlayout, electronic device 600 displays the photos at their respectivenative aspect ratios, which can result in photos being concurrentlydisplayed at different aspect ratios.

FIGS. 10F-IOK illustrate that the operations shown in FIGS. 10A-IOF canbe reversed via a pinch in gesture. As shown in FIG. 10F, after photo1002A has been fully displayed, the user performs a pinch in gesture toreturn photo 1002A to the state shown in FIG. 10A. As a result,electronic device 600 detects input 1008 with two contacts, where thedistance between the two contacts is decreasing.

At FIG. 10G, in response to detecting input 1008, electronic device 600changes the aspect ratio and decreases the size of photo 1002A. Inparticular, electronic device 600 changes the aspect ratio of photo1002A from the final aspect ratio to the intermediate aspect ratio, andcrops the photo (e.g., reduces the height of the photo while maintainingthe width of the photo, ceases to display top and bottom portions ofphoto 1002A).

Photo 1002A is in a portrait format (aspect ratio). In some embodiments,photo 1002A is in a landscape format (aspect ratio). In someembodiments, if photo 1002A is in a landscape format, electronic device600 crops the photo in response to detecting input 1008 by reducing thewidth of the photo while maintaining the height of the photo.

At FIG. 1H, in response to continued detection of input 1006, electronicdevice 600 changes the aspect ratio of photo 1002A from the intermediateaspect ratio to the initial aspect ratio, and further crops the photo(e.g., reduces the height of the photo while maintaining the width ofthe photo, ceases to display top and bottom portions of photo 1002A).

At FIGS. 101, in response to continued detection of input 1006,electronic device 600 reduces the size of the displayed photos (e.g.,1002A-1002B) while maintaining the aspect ratio of the displayed photos.Electronic device 600 reduces the size by changing the level ofmagnification of the displayed photos (e.g., the device zooms out on thephotos).

At FIGS. 10J-10K, in response to continued detection of input 1006,electronic device 600 reduces the size of the displayed photos (e.g.,1002A-1002C) while maintaining the aspect ratio of the displayed photos.Further, electronic device 600 initially displays at least a portion ofa photo (e.g., 1002C) that was not previously displayed.

As shown in FIG. 10K, after photo 1002A has been returned to the stateshown in FIG. 10A, the user performs a pinch in gesture to furtherreduce the size of the displayed photos (e.g., 1002A). As a result,electronic device 600 detects input 1010 with two contacts, where thedistance between the two contacts is decreasing.

At FIG. 10L, in response to detecting input 1010, electronic device 600changes the level of magnification of the displayed photos, butmaintains the same aspect ratio. With the reduced size of the photos,electronic device 600 displays more photos in a six-column layout.Besides the number of columns, the six-column layout differs from thesingle-column layout (e.g., in FIG. 10F) and the three-column layout(e.g., in FIG. 10A) in another way. In particular, layouts with a numberof columns that does not exceed a particular column threshold (e.g., 4,6, 8) have displayed boundary lines (e.g., 1012A-1012B in FIG. 10K)between photos. Thus, the user can see the boundary lines between thephotos. It is noted that layouts with a number of columns that does notexceed the particular column threshold can be referred to as a boundaryline or keyline layout.

In contrast, layouts with a number of columns that exceeds theparticular threshold do not include displayed boundary lines. Forexample, in FIG. 10L, boundary lines (e.g., 1012C-1012D) have beenincluded for ease of explanation, but electronic device 600 does notactually display boundary lines between the photos. Layouts with anumber of columns that exceeds the particular column threshold can bereferred to as a non-boundary line or a non-keyline layout.

Returning to the non-boundary line layout in FIG. 10L, the user rotateselectronic device 600 to view the photos while the device is in alandscape orientation. As a result, electronic device 600 detects achange in orientation of the device.

At FIG. 10M, in response to detecting the change in orientation of thedevice, electronic device 600 displays user interface 1000 in alandscape orientation with the photos being displayed in a non-boundaryline layout. As discussed above, the boundary lines between photos inFIG. 10M are displayed for ease of explanation and are not actuallydisplayed by electronic device 600.

While the photos are being displayed in a non-boundary line layout, auser is unable to perform certain operations. For example, as discussedbelow with respect to the boundary line layout in FIGS. 10N-10O, a usercan perform a tap gesture on a full frame affordance (e.g., 810M) totransition the displayed photos from an initial aspect ratio (e.g., 1:1)to their respective native aspect ratios. In contrast, returning to FIG.10M, electronic device 600 does not display the full frame affordance ina non-boundary line layout. Accordingly, in a non-boundary line layout,a user is unable to directly transition the displayed photos to theirrespective native aspect ratios.

In some embodiments, another operation that is unavailable in anon-boundary line layout is expanding a photo to full size in responseto a tap gesture. For example, in FIG. 10A, photo 1002A is beingdisplayed in a boundary line layout. In some embodiments, if electronicdevice 600 detects an input (e.g., tap gesture) at photo 1002A in aboundary line layout, electronic device 600 displays photo 1002A at fullsize (e.g., ceases display of the other photos (e.g., 1002B-1002C)). Incontrast, if electronic device 600 detects an input (e.g., tap gesture)at photo 1002A in a non-boundary line layout, electronic device 600forgoes displaying photo 1002A at the full size.

Returning to FIG. 10M, the user performs a pinch out gesture to expandthe size of displayed photos. As a result, electronic device 600 detectsinput 1014 with two contacts, where the distance between the twocontacts is increasing.

At FIG. 10N, in response to detecting input 1014, electronic device 600expands the size of displayed photos in user interface 1000. Thedisplayed photos are all displayed at the same aspect ratio (e.g., 1:1)in a boundary line layout. As a result, user interface 1000 now includesfull frame affordance 810M, which, when selected, causes the displayedphotos to transition from an initial aspect ratio (e.g., 1:1) to theirrespective native (e.g., original) aspect ratios.

In some embodiments, user interface 1000 includes full frame affordance810M when the photos are being displayed in a boundary line layout,regardless of whether the user interface is in a portrait or landscapeorientation.

Returning to FIG. 10N, the user performs a tap gesture to transition thephotos to their respective native aspect ratios. As a result, electronicdevice 600 detects input 1016 at full frame affordance 810M.

At FIG. 10O, in response to detecting input 1016, electronic device 600transitions the displayed photos to their respective native aspectratios. For example, photo 1002C transitions from an initial aspectratio (e.g., 1:1) to a native aspect ratio (e.g., 4:3). As anotherexample, photo 1002A transitions from an initial aspect ratio (e.g.,1:1) to a native aspect ratio (e.g., 9:16). Accordingly, user interface1000 in FIG. 10O includes photos with different aspect ratios. Incontrast, as discussed above, FIG. 10N includes photos with all the sameaspect ratio.

FIG. 11 is a flow diagram illustrating a method for navigating acollection of media items using an electronic device in accordance withsome embodiments. Method 1100 is performed at a device (e.g., 100, 300,500, 600, 1200) with a display device. Some operations in method 1100are, optionally, combined, the orders of some operations are,optionally, changed, and some operations are, optionally, omitted.

As described below, method 1100 provides an intuitive way for navigatinga collection of media items. The method reduces the cognitive burden ona user for navigating a collection of media items, thereby creating amore efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated computingdevices, enabling a user to navigate a collection of media items fasterand more efficiently conserves power and increases the time betweenbattery charges.

The electronic device (e.g., 600) displays (1102), via the displaydevice (e.g., 602), a plurality of content items (e.g., 1002A-1002C)(e.g., photo, video, or representations thereof) in a first layout(e.g., 810 in FIG. 10A) (e.g., view, multi-column view, multi-row view)that includes a plurality of rows and a plurality of columns.

As part of displaying the plurality of content items in the first layout(e.g., 810 in FIG. 10A) that includes the plurality of rows and theplurality of columns, the electronic device displays (1104) a firstcontent item (e.g., 1002A) of the plurality of content items at a firstaspect ratio and a first size. In some embodiments, displaying the firstcontent item (and optionally, second/third content items) at the firstaspect ratio causes a portion of the respective content item to not bedisplayed. In some embodiments, aspect ratio refers to the ratio ofwidth to height of the content item.

As part of displaying the plurality of content items (e.g., 1002A-1002C)in the first layout (e.g., 810 in FIG. 10A) that includes the pluralityof rows and the plurality of columns, the electronic device displays(1106) a second content item (e.g., 1002B) of the plurality of contentitems.

As part of displaying the plurality of content items in the first layout(e.g., 810 in FIG. 10A) that includes the plurality of rows and theplurality of columns, the electronic device displays (1108) a thirdcontent item (e.g., 1002C) of the plurality of content items.

While displaying, via the display device (e.g., 602), the plurality ofcontent items in the first layout (e.g., 810 in FIG. 10A) that includesthe plurality of rows and the plurality of columns, the electronicdevice detects (1110) a user input (e.g., 1006) that includes a gesture(e.g., with movement, a pinch gesture). The user input corresponds to arequest to change a size of the first content item (e.g., user gesture(e.g., double-tap and drag gesture, pinch gesture (e.g., detecting twocontacts on the display device where the distance between the twocontacts increases or decreases)), voice input). In some embodiments,the user input is detected at a location corresponding to (e.g., at/on)the plurality of content items.

In response to detecting the user input (e.g., 1006), the electronicdevice gradually changes (1112), as the gesture progresses, the size ofthe first content item (e.g., 1002A) from the first size to a secondsize that is different from the first size while concurrently graduallychanging, as the gesture progresses, an aspect ratio of the firstcontent item from the first aspect ratio to a second aspect ratio thatis different from the first aspect ratio. In some embodiments,displaying the first content item at the second aspect ratio causes allof the first content item to be displayed. Gradually changing the sizeand aspect ratio of the content item in response to the user inputprovides the user with feedback that the two images (at the first size,at the second size) are the same image, but resized. Providing improvedvisual feedback to the user enhances the operability of the device andmakes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping theuser to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes whenoperating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reducespower usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the userto use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, as part of gradually changing the size of the firstcontent item (e.g., 1002A) from the first size to the second size, theelectronic device (e.g., 600) gradually changes the size of the firstcontent item from the first size to the second size in conjunction withmovement of the gesture (e.g., 1006) (e.g., the size changes over timein conjunction with movement of the gesture over time). In someembodiments, as part of gradually changing the aspect ratio of the firstcontent item from the first aspect ratio to the second aspect ratio, theelectronic device gradually changes the aspect ratio of the firstcontent item from the first aspect ratio to the second aspect ratio inconjunction with movement of the gesture (e.g., the aspect ratio changesover time in conjunction with movement of the gesture over time). Insome embodiments, the faster the movement of the gesture, the faster thechange in size and aspect ratio of the first content item, and theslower the movement of the gesture, the slower the change in size andaspect ratio of the first content item. Gradually changing the size andaspect ratio of the content item in conjunction with the user inputprovides the user with feedback that it is the input that is causing thechanges to happen. Providing improved visual feedback to the userenhances the operability of the device and makes the user-deviceinterface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide properinputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with thedevice) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves batterylife of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quicklyand efficiently.

In some embodiments, as part of gradually changing the aspect ratio ofthe first content item from the first aspect ratio to the second aspectratio, the electronic device gradually changes the aspect ratio of thefirst content item (e.g., 1002A) from the first aspect ratio to anintermediate aspect ratio while maintaining a magnification of the firstcontent item (e.g., the first content item is cropped to change theaspect ratio without changing the magnification of the non-croppedportions; additional portions of the first content item are revealed(e.g., un-cropped) without changing the magnification of the initialportions of the first content item), and gradually changes (e.g.,subsequent to gradually changing the aspect ratio of the first contentitem from the first aspect ratio to an intermediate aspect ratio whilemaintaining a magnification of the first content item) the aspect ratioof the first content item from the intermediate aspect ratio to thesecond aspect ratio while changing a magnification of the first contentitem (e.g., making the content bigger, making the content smaller).

In some embodiments, as part of changing the aspect ratio of the firstcontent item from the first aspect ratio to the second aspect ratio, theelectronic device crops portions of the first content item (e.g., 1002A)(e.g., removing previously displayed portions of the first content item)or reveals previously cropped portions of the first content item (e.g.,keeping the existing content of the first content item at a samemagnification or substantially the same magnification as themagnification of the content when it was displayed in the first aspectratio and revealing additional portions (e.g., on one or more edges) ofthe first content item). Changing the aspect ratio of the content itemby cropping or revealing allows more images to fit onto the screen whenin a high-density view mode and allows images to be seen in at theirnative aspect ratio when in a low-density view mode. Changing contentitems to fit more onto the display enhances the operability of thedevice and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., byhelping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakeswhen operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reducespower usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the userto use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, as part of displaying the second content item(e.g., 1002B) in the first layout (e.g., 810 in FIG. 10A), theelectronic device displays the second content item (e.g., 1002B) at thefirst aspect ratio. In some embodiments, as part of displaying the thirdcontent item (e.g., 1002C) in the first layout, the electronic devicedisplays the third content item at the first aspect ratio. In someembodiments, all displayed content items in the first layout have thesame aspect ratio (the first aspect ratio). Maintaining the same aspectratio of multiple content items allows for arranging content items fordisplay in a more space-efficient manner, thereby preserving displayspace and concurrently providing the user with feedback about morecontent items. Providing improved visual feedback to the user enhancesthe operability of the device and makes the user-device interface moreefficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs andreducing user mistakes when operating/nteracting with the device) which,additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of thedevice by enabling the user to use the device more quickly andefficiently.

In some embodiments, the first aspect ratio is square (e.g., 1:1). Insome embodiments, the second aspect ratio is rectangular with unequaladjacent sides (e.g., a non-square rectangle, a landscape format (widerthan it is tall), a portrait format (taller than it is wide); 4:3, 3:4).Maintaining a square aspect ratio for multiple content items allows forarranging content items for display in a more space-efficient manner,thereby preserving display space and concurrently providing the userwith feedback about more content items. Providing improved visualfeedback to the user enhances the operability of the device and makesthe user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user toprovide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes whenoperating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reducespower usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the userto use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, as part of displaying the second content item(e.g., 1002B) in the first layout (e.g., 810 in FIG. 10A), theelectronic device (e.g., 600) displays the second content item (e.g.,1002B) at the first aspect ratio. In some embodiments, method 1100further includes one or more of the following items. In response todetecting the user input (e.g., 1006), the electronic device changes(e.g., gradually) an aspect ratio of the second content item (e.g.,1002B) from the first aspect ratio to a third aspect ratio (and,optionally, concurrently changes the size of the second content itemfrom the first size to a size that is different from the first size andthe second size). The third aspect ratio is different from the firstaspect ratio and the second aspect ratio. In some embodiments, as partof displaying, via the display device, the plurality of content items(e.g., photo, video, or representations thereof) in the first layout,the electronic device performs one or more of the following items. Inaccordance with a determination that the electronic device is in aportrait mode (e.g., a determination that the orientation of the deviceis a portrait orientation), the electronic device displays the pluralityof content items in the first layout using a first quantity (e.g., 3 or5) of columns. In accordance with a determination that the electronicdevice is in a landscape mode (e.g., a determination that theorientation of the device is a landscape orientation), the electronicdevice displays the plurality of content items in the first layout usinga second quantity (e.g., 5 or 7) of columns different from the firstquantity. Displaying content items in their native aspect ratio inresponse to user input provides the user with feedback about what thenative aspect ratio is for each content item. Providing improved visualfeedback to the user enhances the operability of the device and makesthe user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user toprovide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes whenoperating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reducespower usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the userto use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, method 1100 further includes, in response todetecting the user input (e.g., 1006), the electronic device displays,via the display device, a subset (e.g., less than all of the pluralityof content items) of the plurality of content items in a second layout(e.g., 810 in FIG. 10F) (e.g., view, zoomed-in view, single column view,single row view) that includes a single row or a single column. In someembodiments, as part of displaying the subset of the plurality ofcontent items in the second layout that includes the single row or thesingle column, the electronic device concurrently displays, on thedisplay device, with the first content item (e.g., 1002A) at the secondaspect ratio, the second content item (e.g., 1002B) of the plurality ofcontent items at a third aspect ratio, wherein the third aspect ratio isdifferent from the first aspect ratio, and without concurrentlydisplaying the third content item (e.g., 1002C) of the plurality ofcontent items. In some embodiments, displaying the second content itemat the third aspect ratio causes all of the second content item to bedisplayed. In some embodiments, the second aspect ratio and the thirdaspect ratio are the same. In some embodiments, the second aspect ratioand the third aspect ratio are different. In some embodiments, inresponse to detecting the user input, a determination is made as towhether the distance between two detected contacts of the user inputexceeds a predetermined (e.g., non-zero) threshold (e.g., at the time ofliftoff of the user input). In some embodiments, in accordance with adetermination that the distance exceeds the predetermined threshold(e.g., at the time of liftoff of the user input), the electronic devicedisplays the subset of the plurality of content items in the secondlayout. In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that thedistance does not exceed the predetermined threshold (e.g., at the timeof liftoff of the user input), the electronic device maintains displayof the plurality of content items in the first layout.

In some embodiments, method 1100 further includes, while displaying, viathe display device, the first content item (e.g., 1002A) at the secondsize and at the second aspect ratio, the electronic device detects asecond user input (e.g., 1008) that corresponds to a request to change asize of the first content item (e.g., user gesture (e.g., de-pinchgesture (e.g., detecting two contacts on the display device where thedistance between the two contacts increases or decreases)), voiceinput). In some embodiments, the user input is detected at a locationcorresponding to (e.g., at/on) the first content item. In someembodiments, method 1100 further includes, in response to detecting thesecond user input, the electronic device gradually changes the size ofthe first content item from the second size to the first size whileconcurrently gradually changing the aspect ratio of the first contentitem from the second aspect ratio to the first aspect ratio (e.g., todisplay the plurality of content items in the first layout). In someembodiments, in response to detecting the second user input, the devicedisplays the first content item using the first layout (e.g., view,multi-column view, multi-row view).

In some embodiments, as part of changing the aspect ratio of the firstcontent item (e.g., 1002A) from the second aspect ratio to the firstaspect ratio, the electronic device performs one or more of thefollowing items. In accordance with a determination that the firstcontent (e.g., 1002A) item is in a portrait format (e.g., taller than itis wide), the electronic device reduces the height of the first contentitem (e.g., with or without reducing the width of the first contentitem). In some embodiments, as part of changing the aspect ratio of thefirst content item from the second aspect ratio to the first aspectratio, the electronic device maintains the width of the first contentitem. In some embodiments, as part of changing the aspect ratio of thefirst content item from the second aspect ratio to the first aspectratio, the electronic device changes the width of the first content item(e.g., increasing, decreasing). In some embodiments, changing the aspectratio of the first content item from the second aspect ratio to thefirst aspect ratio is a canned transition (e.g., that does notcorrespond to any movement of a gesture of the second user input). Insome embodiments, changing the aspect ratio of the first content itemfrom the second aspect ratio to the first aspect ratio occurs at a rateor by an amount that is determined in accordance with movement of thegesture of the second user input (e.g., gradually, over time with (inconjunction with) the movement of the gesture).

In some embodiments, as part of changing the aspect ratio of the firstcontent item (e.g., 1002A) from the second aspect ratio to the firstaspect ratio, the electronic device performs one or more of thefollowing items. In accordance with a determination that the firstcontent (e.g., 1002A) item is in a landscape format (e.g., taller thanit is wide), the electronic device reduces the width of the firstcontent item (e.g., with or without reducing the height of the firstcontent item). In some embodiments, as part of changing the aspect ratioof the first content item from the second aspect ratio to the firstaspect ratio, the electronic device maintains the height of the firstcontent item. In some embodiments, as part of changing the aspect ratioof the first content item from the second aspect ratio to the firstaspect ratio, the electronic device changes the height of the firstcontent item (e.g., increasing, decreasing). In some embodiments,changing the aspect ratio of the first content item from the secondaspect ratio to the first aspect ratio is a canned transition (e.g.,that does not correspond to any movement of a gesture of the second userinput). In some embodiments, changing the aspect ratio of the firstcontent item from the second aspect ratio to the first aspect ratiooccurs in accordance with movement of the gesture of the second userinput (e.g., gradually, over time with the movement of the gesture).

In some embodiments, method 1100 further includes, while displaying, viathe display device (e.g., 602), the plurality of content items (e.g.,photo, video, or representations thereof), including the first contentitem (e.g., 1002A) at the first size and at the first aspect ratio, inthe first layout (e.g., 810 in FIG. 10M) (e.g., view, multi-column view,multi-row view) that includes the plurality of rows and the plurality ofcolumns, the electronic device detects a third user input (e.g., 1014)that corresponds to a request to change a size of the first content item(e.g., user gesture (e.g., de-pinch gesture (e.g., detecting twocontacts on the display device where the distance between the twocontacts increases or decreases)), voice input). In some embodiments,the user input is detected at a location corresponding to (e.g., at/on)the first content item. In some embodiments, method 1100 furtherincludes, in response to detecting the third user input (e.g., 1014),the electronic device displays, via the display device, a secondplurality of content items (e.g., that includes the first content item;photo, video, or representations thereof) in a third layout (e.g., 810in FIG. 10N) (e.g., more rows and/or columns than the first layout;view, multi-column view, multi-row view) that includes a secondplurality of rows (e.g., different from (such as more rows than) theplurality of rows) and a second plurality of columns (e.g., differentfrom (such as more columns than) the plurality of columns). In someembodiments, as part of displaying the second plurality of content itemsin a third layout that includes a second plurality of rows and a secondplurality of columns, the electronic device gradually changes the sizeof the first content item (e.g., 1002A) from the first size to a thirdsize (e.g., bigger than the first size) without changing the aspectratio of the first content item. In some embodiments, as part ofdisplaying the second plurality of content items in the third layout,the electronic device displays content items that were not displayed inthe first layout (while optionally displaying all content items thatwere displayed in the first layout). In some embodiments, as part ofdisplaying the second plurality of content items in the third layout,the electronic device maintains the aspect ratio of the content items ofthe plurality of content items (since they are included in the secondplurality of content items) as they were displayed in the first layoutwhile changing (e.g., decreasing) the size of the content items.

In some embodiments, the second layout (e.g., 810 in FIG. 10F) isdifferent from the first layout (e.g., 810 in FIG. 10A). In someembodiments, in the first layout the second content item (e.g., 1002B)has (e.g., is at, is positioned at) a first location relative to thefirst content item (e.g., 1002A). In some embodiments, in the secondlayout a third content item (e.g., 1002C), different from the firstcontent item, has the first location relative to the first content item.In some embodiments, as part of displaying, on the display device, thesubset (e.g., less than all of the plurality of content items) of theplurality of content items in the second layout, the electronic device(e.g., 600) transitions, as a gesture (e.g., pinch gesture) of thesecond user input (e.g., 1006) progresses, from displaying the firstcontent item (e.g., 1002A) in the first layout (e.g., 810 in FIG. 10A)to displaying the first content item in the second layout (e.g., 810 inFIG. 10F). In some embodiments, as part of transitioning, as a gestureof the second user input (e.g., 1006) progresses, from displaying thefirst content item in the first layout to displaying the first contentitem in the second layout, the electronic device displays a combination(e.g., a crossfade) of the second content (e.g., 1002B) and the thirdcontent (e.g., 1002C) at the first location relative to the firstcontent item (e.g., 1002A) during the transition from displaying thefirst content item in the first layout to displaying the first contentitem in the second layout. In some embodiments, the electronic deviceuses crossfading techniques as described with respect to FIG. 12A-12I.Crossfading the content items provides the user with feedback aboutwhere content items have moved to when switching from the first layoutto the second layout. Providing improved visual feedback to the userenhances the operability of the device and makes the user-deviceinterface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide properinputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with thedevice) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves batterylife of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quicklyand efficiently.

In some embodiments, method 1100 further includes, while displaying, viathe display device (e.g., 602), the plurality of content items (e.g.,1002A-1002C) (e.g., photo, video, or representations thereof), includingthe first content item (e.g., 1002A) at the first size and at the firstaspect ratio, in the first layout (e.g., 810 at FIG. 10N) (e.g., view,multi-column view, multi-row view) that includes the plurality of rowsand the plurality of columns, the electronic device detects a fourthuser input (e.g., 1016) (e.g., a tap on a full frame/grid affordance(e.g., 810M-810N) that corresponds to a request to change an aspectratio of the first content item. In some embodiments, the user input isdetected at a location corresponding to (e.g., at/on) the fullframe/grid affordance. In some embodiments, method 1100 furtherincludes, in response to detecting the fourth user input, the electronicdevice changes the aspect ratio of at least some of the plurality ofcontent items (e.g., 1002A-1002C) while continuing to display theplurality of content items in the first layout (e.g., 810 at FIG. 10O),including changing the aspect ratio of the first content item from thefirst aspect ratio to a third aspect ratio (e.g., same as the secondaspect ratio). In some embodiments, no additional (or fewer) contentitems are displayed in response to the fourth user input. In someembodiments, the device maintains the aspect ratio of some others of theplurality of content items. In some embodiments, the second layoutincludes greater separation between content items than the first layout.In some embodiments, the first layout includes greater separationbetween content items than the second layout.

In some embodiments, method 1100 further includes, while displaying theplurality of content items (e.g., 1002A-1002C) (e.g., photo, video, orrepresentations thereof) in the first layout (e.g., 810 in FIG. 10N)(e.g., view, multi-column view, multi-row view) that includes theplurality of rows and the plurality of columns, the electronic device(e.g., 600) provides an option (e.g., 810M-810N) to change aspect ratiosof at least some of the plurality of content items while continuing todisplay the plurality of content items in the first layout. In someembodiments, the option to change aspect ratios is an affordance which,when activated, changes the aspect ratio of the first content item fromthe first aspect ratio to the second aspect ratio. In some embodiments,method 1100 further includes, subsequent to displaying the plurality ofcontent items (e.g., photo, video, or representations thereof) in thefirst layout, the electronic device displays the plurality of contentitems in a fourth layout (e.g., 810 in FIG. 10M) that includes a thirdplurality of rows (e.g., different from (such as more rows than) theplurality of rows and/or second plurality of rows) and a third pluralityof columns (e.g., different from (such as more columns than) theplurality of columns and the second plurality of columns) withoutproviding the option (e.g., 810M-810N) to change aspect ratios of atleast some (or, optionally, all) of the plurality of content items. Insome embodiments, the fourth layout includes more content items than thefirst layout, the second layout, and the third layout. In someembodiments, no additional (or fewer) content items are displayed inresponse detecting activation of the option to change aspect ratios ofat least some of the content items. In some embodiments, the devicemaintains the aspect ratio of some others of the plurality of contentitems in response detecting activation of the option to change aspectratios of at least some of the content items. In some embodiments, thefourth layout includes less separation between content items than thefirst layout.

Note that details of the processes described above with respect tomethod 1100 (e.g., FIG. 11) are also applicable in an analogous mannerto the methods described below/above. For example, methods 700, 900,1300, and 1500 optionally includes one or more of the characteristics ofthe various methods described above with reference to method 1100. Forexample, the electronic device in method 1100 can performs techniquesrelated to displaying days view 640 and all photos view 810, asdescribed with respect to methods 700 and 900. For brevity, thesedetails are not repeated below.

FIGS. 12A-12O illustrate exemplary devices and user interfaces fornavigating a collection of media items, in accordance with someembodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustratethe processes described below, including the processes in FIG. 13.

FIG. 12A depicts electronic device 1200, which is a tablet computer withdisplay 1202. Display 1202 includes a touch-sensitive surface on whichelectronic device 1200 can detect user gestures (e.g., tap, swipe,drag). In some embodiments, electronic device 1200 includes one or morefeatures of electronic device 100, 300, or 500.

At FIG. 12A, electronic device 1200 displays user interface 1206 fornavigating a collection of media items (e.g., photos, videos). Userinterface 1206 includes a plurality of photos being displayed in allphotos view 810 with layout 1212A. Additional details of all photos view810 is described above with respect to FIG. 8D. For example, asdiscussed above, all photos view 810 includes a non-curated set of mediaitems (e.g., photos, videos) from a media library or representationsthereof.

Returning to FIG. 12A, layout 1212A includes a plurality of photos suchas photos A-T and photo 1208. For ease of explanation, FIG. 12A depictsphotos A-T using letters that serve as representations of an actualphoto (e.g., 1208). A letter in a box represents a photo that occupiesthe location (e.g., region) of that box. Additionally, electronic device1200 displays photos A-T and photo 1208 at the same initial size and atthe same initial aspect ratio (e.g., 1:1). Additionally, electronicdevice 1200 displays photos A-T and photo 1208 in a particular sequence(e.g., top-to-bottom, left-to-right). As discussed below, electronicdevice 1200 maintains the sequence of photos even when certainoperations are being performed (e.g., changing a magnification level ofa photo).

As shown in FIG. 12A, a user performs a pinch out gesture to zoom in onphoto 1208. As a result, electronic device 1200 detects input 1210 withtwo contacts, where the distance between the two contacts is increasing.Electronic device 1200 detects input 1210 at a location corresponding tophoto 1208. In response to detecting input 1210, electronic device 1200zooms in on photo 1208, and initiates a transition between layout 1212Aof FIG. 12A and layout 1212D of FIG. 12E.

To maintain the sequence of photos, electronic device 1200 replacescertain photos with duplicate versions of other photos during thetransition, as further discussed below. Looking ahead to FIG. 12E, ifelectronic device 1200 did not replace certain photos, the row occupiedby photos D-H in layout 1212D would instead be occupied by photos B-F,respectively. For example, without photos being replaced, photo F wouldremain above photo L in the transition from layout 1212A of FIG. 12A tolayout 1212D of FIG. 12E. Accordingly, in this scenario, photo F ratherthan photo H would immediately precede photo I. As a result, thesequence of photos would not be maintained.

Turning to the start of the transition at FIG. 12B, electronic device1200 begins the process of replacing certain photos using crossfadingtechniques, as described below. Specifically, electronic device 1200initially displays duplicate versions of certain photos with partialopacity (e.g., 20%, 30%, 40%), as depicted in layout 1212B of FIG. 12B.It is noted that partial opacity is represented by a hollow letter(e.g., “E” in second row, third column). During the transition, aduplicate version of a photo occupies the same location (e.g., region)as a photo in the same box. For example, photo C in the third columnoccupies the same location as photo E in the third column. Thus, FIG.12B depicts that electronic device 1200 displays a combination of photoC and photo E at the same location. For ease of explanation andreadability, letters in the same box, which represent a combination ofphotos, are displayed near each other rather than on top of each other.In some embodiments, other techniques (e.g., wipe, fade in/fade out)besides crossfading can be used (in addition to, or in place of crossfading) for replacing one photo with another.

Returning to the transition at FIG. 12B, electronic device 1200 alsobegins reducing the opacity level (e.g., increasing the transparencylevel) of photos that are above and below the row in which input 1210 isbeing detected. Thus, electronic device 1200 reduces the opacity levelof photos A-G and N-T, which have striped lettering in FIG. 12B. FIGS.12A-12B depict the reduction in opacity by replacing a filled-in letter,which represents full opacity (e.g., 100%), with a striped letter, whichrepresents a high opacity level (e.g., 60%, 70%, 80%). For example, theopacity level of photo C is being reduced, as indicated by the stripedletter in FIG. 12B. In contrast, electronic device 1200 does not changethe opacity level of the photos in the row in which input 1210 wasdetected. Accordingly, electronic device 1200 does not reduce theopacity level of photos H-M and photo 1208.

In addition to replacement of certain photos as discussed above,electronic device 1200 increases the size of the displayed photos inresponse to detecting input 1210, resulting in at least a portion ofcertain photos ceasing to be displayed (e.g., A, G, H, M, N, and T inthe left-most and right-most columns), as shown in layout 1212B of FIG.12B. In some embodiments, the change in size and/or opacity level of thedisplayed photos corresponds to the change in distance between the twocontacts of input 1210. Changing the size of a photo can includechanging the magnification level of a photo. For example, increasing thesize of a photo can include increasing the magnification level of thephoto. Similarly, reducing the size of a photo can include decreasingthe magnification level of the photo.

As shown in FIG. 12B, the user continues to perform the pinch outgesture to zoom in on photo 1208. As a result, electronic device 1200detects input 1210 with two contacts, where the distance between the twocontacts continues to increase.

At FIG. 12C, in response to continued detection of input 1210,electronic device 1200 displays layout 1212C, as electronic device 1200continues the transition to layout 1212D of FIG. 12E. In particular,during the continued transition, electronic device 1200 increases theopacity level (e.g., reduces the transparency level) of the photos thatwere initially displayed at FIG. 12B (e.g., photos D-H, M-Q). FIGS.12B-12C depict the increase in opacity by replacing a hollow letter witha striped letter.

Additionally, during the continued transition to layout 1212D of FIG.12E, electronic device 1200 continues to reduce the opacity level of thephotos being replaced (e.g., the photos that had their opacity levelreduced at FIG. 12B). Thus, electronic device 1200 continues to reducethe opacity level of photos A-G and N-T, which have hollow lettering inFIG. 12C. FIGS. 12B-12C depict the continued reduction in opacity byreplacing a striped letter, which represents high opacity, with a hollowletter, which represents partial opacity. Accordingly, electronic device1200 continues the process of replacing certain photos using crossfadingtechniques in order to maintain the sequence of photos. Further, duringthe transition, electronic device 1200 continues to increase the size ofthe displayed photos

As shown in FIG. 12C, the user continues to perform the pinch outgesture to zoom in on photo 1208. As a result, electronic device 1200detects input 1210 with two contacts, where the distance between the twocontacts continues to increase.

At FIG. 12E, in response to continued detection of input 1210,electronic device 1200 continues the transition to layout 1212D.Specifically, electronic device 1200 completes the replacement ofcertain photos in order to maintain the sequence of photos. During thecontinued transition, electronic device 1200 further increases theopacity level of the photos that were initially displayed at FIG. 12B,where the opacity level increases to full opacity. FIGS. 12C and 12Edepict the increase in opacity by replacing a striped letter with afilled-in letter.

Electronic device 1200 also further reduces the opacity level of thephotos being replaced (e.g., the photos that had their opacity levelreduced at FIG. 12B). In particular, electronic device 1200 ceases todisplay certain photos at their respective locations in layout 1212D ofFIG. 12E by reducing the opacity level of the photos to zero. Forexample, photo C in layout 1212C of FIG. 12A is replaced by photo E, asshown in layout 1212D of FIG. 12E. As a result, electronic device 1200completes the process of replacing certain photos to maintain thesequence of photos. Additionally, in response to detecting input 1210,electronic device 1200 displays photo 1208 at an increased size inlayout 1212D (e.g., relative to its size in the previous figures).

Returning to FIG. 12C, the user performs a pinch out gesture, asdiscussed above. In some embodiments, instead of continuing to performthe pinch out gesture, the user maintains contact with display 602without pinching out. As a result, electronic device 1200 detects input1210 with two contacts, where the distance between the two contacts doesnot change (e.g., or does not exceed some threshold change in distance).At FIG. 12D, in response to detecting input 1210 without a correspondingchange in distance, electronic device 1200 completes the replacement ofcertain photos, in some embodiments. Specifically, in some embodiments,while maintaining layout 1212C, electronic device 1200 ceases to displaycertain photos at their respective locations in layout 1212D of FIG. 12Eby reducing the opacity level of the photos to zero. In so doing,electronic device 1200 prevents the user from being able to indefinitelypause the transition at a layout such as layout 1212C of FIG. 12C. Insome embodiments, in response to detecting input 1210 without acorresponding change in distance, electronic device 1200 proceeds tocompleting the transition to layout 1212D of FIG. 12E.

Returning to FIG. 12E, once the transition to layout 1212D is complete,the user performs a pinch in gesture to revert back to layout 1212A ofFIG. 12A. As a result, electronic device 1200 detects input 1214 withtwo contacts, where the distance between the two contacts is decreasing.

At FIG. 12F, in response to detecting input 1214, electronic device 1200transitions from displaying layout 1212D of FIG. 12D to displayinglayout 1212A. It is noted that FIGS. 12A-12E, as discussed above,illustrate a pinch gesture (e.g., input 1210) being performed at photo1208 located near the center of display 602. As depicted in FIGS.12B-12E, in response to detecting input 1210, electronic device 1200anchors the zoom in operation based on the location of the pinch gesture(e.g., input 1210). Specifically, in response to detecting input 1210,electronic device 1200 maintains display of photo 1208 at a locationbased on where input 1210 is being detected. As a result, electronicdevice 1200 continues to display photo 1208 near the center of display602, during the transition from layout 1212A of FIG. 12A to layout 1212Dof FIG. 12E.

FIGS. 12F-12I illustrate the anchoring that occurs when a pinch gestureis detected somewhere other than the center of display 602. At FIG. 12F,the user performs a pinch out gesture to zoom in on photo M. As aresult, electronic device 1200 detects input 1216 with two contacts,where the distance between the two contacts is increasing. Electronicdevice 1200 detects input 1216 at a location corresponding to photo M.

As shown in FIGS. 12G-12I, in response to detecting input 1216,electronic device 1200 initiates a transition from layout 1212A tolayout 1212E. During the transition, electronic device 1200 uses thecrossfading techniques described above in order to maintain the sequenceof photos. Further, electronic device 1200 anchors the zoom in operationbased on the location of input 1216. As a result, electronic device 1200maintains display of photo M on the right side of display 602 during thetransition. Accordingly, once the transition has completed, layout 1212Eof FIG. 12I includes a different set of photos than layout 1212A of FIG.12F.

At FIG. 12I, after the transition has completed, the user performs apinch in gesture to revert back to layout 1212A. As a result, electronicdevice 1200 detects input 1218 with two contacts, where the distancebetween the two contacts is decreasing.

At FIG. 12J, in response to detecting input 1218, electronic device 1200zooms out and transitions to displaying layout 1212A. The user thenperforms another pinch in gesture to further zoom out on the displayedphotos. As a result, electronic device 1200 detects input 1220 with twocontacts, where the distance between the two contacts is decreasing.

At FIG. 12K, in response to detecting input 1220, electronic device 1200zooms out on the displayed photos, and transitions from displayinglayout 1212A to layout 1212F. During the transition, electronic device1200 replaces title 1204A with title 1204B. A title (e.g., 1204A-1204C)provides an indication of the particular time period to which one ormore of the displayed photos correspond. In some embodiments, one title(e.g., 1204A) can be more detailed than another (e.g., 1204B). Forexample, in some embodiments, title 1204A can include a locationcorresponding to the displayed photos. In some embodiments, electronicdevice 1200 continues to display title 1204A during the transitions aslong as input 1220 is being detected. Thus, in some embodiments,electronic device 1200 replaces title 1204A with title 1204B uponliftoff of input 1220. In some embodiments, electronic device 1200replaces title 1204A with title 1204B when input 1220 satisfies one ormore criteria (e.g., a change in distance corresponding to input 1220exceeds a threshold amount).

As shown in FIG. 12K, the user performs another pinch in gesture tofurther zoom out on the displayed photos. As a result, electronic device1200 detects input 1220 with two contacts, where the distance betweenthe two contacts is decreasing.

At FIG. 12L, in response to detecting input 1220, electronic device 1200zooms out on the displayed photos, and transitions from displayinglayout 1212F to layout 1212G. During the transition, electronic device1200 replaces title 1204B with title 1204C. In some embodiments,electronic device 1200 replaces the title upon liftoff of the detectedinput or when some criteria is met, as discussed above with respect toFIG. 12K.

As depicted in FIG. 12L, layout 1212G includes dead space 1224, which isa region on display 602 where no photos are being displayed. In someembodiments, when electronic device 1200 transitions to a new layout ofphotos, electronic device 1200 maintains the sequence of photos, asdiscussed above. In some embodiments, as a result of maintaining thesequence during the transition, electronic device 1200 can transition toa layout of photos that has a region with no photos (e.g., dead space1224).

FIG. 12M illustrates the result that occurs when electronic device 1200uses techniques to avoid displaying a region with no photos (e.g., deadspace 1224). Returning to FIG. 12K, electronic device 1200 detects input1220 while displaying layout 1212F. In some embodiments, in response todetecting input 1220, electronic device 1200 determines that thepost-transition layout (e.g., 1212G) will have a region with no photos(e.g., dead space 1224). Upon making this determination, electronicdevice 1200 performs an operation during the transition to eliminate theregion with no photos, resulting in layout 1212G of FIG. 12M.

In some embodiments, electronic device 1200 eliminates the region withno photos by summarizing one or more of the (e.g. top) rows in thepost-transition layout (e.g., 1212G). In some embodiments, electronicdevice 1200 summarizes the rows by hiding similar photos. In someembodiments, when photos are being hidden, electronic device 1200 avoidshiding photos that are at the beginning of the sequence of photos (e.g.,displayed at the top-left portion of display 602). In some embodiments,electronic device 1200 eliminates the region with no photos byduplicating photos to fill in the region.

In some embodiments, while displaying a layout (e.g., 1212G), electronicdevice 1200 can display a region with no photos (e.g., dead space 1224)in response to detecting a scroll gesture. In some embodiments, inresponse to detecting a scroll gesture, electronic device 1200 willreset (e.g., shift) the position of the photos such that there is nodead space if a scroll speed associated with the scroll gesture exceedsa threshold speed. In some embodiments, if the scroll speed does notexceed the threshold speed, electronic device 1200 uses one of thetechniques described above for avoiding the dead space (e.g.,summarizing, duplicating).

Returning to FIG. 12M, the user performs a pinch in gesture in anattempt to zoom in further on the displayed photos, even though the userhas already reached the maximum zoom level. As a result, whiledisplaying layout 1212G, electronic device 1200 detects input 1226 withtwo contacts, where the distance between the two contacts is decreasing.

At FIG. 12N, in response to detecting input 1226, electronic device 1200forgoes zooming in while providing an indication that the user hasreached the maximum zoom level. Specifically, electronic device 1200distorts (e.g., stretches) the photos farther away from the location atwhich input 1226 is detected. Additionally, electronic device 1200 doesnot distort the photos closer to the location at which input 1226 isdetected. It is noted that, despite the distortion, the photos along theedges of layout 1212G (e.g., edges of display 602 and the status bar)remain contiguous with the edges of layout 1212G.

As shown in FIG. 12N, the user continues performing the pinch ingesture. As a result, electronic device 1200 continues to detect input1226 with two contacts, where the distance between the two contacts isdecreasing.

At FIG. 12O, in response to continued detection of input 1226,electronic device 1200 further distorts the photos farther away from thelocation at which input 1226 is detected while forgoing distortion ofthe photos closer to the location at which input 1226 is detected. Theuser then ceases performing the pinch in gesture. As a result,electronic device 1200 detects liftoff of input 1226. In response todetecting liftoff, electronic device 1200 ceases distortion of thephotos and returns to layout 1212G, as depicted in FIG. 12M.

In some embodiments, layouts (e.g., 1212A-1212E) with a number ofcolumns that does not exceed a particular column threshold (e.g., 4, 6,8) have displayed boundary lines (e.g., 1228A-1228B in FIG. 12A) betweenphotos. Thus, the user can see the boundary lines between the photos. Itis noted that layouts (e.g., 1212A-1212E) with a number of columns thatdoes not exceed the particular column threshold can be referred to as aboundary line or keyline layout.

In contrast, layouts (e.g., 1212F-1212G) with a number of columns thatexceeds the particular threshold do not include displayed boundarylines. For example, in FIGS. 10K-10O, boundary lines (e.g., 1230A-1230Bof FIG. 12K) have been included for ease of explanation, but electronicdevice 600 does not actually display boundary lines between the photos.It is noted that layouts with a number of columns that exceeds theparticular column threshold can be referred to as a non-boundary line ornon-keyline layout.

FIG. 13 is a flow diagram illustrating a method for navigating acollection of media items using an electronic device in accordance withsome embodiments. Method 1300 is performed at a device (e.g., 100, 300,500, 600, 1200) with a display device. Some operations in method 1300are, optionally, combined, the orders of some operations are,optionally, changed, and some operations are, optionally, omitted.

As described below, method 1300 provides an intuitive way for navigatinga collection of media items. The method reduces the cognitive burden ona user for navigating a collection of media items, thereby creating amore efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated computingdevices, enabling a user to navigate a collection of media items fasterand more efficiently conserves power and increases the time betweenbattery charges.

The electronic device (e.g., 1200) displays (1302) via the displaydevice (e.g., 1202), a plurality of content items (e.g., photos A-T,photo 1208)(e.g., photo, video, or representations thereof) in a firstlayout (e.g., 1212A) (e.g., view) (e.g., that includes a plurality ofrows and a plurality of columns, that includes a single row or a singlecolumn).

As part of displaying the plurality of content items in the firstlayout, the electronic device (e.g., 1200) concurrently displays (1304)a first content item (e.g., 1208) of the plurality of content items, anda second content item of the plurality of content items (e.g., photo Cin FIG. 12A).

While displaying, via the display device (e.g., 1202), the plurality ofcontent items in the first layout, the electronic device (e.g., 1200)detects (1306) a user input (e.g., 1210) that corresponds to a requestto change a size of the first content item (e.g., 1208) (e.g., usergesture (e.g., double-tap and drag gesture, pinch gesture (e.g.,detecting two contacts on the display device where the distance betweenthe two contacts increases or decreases)), voice input). In someembodiments, the user input is detected at a location corresponding to(e.g., at/on) the plurality of content items and/or on (or centered on)the first content item.

In response to detecting the user input (e.g., 1208), the electronicdevice (e.g., 1202) starts (1308) to transition from displaying thefirst content item (e.g., 1208) in the first layout (e.g., 1212A) todisplaying the first content item in a second layout (e.g., 1212D). Thesecond layout is different from the first layout. In the first layout,the second content item (e.g., photo C in FIG. 12A) has a first locationrelative to the first content item. In the second layout (e.g., 1212D),a third content item (e.g., photo E in FIG. 12E), different from thefirst content item, has the first location relative to the first contentitem.

As part of transitioning from displaying the first content item (e.g.,1208) in the first layout to displaying the first content item in thesecond layout, the electronic device (e.g., 1200) displays (1310) acombination of the second content item (e.g., photo C in the thirdcolumn of FIG. 12B) and the third content item (e.g., photo E in thethird column of FIG. 12B) at the first location relative to the firstcontent item (e.g., 1208) during the transition from displaying thefirst content item in the first layout (e.g., 1212A) to displaying thefirst content item in the second layout (e.g., 1212D). In someembodiments, the second layout includes more or less rows/columns thanthe first layout depending on, for example, whether the user input is apinch (more rows/columns) or de-pinch (less rows/columns) gesture.Combining the content items (e.g., crossfade) provides the user withfeedback about where content items have moved to when switching from thefirst layout to the second layout. Providing improved visual feedback tothe user enhances the operability of the device and makes theuser-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user toprovide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes whenoperating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reducespower usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the userto use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, as part of transitioning from displaying the firstcontent item (e.g., 1208) in the first layout (e.g., 1212A) todisplaying the first content item in the second layout (e.g., 1212D),the electronic device (e.g., 1200) changes the size of the first contentitem (e.g., 1208) without combining (e.g., without visually crossfading)the first content item with any other content item. Resizing contentitems without combining the items enables the user to view content atvarying sizes without change a position of the item in the layout.Providing improved visual feedback to the user enhances the operabilityof the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g.,by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakeswhen operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reducespower usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the userto use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, as part of transitioning from displaying the firstcontent item (e.g., 1208) in the first layout (e.g., 1212A) todisplaying the first content item in the second layout (e.g., 1212D),the electronic device (e.g., 1200) changes the size of a fourth contentitem (e.g., photo K in FIGS. 12A-12D) (e.g., located adjacent to thefirst content item, located in the same row as the first content item,located to the left and/or right of the first content item) withoutcombining (e.g., without visually crossfading) the fourth content itemwith any other content item.

In some embodiments, the first layout (e.g., 1212A) (e.g., view)includes a plurality of rows (e.g., and a plurality of columns). In someembodiments, the first content item (e.g., 1208) is in a first row ofthe plurality of rows of the first layout (e.g., 1212A). In someembodiments, a fifth content item (e.g., photo P in FIG. 12A) is in asecond row (e.g., above or below the first row), different from thefirst row, of the plurality of rows of the first layout. In someembodiments, as part of transitioning from displaying the first contentitem (e.g., 1208) in the first layout to displaying the first contentitem in the second layout, the electronic device (e.g., 1200) displays acombination of the fifth content item (e.g., photo P in third column ofFIG. 12B) and a sixth content item (e.g., photo N in third column ofFIG. 12B) (e.g., crossfading the fifth content item and the sixthcontent item) during the transition from displaying the first contentitem in the first layout to displaying the first content item in thesecond layout.

In some embodiments, as part of displaying the combination of the secondcontent item (e.g., photo C in the third column of FIG. 12B) and thethird content item (e.g., photo E in the third column of FIG. 12B) atthe first location relative to the first content item (e.g., 1208), theelectronic device (e.g., 1200) fades out (e.g., decreases the opacityof) the second content item while (e.g., concurrently with) fading in(e.g., increasing the opacity of) the third content item (e.g.,crossfading the second content item and the third content item). In someembodiments, the second content item fades out while changing in sizeand the third content item fades in while changing in size. In someembodiments, a plurality of content items on rows other than the row ofthe first content item are crossfaded. In some embodiments, all contentitems on rows other than the row of the first content item arecrossfaded. Crossfading the content items provides the user withfeedback about where content items have moved to when switching from thefirst layout to the second layout. Providing improved visual feedback tothe user enhances the operability of the device and makes theuser-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user toprovide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes whenoperating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reducespower usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the userto use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, the user input (e.g., 1210) includes a gesture. Insome embodiments, as part of displaying the combination of the secondcontent item (e.g., photo C in third column of FIG. 12B) and the thirdcontent item (e.g., photo E in third column of FIG. 12B) at the firstlocation relative to the first content item (e.g., 1208), the electronicdevice (e.g., 1200) gradually progresses a level (e.g., a distribution,a contribution of each content item to the combination) of thecombination (e.g., amount of crossfading) in conjunction with movementof the gesture of the user input (e.g., 1210). Crossfading the contentitems in conjunction with movement of the user input provides the userwith feedback that the user input is changing the location of contentitems. Providing improved visual feedback to the user enhances theoperability of the device and makes the user-device interface moreefficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs andreducing user mistakes when operatinginteracting with the device) which,additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of thedevice by enabling the user to use the device more quickly andefficiently.

In some embodiments, the gesture (e.g., 1210) includes movement (e.g.,movement during one portion of the gesture (e.g., a later portion of thegesture); movement that is slower than an initial rate of movement) ofone or more contacts on a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., of display1202) of the electronic device (e.g., 1200). In some embodiments, method1300 further includes the electronic device performing one or more ofthe following items. In accordance with a determination that themagnitude of the movement (e.g., corresponding to input 1210) is below a(non-zero) threshold (e.g., movement slows down, such as after beingabove the threshold), the electronic device completes the transitionfrom displaying the first content item (e.g., 1208) in the first layout(e.g., 1212A) to displaying the first content item in the second layout(e.g., 1212D), including replacing the second content item (e.g., photoC in third column of FIG. 12B) at the first location relative to thefirst content item with the third content item (e.g., photo E in thirdcolumn of FIG. 12B) at the first location relative to the first contentitem. Snapping to the second layout during user input when the userinput slows down provides the user with feedback that the input changesthe location of content items. Providing improved visual feedback to theuser enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-deviceinterface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide properinputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with thedevice) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves batterylife of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quicklyand efficiently.

In some embodiments, the gesture (e.g., input 1210) includes movement oftwo or more contacts on the touch-sensitive surface of the electronicdevice (e.g., 1200). In some embodiments, method 1300 further includesone or more of the following items. In response to detecting lift-off ofthe two or more contacts (e.g., corresponding to input 1210) from thetouch-sensitive surface, and in accordance with a determination that themovement of the two or more contacts includes decreasing (e.g., ascompared to the initial touch-down of the two or more contacts) adistance between the two or more contacts (e.g., pinching to zoom out),the electronic device decreases the size of the first content item(e.g., 1208) as part of transitioning from displaying the first contentitem in the first layout to displaying the first content item in thesecond layout. In response to detecting lift-off of the two or morecontacts from the touch-sensitive surface, and in accordance with adetermination that the movement of the two or more contacts includesincreasing (e.g., as compared to the initial touch-down of the two ormore contacts) a distance between the two or more contacts (e.g.,de-pinching to zoom in), the electronic device increases the size of thefirst content item as part of transitioning from displaying the firstcontent item in the first layout (e.g., 1212A) to displaying the firstcontent item in the second layout (e.g., 1212D).

In some embodiments, the user input (e.g., 1210) includes a gesture thatincludes movement of one or more contacts on a touch-sensitive surfaceof the electronic device (e.g., 1200). In some embodiments, the firstcontent item (e.g., 1208) in the second layout (e.g., 1212D) isdisplayed at a size that is based on a magnitude (e.g., distance oftravel, amount of pinch/de-pinch) of the movement of the one or morecontacts.

In some embodiments, the user input (e.g., 1210) includes a gesture thatincludes movement of one or more contacts on a touch-sensitive surfaceof the electronic device (e.g., 1200). In some embodiments, the thirdcontent item (e.g., photo E in third column of FIG. 12B) is selected tobe combined with the second content item (e.g., photo C in third columnof FIG. 12B) at the first location relative to the first content itembased on the magnitude (e.g., distance of travel, amount ofpinch/de-pinch). In some embodiments, different magnitudes of thegesture cause different content items to be combined with (andoptionally replace) the second content item at the first locationrelative to the first content item. Providing different locations forcontent items based on the magnitude of the user input provides the userwith feedback that the user input dictates where content items arelocated in the second layout. Providing improved visual feedback to theuser enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-deviceinterface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide properinputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with thedevice) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves batterylife of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quicklyand efficiently.

In some embodiments, as part of displaying, via the display device(e.g., 1202), the plurality of content items (e.g., photo, video, orrepresentations thereof) in the first layout, the electronic device(e.g., 1200) displays, on the display device (e.g., overlaid on theplurality of content items, displayed above the plurality of contentitems, displayed adjacent to a content item of the plurality of contentitems), a first label (e.g., 1204A) (e.g., without displaying a secondlabel, one or more indicators (e.g., date indicator, title indicator,location indicator) that include the first information (e.g., month)without including the second information (e.g., year, location, title,day, hour)). In some embodiments, as part of displaying, via the displaydevice, the plurality of content items (e.g., photo, video, orrepresentations thereof) in the second layout (e.g., 1212F), theelectronic device displays, on the display device (e.g., overlaid on theplurality of content items, displayed above the plurality of contentitems, displayed adjacent to a content item of the plurality of contentitems), a second label (e.g., 1204B) different from the first label(e.g., 1204A) (e.g., without displaying the first label, one or moreindicators (e.g., date indicator, title indicator, location indicator)that include first information (e.g., month) and second information(e.g., year, location, title, day, hour), the first information andsecond information corresponding to at least some of the plurality ofcontent items (and, optionally, displayed at a location selected basedon the location of the corresponding content items)). In someembodiments (e.g., when the input is a de-pinch gesture that zooms out,causing less content items to be displayed), the first layout (e.g., thestarting layout) includes one or more indicators (e.g., date indicator,title indicator, location indicator) that include first information(e.g., month) without including second information (e.g., year,location, title, day, hour), the first information corresponding to atleast some of the plurality of content items (and, optionally, displayedat a location selected based on the location of the correspondingcontent items), and the second layout (e.g., the layout resulting fromthe user input, a zoomed in view of the first content item) includes thefirst information (e.g., month) and the second information (e.g., year,location, title, day, hour), the first and second informationcorresponding to at least some of the plurality of content items (and,optionally, displayed at a location selected based on the location ofthe corresponding content items).

In some embodiments, the first label (e.g., 1204A) (e.g., title, fulldate, geographical location corresponding to content item) is displayedat a location adjacent to (e.g., at the top of the collection of) theplurality of content items.

In some embodiments, the second label (e.g., 1204B, 1204C) (e.g., year,combined month and year) is displayed overlaid on (e.g., on top of thecollection of) the plurality of content items.

In some embodiments, the user input (e.g., 1208, 1220, 1222) includes agesture that includes one or more contacts on a touch-sensitive surfaceof the electronic device (e.g., 1200). In some embodiments, displayingthe one or more indicators (e.g., 1204A-1204C) (e.g., date indicator,title indicator, location indicator) that include the second information(e.g., year, location, title, day, hour) (and, optionally, the firstinformation) is in response to detecting lift-off of the one or morecontacts of the gesture.

In some embodiments, the user input (e.g., 1208, 1220, 1222) includes asecond gesture that includes movement of one or more contacts on atouch-sensitive surface of the electronic device (e.g., 1200). In someembodiments, displaying the one or more indicators (e.g., 1204A-1204C)(e.g., date indicator, title indicator, location indicator) that includethe second information (e.g., year, location, title, day, hour) (and,optionally, the first information) is in response to a determinationthat a threshold has been satisfied (e.g., a magnitude of the movementof the one or more contacts of the user input exceeds a thresholdmagnitude, a size of the first content item meets (e.g., exceeds, fallsbelow) a threshold size). In some embodiments, the threshold issatisfied while transitioning from displaying the first content item(e.g., 1208) in the first layout (e.g., 1212A) to displaying the firstcontent item in the second layout (e.g., 1212D).

In some embodiments, a display location, on the display device (e.g.,1202), of the first content item (e.g., 1208) in the second layout(e.g., 1212D) is based on an input location (e.g., on a touch-sensitivesurface) of the user input (e.g., 1210). In some embodiments, the firstcontent item is selected based on an input location of the user input.In some embodiments, the user input is a pinch/de-pinch gesture and thedevice determines a location (e.g., a center point) or a central contentitem (e.g., a content item at a center point of the gesture) based onthe location of the pinch/de-pinch gesture. In some embodiments, theuser input is a tap double-tap (or single tap) gesture and the devicedetermines a location (e.g., a center point) or a central content item(e.g., a content item at a center point of the gesture) based on thelocation of the double-tap (or single tap) gesture. In some embodiments,the electronic device anchors the transition from displaying the firstcontent item in the first layout to displaying the first content item inthe second layout based on the determined location (e.g., a centerpoint) or central content item.

In some embodiments, the second layout (e.g., 1212F, 1212G) includes aplurality of rows and a plurality of columns. In some embodiments, aspart of displaying, via the display device (e.g., 1202), the pluralityof content items (e.g., photos A-T, 1208) (e.g., photo, video, orrepresentations thereof) in the second layout, the electronic device(e.g., 1200) forgoes displaying a number of related content items in thesecond layout (e.g., to eliminate dead space 1224). In some embodiments,the number (quantity of content items to not display) is selected by theelectronic device such that a location of the first content item can bemaintained in the transition from the first layout to the second layoutwithout requiring one or more empty positions (no content itemdisplayed) in a top row of the plurality of rows. In some embodiments,the device determines whether the current layout meets (e.g., is above,or is below) a magnification level. In accordance with meeting themagnification level, the device forgoes displaying the number of relatedcontent items (such that a location of the first content item can bemaintained in the transition from the first layout to the second layoutwithout requiring empty positions in a top row of the plurality ofrows), and in accordance with not meeting the magnification level, thedevice displays the number of related content items (such that alocation of the first content item can be maintained in the transitionfrom the first layout to the second layout, thereby leaving emptypositions in a top row of the plurality of rows). Forgoing displaying anumber of related content items in the second layout enables the deviceto show only complete (e.g., filled-out) rows of content items to theuser. Providing improved visual feedback to the user enhances theoperability of the device and makes the user-device interface moreefficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs andreducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device)which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life ofthe device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly andefficiently.

In some embodiments, the related content items (e.g., photos A-T, 1208)are selected based on one or more similarities among the related contentitems (e.g., photos taken at a same/similar time and/or same/similarlocation).

In some embodiments, the related content items do not include an initialcontent item (the content items being in an ordered set, the contentitem that starts the ordered set being the initial content item) and asubsequent content item (the content item immediately following theinitial content item in the ordered set) (e.g., even if they aresufficiently similar).

In some embodiments, method 1300 further includes one or more of thefollowing items. Subsequent to displaying, on the display device (e.g.,1202), the first content item (e.g., 1208) in the second layout (e.g.,1212F, 1212G), the electronic device (e.g., 1200) detects a request(e.g., a user input, a scroll gesture, a swipe up/down gesture) toscroll the plurality of content items. The electronic device scrolls theplurality of content items at a scroll speed. In accordance with adetermination that the scroll speed exceeds a threshold speed, theelectronic device rearranges the plurality of content items into a thirdlayout (e.g., a content item that was previously in an initial column ismoved to a different column, a content item that was previously notdisplayed as part of the second layout is now displayed) withoutchanging a display size of the content items of the plurality of contentitems (e.g., photos A-T, 1208). In accordance with a determination thatthe scroll speed does not exceed the threshold speed, the electronicdevice foregoes rearranging the plurality of content items into thethird layout.

In some embodiments, subsequent to scrolling the plurality of contentitems (e.g., photos A-T, 1208), the device displays the plurality ofcontent items in the second layout using a new arrangement of thecontent items (e.g., a content item that was previously in a column isnow in a different column, a content item that was previously notdisplayed as part of the second layout is now displayed).

In some embodiments, in response to receiving the request to scroll theplurality of content items (e.g., photos A-T, 1208), the device scrollsthe plurality of content items at a scroll speed. In accordance with adetermination that the scroll speed exceeds a threshold speed, thedevice rearranges the plurality of content items into a third layout(e.g., a content item that was previously in a column is now in adifferent column, a content item that was previously not displayed aspart of the second layout is now displayed) without changing a displaysize of the content items of the plurality of content items, and inaccordance with a determination that the scroll speed does not exceedthe threshold speed, foregoing rearranging the plurality of contentitems into the third layout.

In some embodiments, when the content items in the initial row of thelayout are arranged such that the initial row includes empty space(e.g., 1224) or when the device is reducing/duplicating content items tohave a full initial row, the device shifts the content items in thearray when the user requests a scroll that is above the threshold speed.Thus, when the user is scrolling slowly, the user can continue to trackthe location of content items (the shift doesn't happen), but when theuser is scrolling quickly (and not tracking the locations of contentitems), the device shifts the content items so that the initial (top)row is full (without requiring removal/duplication of content items).

In some embodiments, the second layout (e.g., 1212F, 1212G) includes aplurality of rows and a plurality of columns. In some embodiments, aspart of displaying, via the display device (e.g., 1202), the pluralityof content items (e.g., photos A-T, 1208) (e.g., photo, video, orrepresentations thereof) in the second layout (e.g., 1212F, 1212G), theelectronic device (e.g., 1200) displays a number of duplicate contentitems in the second layout. In some embodiments, the number (quantity ofcontent items to duplicate) is selected by the electronic device suchthat a location of the first content item (e.g., 1208) can be maintainedin the transition from the first layout to the second layout withoutrequiring one or more empty positions (e.g., 1224) (no content itemdisplayed) in a top row of the plurality of rows). In some embodiments,the device determines whether the current layout meets (e.g., is above,or is below) a magnification level. In accordance with meeting themagnification level, the device duplicates the number of content items(such that a location of the first content item can be maintained in thetransition from the first layout to the second layout without requiringempty positions (e.g., 1224) in a top row of the plurality of rows), andin accordance with not meeting the magnification level, the device doesnot duplicate content items (such that a location of the first contentitem is maintained in the transition from the first layout to the secondlayout, thereby leaving empty positions in a top row of the plurality ofrows).

In some embodiments, the second layout (e.g., 1212D) includes aplurality of rows and a plurality of columns. In some embodiments,transitioning from displaying the first content (e.g., 1208) item in thefirst layout (e.g., 1212A) to displaying the first content item in thesecond layout does not include displaying a combination of (e.g.,crossfade of) content items at any location in a row of the firstcontent item (e.g., 1208) (e.g., during the transition from the firstlayout to the second layout).

In some embodiments, a location of the user input (e.g., 1210) (e.g., acenter of a pinch/de-pinch gesture) corresponds to a location of thefirst content item (e.g., 1208) in the first layout (e.g., 1212A). Insome embodiments, as part of transitioning from displaying the firstcontent item in the first layout to displaying the first content item inthe second layout (e.g., 1212D), the electronic device (e.g., 1200)displays the first content item in the second layout such that alocation of the first content item in the second layout at leastpartially (e.g., fully, completely) overlaps with the location of thefirst content item in the first layout. In some embodiments (e.g., whenzooming in), when the first content item in the first layout uses afirst display area, display of the first content item in the secondlayout uses the first display area and additional display area, therebyfully overlapping the first display area. In some embodiments (e.g.,when zooming out), when the first content item in the first layout usesa first display area, display of the first content item in the secondlayout uses a portion of the first display area without using displayarea outside of the first display area, thereby fully overlapping thefirst display area.

In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the firstcontent item (e.g., 1208) is in a first area of the display (e.g., onthe right ⅓ of the display, in the right-most column) in the firstlayout, displaying the first content item in the first area of thedisplay in the second layout; and in accordance with a determinationthat the first content item is in a second area, different from thefirst area, of the display (e.g., on the left ⅓ of the display, in theleft-most column) in the first layout, displaying the first content itemin the second area of the display in the second layout.

In some embodiments, the electronic device maintains visual continuityof the display location of the first content item by anchoring the firstcontent item to the location at which it starts in the first layout. Asa result, the user is more easily able to locate the first content itemonce the device has transitioned to display in the second layout.

In some embodiments, method 1300 further includes one or more of thefollowing items. In some embodiments, while displaying the first contentitem (e.g., 1208) in the second layout (e.g., 1212G), the electronicdevice (e.g., 1200) detects a second user input (e.g., 1222) thatcorresponds to a request to reduce the size of the first content item.In some embodiments, the second user input is a second gesture thatincludes one or more contacts. In some embodiments, in response todetecting at least a first portion of the second gesture (e.g., 1222),the electronic device reduces sizes of the plurality of content items(e.g., photos A-T, 1208) (e.g., including the first content item) (e.g.,zoom out to the maximum zoomed out level) based on a first portion ofthe second gesture, including concurrently displaying a seventh contentitem (e.g., photo along edge of display 602) at a first size and aeighth content item (e.g., photo along edge of display 602) at a secondsize (e.g., the same as the first size, different from the first size).In some embodiments, subsequent to reducing the sizes of the pluralityof content items (e.g., zoom out to the maximum zoomed out level) basedon a first portion of a magnitude of the second gesture, and in responseto detecting at least a second portion of the second gesture (e.g.,1226, continuation of 1222) (e.g., without detecting lift-off of thegesture from the touch-sensitive surface), the electronic deviceincreases a size (e.g., by increasing a dimension (e.g., a width, aheight, or both)) of the seventh content item by a first amount. In someembodiments, the first amount is selected based on a first distance ofthe seventh content item to a location of the second gesture. In someembodiments, subsequent to reducing the sizes of the plurality ofcontent items based on a first portion of a magnitude of the secondgesture, and in response to detecting at least a second portion of thesecond gesture, the electronic device increases a size (e.g., byincreasing the dimension (e.g., a width, a height, or both)) of theeighth content item by a second amount that is greater than the firstamount. In some embodiments, the second amount is selected based on asecond distance of the eighth content item to the location of the secondgesture. In some embodiments, the second distance is greater than thefirst distance. In some embodiments, in response to detecting lift-offof the one or more contacts (e.g., from the touch-sensitive surface),the electronic device decreases the size of the seventh content item bythe first amount to display the seventh content item at the first size,and decreases the size of the eighth content item by the second amountto display the eighth content item at the second size. Zooming outfurther than the maximum zoomed out view and then reverting to themaximum zoomed out view provides the user with feedback that the inputhas been received but that additional zooming out is not supported.Providing improved visual feedback to the user enhances the operabilityof the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g.,by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakeswhen operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reducespower usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the userto use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, while in a selection mode (e.g., mode entered upondetecting selection of “SELECT” button in FIG. 12A), a tap gesture at alocation corresponding to a respective content item selects the contentitem (e.g., via a tap gesture detected at the content item) withoutchanging a size of the respective content item. In some embodiments,while not in the selection mode, a tap gesture at a locationcorresponding to a respective content item changes a size of (e.g.,enlarges) the respective content item. In some embodiments, method 1300further includes one or more of the following items. In someembodiments, while displaying the first content item (e.g., 1208) in thesecond layout (e.g., 1212D), the electronic device (e.g., 1200) detectsa third user input (e.g., 1214) that corresponds to a request to reducethe size of the first content item. In some embodiments, in accordancewith a determination that the electronic device is operating in theselection mode, the electronic device reduces the size of the pluralityof content items to a third size. In some embodiments, in accordancewith a determination that the electronic device is not operating in theselection mode, the electronic device reduces the size of the pluralityof content items to a fourth size that is smaller than the third size.

Note that details of the processes described above with respect tomethod 1300 (e.g., FIG. 13) are also applicable in an analogous mannerto the methods described below/above. For example, method 1100optionally includes one or more of the characteristics of the variousmethods described above with reference to method 1300. For example, whenperforming method 1100, electronic device 600 uses crossfadingtechniques, as discussed above with respect to method 1300, in responseto detecting a pinch gesture (e.g., 1006). For brevity, these detailsare not repeated below.

FIGS. 14A-14F illustrate exemplary devices and user interfaces fornavigating a collection of media items, in accordance with someembodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustratethe processes described below, including the processes in FIG. 15.

FIG. 14A depicts electronic device 600, which is a smartphone withdisplay 602.

Display 602 includes a touch-sensitive surface on which electronicdevice 600 can detect user gestures (e.g., tap, swipe, drag). In someembodiments, electronic device 600 includes one or more features ofelectronic device 100, 300, or 500.

At FIG. 14A, electronic device 600 displays user interface 1400 fornavigating a collection of media items (e.g., photos, videos). Userinterface 1400 includes photos 1402A-1402G, which are being displayed atrespective initial locations on display 602. In some embodiments, thelocations are selected based on the view in which the photos are beingdisplayed (e.g., years, months, days, all photos). At FIG. 14A, thephotos are being displayed in days view 640. In some embodiments, daysview 640 includes a curated set of media items from a media library orrepresentations thereof, where the curated set of media items correspondto a particular time period (e.g., Apr. 18-19, 2018). Additionally, userinterface 1400 includes title 1408 (e.g., corresponding to metadata646A), which provides an indication of the time period to which thedisplayed photos (e.g., 1402A-1402G) correspond.

As shown in FIG. 14A, a user performs a tap gesture to switch from daysview 640 to all photos view 810. As a result, electronic device 600detects input 1404 at affordance 610D, which is associated with an allphotos view.

At FIG. 14B, in response to detecting input 1404, electronic device 600initiates a transition from days view 640 (e.g., a first layout) to allphotos view 810 (e.g., a second layout). As illustrated in FIGS.14B-14F, electronic device 600 transitions from days views 640 to allphotos view 810 in a manner that creates a visual connection between thetwo different views. Specifically, days view 640 includes photos1402A-1402G, while all photos view 810 includes duplicate versions(e.g., 1412A-1412G) of photos 1402A-1402G. Accordingly, during thetransition from days view 640 to all photos view 810, electronic device600 moves photos 1402A-1402G from their respective initial locations torespective final locations, where the respective final locations areoccupied by duplicate versions (e.g., 1412A-1412G) of photos1402A-1402G. As a result, a visual connection between days view 640 andall photos view 810 is formed.

In some embodiments, electronic device 600 initiates a transition fromdays view 640 to all photos view 810 in response to detecting input 1406with movement in the right-to-left direction. In some embodiments, allphotos view 810 includes a non-curated set of media items (e.g., photos,videos) from a media library or representations thereof, as discussedabove with respect to FIG. 8D.

As depicted in FIGS. 14A-14F, during the transition from days view 640to all photos view 810, electronic device 600 transforms photos1402A-1402G from their respective initial states in FIG. 14A to theirrespective final states in FIG. 14F. Specifically, electronic device 600moves photos 1402A-1402G from their respective initial locations in FIG.14A to their respective final locations in FIG. 14F. As discussed above,the respective final locations are already occupied by duplicateversions (e.g., 1412A-1412G) of photos 1402A-1402G. For example, asshown in FIG. 14A, photo 1402A starts at an initial location at the topof display 602. During the transition from days view 640 to all photosview 810, electronic device 600 moves photo 1402A downward and to theleft to the final location shown in FIG. 14F, where duplicate version1412A already resides. It is noted that this movement of photo 1402A isdisplayed by electronic device 600. In contrast, electronic device 600does not move photos of all photos view 810 (e.g., duplicate versions1412A-1412G).

As shown in FIGS. 14A-14F, transforming photos 1402A-1402G also includeschanging the respective displayed sizes of photos 1402A-1402G ifresizing is required. In particular, electronic device 600 resizes oneor more photos from their respective initial sizes in FIG. 14A to theirrespective final sizes in FIG. 14F. Resizing photos can include changingthe level of magnification of the photo, cropping portions of the photo,changing the aspect ratio of the photo, or a combination thereof. Forexample, as shown in FIG. 14A, photo 1402A is displayed at an initialsize with an aspect ratio (e.g., 16:9) corresponding to a landscapeformat. During the transition from days view 640 to all photos view 810,electronic device 600 resizes photo 1402A by cropping left and rightportions of photo 1402A. As a result, the aspect ratio of photo 1402Achanges to a final aspect ratio (e.g., 1:1) corresponding to a squareformat, which matches the aspect ratio of duplicate version 1412A.

Additionally, electronic device 600 changes the level of magnificationof photo 1402A (e.g., zooms out on the photo), resulting in the finalmagnification level of duplicate version 1412A shown in FIG. 14F. As aresult, electronic device 600 resizes photo 1402A to match the size ofits duplicate version (e.g., 1412A). Transforming the photos (e.g.,moving, resizing) in the manner described above provides a visualconnection between days view 640 and all photos view 810.

Photos 1402B-1402G similarly undergo a transformation process during thetransition from days view 640 to all photos view 810, as depicted inFIGS. 14A-14F.

Returning to the start of the transition at FIG. 14B, in response todetecting input 1404, electronic device 600 generates all photos view810, which contains a plurality of photos including duplicate versions(e.g., 1412A-1412G) of photos 1402A-1402G. However, the user is unableto see all photos view 810 in FIG. 14B, as electronic device 600overlays white layer 1410 that has full opacity on top of all photosview 810 such that all photos view 810 is completely covered. Thus,white layer 1410 is visible to the user while the underlying layer ofall photos view 810 is not visible. Additionally, as depicted in FIG.14B-14E, electronic device 600 displays the transformation (e.g.,moving, resizing) of photos 1402A-1402G on top of white layer 1410.

At FIG. 14C, as the transition from days view 640 to all photos view 810progresses, electronic device 600 reduces the opacity of white layer1410 (e.g., increases transparency of white layer 1410). The reducedopacity of white layer 1410 reduces the obscuring of the underlyinglayer of all photos view 810, thereby allowing the photos of all photosview 810 to be visible, as depicted in FIG. 14C. At FIGS. 14D-14E, asthe transition continues to progress, electronic device 600 furtherreduces the opacity of white layer 1410, thereby further reducing theobscuring of all photos view 810. As a result, the user can more easilyseethe photos of all photos view 810. Finally, at FIG. 14F, electronicdevice 600 reduces the opacity of white layer 1410 to zero, resulting inno obscuring of all photos view 810. Further, in some embodiments, atFIG. 14F, electronic device 600 ceases display of photos 1402A-1402G. Itis noted that the techniques described above with respect to white layer1410 improve the visual connection between days view 640 and all photosview 810.

Another connection between days view 640 and all photos view 810 isprovided by the use of a consistent title. At days view 640 in FIG. 14A,title 1408 provides an indication of the particular time period to whichone or more of the displayed photos (e.g., 1402A-1402G) correspond.Similarly, at FIG. 14F, all photos view 810 also includes title 1408.Thus, the photos in days view 640 and all photos view 810 correspond tothe same time period. In some embodiments, electronic device 600switches to a photo layout with a number of columns that exceeds acolumn threshold. In some embodiments, this type of photo layoutincludes a large number of photos. As a result, the title in these typesof photo layouts corresponds to a longer time period (e.g., month,year). Thus, in these types of photo layouts, electronic device 600would display a title different from title 1408, which corresponds to atime period of two days.

In some embodiments, during the transition from days view 640 to allphotos view 810, boundary lines (e.g., 1416A-1416B) between photoscontinue to be displayed during the transition. In some embodiments,continuing to display the boundary lines during the transition improvesthe visual connection between days view 640 and all photos view 810.

In some embodiments, electronic device 600 initiates the transition fromdays view 640 to all photos view 810 in response to detecting an inputwith two contacts, where the distance between the two contacts isdecreasing. In some embodiments, electronic device 600 initiates atransition from all photos view 810 to days view 640 in response todetecting an input with two contacts, where the distance between the twocontacts is increasing.

In some embodiments, a user can return to days view 640 from all photosview 810 by performing a tap gesture at affordance 1414. In someembodiments, in response to detecting an input at affordance 1414,initiates a transition from all photos view 810 to days view 640. Insome embodiments, the transition from all photos view 810 to days view640 would occur in reverse order of FIGS. 14A-14F. In some embodiments,the reverse order of FIGS. 14A-14F includes white layer 1410 starting atfull opacity at FIG. 14E, followed by opacity being reduced untilopacity reaches zero at FIG. 14A.

FIG. 15 is a flow diagram illustrating a method for navigating acollection of media items using an electronic device in accordance withsome embodiments. Method 1500 is performed at a device (e.g., 100, 300,500, 600, 1200) with a display device. Some operations in method 1500are, optionally, combined, the orders of some operations are,optionally, changed, and some operations are, optionally, omitted.

As described below, method 1500 provides an intuitive way for navigatinga collection of media items. The method reduces the cognitive burden ona user for navigating a collection of media items, thereby creating amore efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated computingdevices, enabling a user to navigate a collection of media items fasterand more efficiently conserves power and increases the time betweenbattery charges.

The electronic device (e.g., 600) displays (1502), via the displaydevice (e.g., 602), a plurality of content items (e.g., 1402A-1402G)(e.g., photo, video, or representations thereof) in a first layout(e.g., 640) (e.g., year, month, or days view/layout) (e.g., thatincludes a plurality of rows and a plurality of columns, that includes asingle row or a single column).

As part of displaying the plurality of content items (e.g., 1402A-1402G)in the first layout (e.g., 640), the electronic device (e.g., 600)concurrently displays (1504) a first content item (e.g., 1402A) of theplurality of content items in a first location (e.g., at a firstlocation/position/size), and a second content item (e.g., 1402B) of theplurality of content items in a second location (e.g., at a secondlocation/position/size) different from the first location. In someembodiments, the first content item and the second content item are in asequence (e.g., sequentially ordered).

Method 1500 further includes, while displaying, via the display device(e.g., 602), the plurality of content items (e.g., 1402A-1402G) in thefirst layout (e.g., 640), the electronic device (e.g., 600) detects(1506) a request to display a second layout different from the firstlayout (e.g., tap gesture (e.g., 1404) at a location corresponding to(e.g., at/on) a layout affordance (e.g., 610D) (e.g., all photos), voiceinput).

Method 1500 further includes, in response to detecting the request(e.g., 1404) to display the second layout, the electronic device (e.g.,600) starts (1508) to transition from the first layout (e.g., 640) tothe second layout (e.g., 810). The second layout includes a plurality ofrows and a plurality of columns.

As part of starting to transition from the first layout (e.g., 640) tothe second layout (e.g., 810), the electronic device (e.g., 600)displays (1510) (e.g., initially displays), via the display device(e.g., 602), a third content item (e.g., a photo other than 1412A-1412Gin FIG. 14F) that was not displayed in the first layout (e.g., at aparticular size).

As part of starting to transition to the second layout, the electronicdevice (e.g., 600) displays (1512) (e.g., while concurrently displayingthe third content item at a first fixed location), via the displaydevice (e.g., 602), movement of the first content item (e.g., 1402A)from the first location to a third location in the second layout (e.g.,810). The third location is different from the first location andalready contains a representation of the first content item (e.g.,1412A). In some embodiments, the first content item is selected fordisplay in the second layout (e.g., by the electronic device) based on adetermination (e.g., by the electronic device) that the second layoutincludes the first content item.

As part of starting to transition from the first layout (e.g., 640) tothe second layout (e.g., 810), the electronic device (e.g., 600)displays (1514) (e.g., while concurrently displaying the third contentitem at a first fixed location), via the display device, movement of thesecond content item (e.g., 1402B) from the second location to a fourthlocation in the second layout. The fourth location is different from thesecond location and already contains a representation of the secondcontent item (e.g., 1412B). In some embodiments, the second content itemis selected for display in the second layout (e.g., by the electronicdevice) based on a determination (e.g., by the electronic device) thatthe second layout includes the second content item. In some embodiments,the movement of the first content item and the second content item isdisplayed after the initial display of the third content item. In someembodiments, the sequential order of the first content item and thesecond content item is maintained (e.g., if a first content item comesbefore the second content item in the first layout, the first contentitem also comes before the second content item in the second layout).Displaying movement of a content item into a new location that alreadycontains that content item provides the user with feedback about wherethe movement of the content item is heading. Providing improved visualfeedback to the user enhances the operability of the device and makesthe user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user toprovide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes whenoperating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reducespower usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the userto use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, the first content item (e.g., 1402A) is displayedat a first size in the first layout (e.g., 640). In some embodiments,the second content item (e.g., 1402B) is displayed at a second size,different from the first size, in the first layout. In some embodiments,the first content item is displayed at a third size, different from thefirst size, in the second layout (e.g., 810 in FIG. 14F). In someembodiments, the second content item is displayed at a fourth size,different from the second size, in the second layout.

In some embodiments, the third size and the fourth size are the same. Insome embodiments, the third content item is displayed at the third size(e.g., same as the fourth size) in the second layout.

In some embodiments, the aspect ratios of the content items changes whentransitioning from the first layout (e.g., 640) to the second layout(e.g., 810). In some embodiments, the first content item is displayed ata first aspect ratio in the first layout and the second content item isdisplayed at a second aspect ratio, different from the first aspectratio, in the first layout. In some embodiments, the first content itemis displayed at a third aspect ratio, different from the first aspectratio, in the second layout, and the second content item is displayed ata fourth aspect ratio, different from the second aspect ratio, in thesecond layout. In some embodiments, the third aspect ratio and thefourth aspect ratio are the same. In some embodiments, the third contentitem is displayed at the third aspect ratio (e.g., same as the fourthaspect ratio) in the second layout.

In some embodiments (e.g., when zooming in), when the first content itemin the first layout (e.g., 640) uses a first display area, display ofthe first content item in the second layout uses the first display areaand additional display area, thereby fully overlapping the first displayarea. In some embodiments (e.g., when zooming out), when the firstcontent item in the first layout uses a first display area, display ofthe first content item in the second layout uses a portion of the firstdisplay area without using a second portion of the first display areaand without using display area outside of the first display area,thereby fully overlapping the first display area.

In some embodiments, method 1500 further includes one or more of thefollowing items. In some embodiments, while displaying, via the displaydevice (e.g., 602), the plurality of content items (e.g., 1412A-1412G)in the second layout (e.g., 810), the electronic device (e.g., 600)detects a request to display the first layout (e.g., tap gesture at alocation corresponding to (e.g., at/on) a layout affordance (e.g., 1414)(e.g., day view of photos), voice input). In some embodiments, inresponse to detecting the request (e.g., input at 1414) to display thefirst layout, the electronic device starts to transition from the secondlayout (e.g., 810 in FIG. 14F) to the first layout (e.g., 640 in FIG.14A). In some embodiments, as part of starting to transition from thesecond layout to the first layout, the electronic device ceases todisplay the third content item (e.g., a photo other than 1412A-1412G inFIG. 14F). In some embodiments, as part of starting to transition fromthe second layout to the first layout, the electronic device displays(e.g., while no longer displaying the third content item), via thedisplay device, movement of the first content item (e.g., 1412A) fromthe third location to the first location in the first layout. In someembodiments, the first location already contains a representation of thefirst content item (e.g., 1402A). In some embodiments, as part ofstarting to transition from the second layout to the first layout, theelectronic device displays (e.g., while no longer displaying the thirdcontent item), via the display device, movement of the second contentitem (e.g., 1412B) from the fourth location to the second location inthe first layout. In some embodiments, the second location alreadycontains a representation of the second content item (e.g., 1402B).Displaying movement of a content item into a new location that alreadycontains that content item provides the user with feedback about wherethe movement of the content item is heading. Providing improved visualfeedback to the user enhances the operability of the device and makesthe user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user toprovide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes whenoperating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reducespower usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the userto use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, transitioning from the first layout (e.g., 640 inFIG. 14A) to the second layout (e.g., 810 in FIG. 14F) does not includemovement of the third content item (e.g., a photo other than 1412A-1412Gin FIG. 14F) that was not displayed in the first layout. In someembodiments, the second layout includes all the content items from thefirst layout and includes additional content items. In some embodiments,all content items from the first layout include movement during thetransition to the second layout. In some embodiments, all the additionalcontent items (that were not displayed in the first layout) do notinclude movement during the transition the second layout. Not movingcontent items that are newly displayed provides the user with feedbackabout which content items are newly displayed and were not available forviewing in the previous view. Providing improved visual feedback to theuser enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-deviceinterface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide properinputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with thedevice) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves batterylife of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quicklyand efficiently.

In some embodiments, as part of transitioning from the first layout(e.g., 640 in FIG. 14A) to the second layout (e.g., 810 in FIG. 14F),the electronic device (e.g., 600) displays (e.g., when starting thetransition) a first visual layer (e.g., 1410) (e.g., a white-colored, alayer, a cover, a sheet) with an opacity level. In some embodiments, aspart of transitioning from the first layout to the second layout, theelectronic device reduces (e.g., gradually reducing) the opacity levelof the first visual layer in conjunction with the movement of the firstcontent item (e.g., 1402A) from the first location to the third locationin the second layout (e.g., resulting in the opacity of the first visuallayer becoming zero). In some embodiments, as part of displaying thethird content item (e.g., a photo other than 1412A-1412G in FIG. 14F)that was not displayed in the first layout, the electronic devicegradually displays the third content item as the opacity of the firstvisual layer is reduced. In some embodiments, reducing the opacity levelreveals content items (e.g., the representation of the second contentitem that is not moving).

In some embodiments, as part of the transition from the first layout tothe second layout, the electronic device displays (e.g., when startingthe transition) a second visual layer (e.g., a white-colored, a layer, acover, a sheet) with an opacity level, wherein the second visual layeroverlaps (e.g., fully) the second content item that is displayed at thesecond location. In some embodiments, as part of the transition from thefirst layout to the second layout, the electronic device reduces (e.g.,gradually reduces) the opacity level of the second visual layer inconjunction with the movement of the second content item from the secondlocation to the fourth location in the second layout (e.g., resulting inthe opacity of the second visual layer becoming zero). In someembodiments, the first visual layer and the second visual layer are partof the same visual layer and their levels of opacity match.

Changing the opacity of a layer in front of content items as othercontent items move into place provides the user with feedback aboutwhere the moving content items are going. Providing improved visualfeedback to the user enhances the operability of the device and makesthe user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user toprovide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes whenoperating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reducespower usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the userto use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, the first visual layer (e.g., 1410) overlaps (e.g.,fully) the representation of the first content item (e.g., 1412A) thatis displayed at the third location. In some embodiments, first visuallayer overlaps (e.g., fully) the third content item. In someembodiments, the second visual layer overlaps (e.g., fully) the secondcontent item that is displayed at the second location.

In some embodiments, as part of displaying, via the display device(e.g., 602), the plurality of content items (e.g., 1402A-1402G) in thefirst layout (e.g., 640), the electronic device (e.g., 600) concurrentlydisplays, on the display device, a first boundary (e.g., 1416A-1416B)(e.g., a first boundary line, as part of keylines) that separates afirst column of the first layout from a second column of the firstlayout, wherein the second column is adjacent to the first column, and asecond boundary (e.g., a second boundary line, as part of keylines) thatseparates the second column of the first layout from a third column ofthe first layout, wherein the third column is adjacent to the secondcolumn. In some embodiments, as part of the transition from the firstlayout to the second layout, the electronic device changes a distance(e.g., via an animation, increasing the distance when zooming in,decreasing the distance when zooming out) between the first boundary andthe second boundary. In some embodiments, the distance between theboundary lines changes in conjunction with movement of the user input(e.g., pinch, de-pinch gesture) requesting to display the second layout.In some embodiments, the first and second boundary lines are parallel(and remain parallel throughout the transition). In some embodiments,the transition includes changing distances between a plurality ofboundary lines (e.g., vertical and horizontal, keylines) that separate aplurality of columns and a plurality of rows. This indicates to the userthat the first layout and the second layout are connected and that thefirst layout and the second layout share some content items.

In some embodiments, the request to display the second layout (e.g.,810) is a gesture (e.g., a multiple-finger gesture, a multiple-contactgesture) on a touch-sensitive surface of the electronic device (e.g.,600). In some embodiments, the gesture includes a plurality of contactson the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the distancebetween the plurality of (e.g., two) contacts changes as the gestureprogresses. In some embodiments, the request to display the secondlayout is a pinch or de-pinch gesture.

In some embodiments, the transition from the first layout (e.g., 640) tothe second layout (e.g., 810) occurs in conjunction with the change indistance between the plurality of contacts (e.g., the transitionprogresses as the pinch/depinch gesture progresses). Transitioning thelayout in conjunction with the movement of the contents provides theuser with feedback that the input is causing the change from the firstlayout to the second layout. Providing improved visual feedback to theuser enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-deviceinterface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide properinputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with thedevice) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves batterylife of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quicklyand efficiently.

In some embodiments, the request to display the second layout is a swipegesture (e.g., 1406) (e.g., a single-finger/contact swipe) on atouch-sensitive surface of the electronic device, wherein the swipegesture originates at an edge of the touch-sensitive surface.

In some embodiments, the transition from the first layout (e.g., 640) tothe second layout (e.g., 810) occurs in conjunction with the swipegesture (e.g., the transition progresses as the swipe gestureprogresses). In some embodiments, a swipe gesture results in thetransition from the first layout to the second layout includingcollapsing the content items of the first layout into a container (e.g.,in conjunction with the swipe gesture).

In some embodiments, the first layout (e.g., 640) includes display of(e.g., overlaid on the plurality of content items, displayed above theplurality of content items, displayed adjacent to a content item of theplurality of content items) a first label (e.g., 1408) (e.g., withoutdisplaying a second label, one or more indicators (e.g., date indicator,title indicator, location indicator) that include first information(e.g., month) and second information (e.g., year, location, title, day,hour)). In some embodiments, the second layout (e.g., 810) includesdisplay of (e.g., overlaid on the plurality of content items, displayedabove the plurality of content items, displayed adjacent to a contentitem of the plurality of content items) the first label (e.g., 1408). Insome embodiments, method 1500 further includes one or more of thefollowing items. While displaying, via the display device (e.g., 602),the plurality of content items (e.g., 1412A-1412G) in the second layout,the electronic device (e.g., 600) detects a second request to display athird layout (e.g., 810 in FIG. 10L) different from the first layout andthe second layout (e.g., tap gesture at a location corresponding to(e.g., at/on) a layout affordance (e.g., all photos), voice input). Inresponse to detecting the request to display the third layout, theelectronic device transitions from the second layout to the thirdlayout. In some embodiments, the third layout includes a plurality ofrows and a plurality of columns. In some embodiments, the third layoutincludes display of more content items than the second layout (and morecontent items than the first layout). In some embodiments, the thirdlayout includes display of (e.g., overlaid on the plurality of contentitems, displayed above the plurality of content items, displayedadjacent to a content item of the plurality of content items) a secondlabel (e.g., 1003 in FIG. 10L) (e.g., without displaying the firstlabel, one or more indicators (e.g., date indicator, title indicator,location indicator) that include first information (e.g., month) withoutincluding second information (e.g., year, location, title, day, hour),the first information and second information corresponding to at leastsome of the plurality of content items (and, optionally, displayed at alocation selected based on the location of the corresponding contentitems)) different from the first label. In some embodiments, the contentitems in the third layout are all of the same aspect ratio (e.g.,square) and of the same size.

In some embodiments, the second layout (e.g., 810 in FIG. 14F) (and/orthe first layout, and/or a fourth layout that includes more contentitems than the third layout) includes a label (e.g., 1408) (e.g., a datelabel (month and/or year) that corresponds to a content item (e.g.,1412B) of displayed content items. In some embodiments, the label isdisplayed at a location. In some embodiments, the location of the labelalong a first axis (e.g., Y-axis, vertical display location) is based onthe location of the corresponding content item (e.g., the label and thecorresponding content item are displayed at the same vertical location,input that changes the vertical location of the corresponding contentitem also similarly changes the vertical location of the label). In someembodiments, the location of the label along a second axis (e.g.,X-axis, horizontal display location) is not based on the location of thecorresponding content item. In some embodiments, as the content itemsscroll on the display or are rearranged, the display location of contentitems change. When a content item has a corresponding label (e.g.,marking the date, year, location of the content item), the label forthat content item (which is also optionally a label for a group ofcontent items of which the corresponding item is a member) moves withthe content item in the vertical direction (as the content item movesup, the label moves up) but does not move with the content item in thehorizontal direction (as the content item moves in the horizontaldirection, the horizontal location of the label does not change).

Note that details of the processes described above with respect tomethod 1500 (e.g., FIG. 15) are also applicable in an analogous mannerto the methods described above. For example, method 1500 optionallyincludes one or more of the characteristics of the various methodsdescribed above with reference to methods 700 and 900. For example, whenperforming method 1500, electronic device 600 implements days view 640and/or all photos view 810 in the manner discussed above with respect tomethods 700 and 900. For brevity, these details are not repeated below.

The foregoing description, for purpose of explanation, has beendescribed with reference to specific embodiments. However, theillustrative discussions above are not intended to be exhaustive or tolimit the invention to the precise forms disclosed. Many modificationsand variations are possible in view of the above teachings. Theembodiments were chosen and described in order to best explain theprinciples of the techniques and their practical applications. Othersskilled in the art are thereby enabled to best utilize the techniquesand various embodiments with various modifications as are suited to theparticular use contemplated.

Although the disclosure and examples have been fully described withreference to the accompanying drawings, it is to be noted that variouschanges and modifications will become apparent to those skilled in theart. Such changes and modifications are to be understood as beingincluded within the scope of the disclosure and examples as defined bythe claims.

As described above, one aspect of the present technology is thegathering and use of data available from various sources to improve thepresentation of media content or any other content that may be ofinterest to them. The present disclosure contemplates that in someinstances, this gathered data may include personal information data thatuniquely identifies or can be used to contact or locate a specificperson. Such personal information data can include demographic data,location-based data, telephone numbers, email addresses, twitter IDs,home addresses, data or records relating to a user's health or level offitness (e.g., vital signs measurements, medication information,exercise information), date of birth, or any other identifying orpersonal information.

The present disclosure recognizes that the use of such personalinformation data, in the present technology, can be used to the benefitof users. For example, the personal information data can be used topresent targeted content that is of greater interest to the user.Accordingly, use of such personal information data enables users tocalculated control of the presented content. Further, other uses forpersonal information data that benefit the user are also contemplated bythe present disclosure. For instance, health and fitness data may beused to provide insights into a user's general wellness, or may be usedas positive feedback to individuals using technology to pursue wellnessgoals.

The present disclosure contemplates that the entities responsible forthe collection, analysis, disclosure, transfer, storage, or other use ofsuch personal information data will comply with well-established privacypolicies and/or privacy practices. In particular, such entities shouldimplement and consistently use privacy policies and practices that aregenerally recognized as meeting or exceeding industry or governmentalrequirements for maintaining personal information data private andsecure. Such policies should be easily accessible by users, and shouldbe updated as the collection and/or use of data changes. Personalinformation from users should be collected for legitimate and reasonableuses of the entity and not shared or sold outside of those legitimateuses. Further, such collection/sharing should occur after receiving theinformed consent of the users. Additionally, such entities shouldconsider taking any needed steps for safeguarding and securing access tosuch personal information data and ensuring that others with access tothe personal information data adhere to their privacy policies andprocedures. Further, such entities can subject themselves to evaluationby third parties to certify their adherence to widely accepted privacypolicies and practices. In addition, policies and practices should beadapted for the particular types of personal information data beingcollected and/or accessed and adapted to applicable laws and standards,including jurisdiction-specific considerations. For instance, in the US,collection of or access to certain health data may be governed byfederal and/or state laws, such as the Health Insurance Portability andAccountability Act (HIPAA); whereas health data in other countries maybe subject to other regulations and policies and should be handledaccordingly. Hence different privacy practices should be maintained fordifferent personal data types in each country.

Despite the foregoing, the present disclosure also contemplatesembodiments in which users selectively block the use of, or access to,personal information data. That is, the present disclosure contemplatesthat hardware and/or software elements can be provided to prevent orblock access to such personal information data. For example, in the caseof media content presentation services, the present technology can beconfigured to allow users to select to “opt in” or “opt out” ofparticipation in the collection of personal information data duringregistration for services or anytime thereafter. In addition toproviding “opt in” and “opt out” options, the present disclosurecontemplates providing notifications relating to the access or use ofpersonal information. For instance, a user may be notified upondownloading an app that their personal information data will be accessedand then reminded again just before personal information data isaccessed by the app.

Moreover, it is the intent of the present disclosure that personalinformation data should be managed and handled in a way to minimizerisks of unintentional or unauthorized access or use. Risk can beminimized by limiting the collection of data and deleting data once itis no longer needed. In addition, and when applicable, including incertain health related applications, data de-identification can be usedto protect a user's privacy. De-identification may be facilitated, whenappropriate, by removing specific identifiers (e.g., date of birth,etc.), controlling the amount or specificity of data stored (e.g.,collecting location data a city level rather than at an address level),controlling how data is stored (e.g., aggregating data across users),and/or other methods.

Therefore, although the present disclosure broadly covers use ofpersonal information data to implement one or more various disclosedembodiments, the present disclosure also contemplates that the variousembodiments can also be implemented without the need for accessing suchpersonal information data. That is, the various embodiments of thepresent technology are not rendered inoperable due to the lack of all ora portion of such personal information data. For example, content can beselected and presented to users by inferring preferences based onnon-personal information data or a bare minimum amount of personalinformation, such as the content being requested by the deviceassociated with a user, other non-personal information available to thecontent presentation services, or publicly available information.

1. An electronic device, comprising: a display device; one or moreprocessors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to beexecuted by the one or more processors, the one or more programsincluding instructions for: displaying, via the display device, aplurality of media items in a first layout that includes a plurality ofrows and a plurality of columns, including displaying: a first mediaitem of the plurality of media items at a first aspect ratio and a firstsize, a second media item of the plurality of media items at the firstaspect ratio, and a third media item of the plurality of media items;while displaying, via the display device, the plurality of media itemsin the first layout that includes the plurality of rows and theplurality of columns, detecting a user input that includes a gesture,wherein the user input corresponds to a request to change a size of thefirst media item; and in response to detecting the user input: graduallychanging, as the gesture progresses, the size of the first media itemfrom the first size to a second size that is different from the firstsize while concurrently gradually changing, as the gesture progresses,an aspect ratio of the first media item from the first aspect ratio to asecond aspect ratio that is different from the first aspect ratio; andchanging an aspect ratio of the second media item from the first aspectratio to a third aspect ratio that is different from the first aspectratio.
 2. The electronic device of claim 1, wherein: gradually changingthe size of the first media item from the first size to the second sizeincludes: gradually changing the size of the first media item from thefirst size to the second size in conjunction with movement of thegesture; and gradually changing the aspect ratio of the first media itemfrom the first aspect ratio to the second aspect ratio includes:gradually changing the aspect ratio of the first media item from thefirst aspect ratio to the second aspect ratio in conjunction withmovement of the gesture.
 3. The electronic device of claim 1, wherein:gradually changing the aspect ratio of the first media item from thefirst aspect ratio to the second aspect ratio includes: graduallychanging the aspect ratio of the first media item from the first aspectratio to an intermediate aspect ratio while maintaining a magnificationof the first media item; and gradually changing the aspect ratio of thefirst media item from the intermediate aspect ratio to the second aspectratio while changing a magnification of the first media item.
 4. Theelectronic device of claim 1, wherein changing the aspect ratio of thefirst media item from the first aspect ratio to the second aspect ratioincludes: cropping portions of the first media item or revealingpreviously cropped portions of the first media item.
 5. The electronicdevice of claim 1, wherein: displaying the second media item in thefirst layout includes displaying the second media item at the firstaspect ratio; and displaying the third media item in the first layoutincludes displaying the third media item at the first aspect ratio. 6.The electronic device of claim 1, wherein: the first aspect ratio issquare; and the second aspect ratio is rectangular with unequal adjacentsides.
 7. The electronic device of claim 1, wherein displaying thesecond media item in the first layout includes displaying the secondmedia item at the first aspect ratio, the one or more programs furtherincluding instructions for: in response to detecting the user input,changing an aspect ratio of the second media item from the first aspectratio to a third aspect ratio that is different from the first aspectratio and the second aspect ratio, so that at least a subset of theplurality of media items are displayed in a second layout that includesconcurrently displaying the first media item in the second aspect ratioand at least a portion of the second media item in the third aspectratio.
 8. The electronic device of claim 1, the one or more programsfurther including instructions for: in response to detecting the userinput: displaying, via the display device, a subset of the plurality ofmedia items in a second layout that includes a single row or a singlecolumn, including: concurrently displaying, on the display device, withthe first media item at the second aspect ratio, the second media itemof the plurality of media items at a third aspect ratio, wherein thethird aspect ratio is different from the first aspect ratio, and withoutconcurrently displaying the third media item of the plurality of mediaitems.
 9. The electronic device of claim 1, the one or more programsfurther including instructions for: while displaying, via the displaydevice, the first media item at the second size and at the second aspectratio, detecting a second user input that corresponds to a request tochange a size of the first media item; and in response to detecting thesecond user input, gradually changing the size of the first media itemfrom the second size to the first size while concurrently graduallychanging the aspect ratio of the first media item from the second aspectratio to the first aspect ratio.
 10. The electronic device of claim 9,wherein changing the aspect ratio of the first media item from thesecond aspect ratio to the first aspect ratio includes: in accordancewith a determination that the first media item is in a portrait format,reducing the height of the first media item.
 11. The electronic deviceof claim 9, wherein changing the aspect ratio of the first media itemfrom the second aspect ratio to the first aspect ratio includes: inaccordance with a determination that the first media item is in alandscape format, reducing the width of the first media item.
 12. Theelectronic device of claim 9, the one or more programs further includinginstructions for: while displaying, via the display device, theplurality of media items, including the first media item at the firstsize and at the first aspect ratio, in the first layout that includesthe plurality of rows and the plurality of columns, detecting a thirduser input that corresponds to a request to change a size of the firstmedia item; and in response to detecting the third user input,displaying, via the display device, a second plurality of media items ina third layout that includes a second plurality of rows and a secondplurality of columns, including: gradually changing the size of thefirst media item from the first size to a third size without changingthe aspect ratio of the first media item.
 13. The electronic device ofclaim 8, wherein: the second layout is different from the first layout;in the first layout the second media item has a first location relativeto the first media item; in the second layout the third media item hasthe first location relative to the first media item; and displaying, onthe display device, the subset of the plurality of media items in thesecond layout includes: transitioning, as the gesture of the user inputprogresses, from displaying the first media item in the first layout todisplaying the first media item in the second layout, includingdisplaying a combination of the second media item and the third mediaitem at the first location relative to the first media item during thetransition from displaying the first media item in the first layout todisplaying the first media item in the second layout.
 14. The electronicdevice of claim 9, the one or more programs further includinginstructions for: while displaying, via the display device, theplurality of media items, including the first media item at the firstsize and at the first aspect ratio, in the first layout that includesthe plurality of rows and the plurality of columns, detecting a fourthuser input that corresponds to a request to change an aspect ratio ofthe first media item; and in response to detecting the fourth userinput, changing the aspect ratio of at least some of the plurality ofmedia items while continuing to display the plurality of media items inthe first layout, including changing the aspect ratio of the first mediaitem from the first aspect ratio to a third aspect ratio.
 15. Theelectronic device of claim 1, the one or more programs further includinginstructions for: while displaying the plurality of media items in thefirst layout that includes the plurality of rows and the plurality ofcolumns, providing an option to change aspect ratios of at least some ofthe plurality of media items while continuing to display the pluralityof media items in the first layout; and subsequent to displaying theplurality of media items in the first layout, displaying the pluralityof media items in a fourth layout that includes a third plurality ofrows and a third plurality of columns without providing the option tochange aspect ratios of at least some of the plurality of media items.16. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one ormore programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of anelectronic device with a display device, the one or more programsincluding instructions for: displaying, via the display device, aplurality of media items in a first layout that includes a plurality ofrows and a plurality of columns, including displaying: a first mediaitem of the plurality of media items at a first aspect ratio and a firstsize, a second media item of the plurality of media items at the firstaspect ratio, and a third media item of the plurality of media items;while displaying, via the display device, the plurality of media itemsin the first layout that includes the plurality of rows and theplurality of columns, detecting a user input that includes a gesture,wherein the user input corresponds to a request to change a size of thefirst media item; and in response to detecting the user input: graduallychanging, as the gesture progresses, the size of the first media itemfrom the first size to a second size that is different from the firstsize while concurrently gradually changing, as the gesture progresses,an aspect ratio of the first media item from the first aspect ratio to asecond aspect ratio that is different from the first aspect ratio; andchanging an aspect ratio of the second media item from the first aspectratio to a third aspect ratio that is different from the first aspectratio.
 17. A method, comprising: at an electronic device with a displaydevice: displaying, via the display device, a plurality of media itemsin a first layout that includes a plurality of rows and a plurality ofcolumns, including displaying: a first media item of the plurality ofmedia items at a first aspect ratio and a first size, a second mediaitem of the plurality of media items at the first aspect ratio, and athird media item of the plurality of media items; while displaying, viathe display device, the plurality of media items in the first layoutthat includes the plurality of rows and the plurality of columns,detecting a user input that includes a gesture, wherein the user inputcorresponds to a request to change a size of the first media item; andin response to detecting the user input; gradually changing, as thegesture progresses, the size of the first media item from the first sizeto a second size that is different from the first size whileconcurrently gradually changing, as the gesture progresses, an aspectratio of the first media item from the first aspect ratio to a secondaspect ratio that is different from the first aspect ratio; and changingan aspect ratio of the second media item from the first aspect ratio toa third aspect ratio that is different from the first aspect ratio.